PAC SecureNet

User Guide
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Jul 2011
This document is provided by Stanley Security Solutions or its affiliates (“Stanley”) for general information
purposes only. Stanley warrant the accuracy of the data but will not be responsible for any loss or damage
that may arise from reliance thereon. The copyright © of all documents is owned by Stanley Security
Solutions. Stanley, Blick, PAC, GDX and Alfia are registered trademarks of The Stanley Works.
PAC — A Stanley Security Products Business, 1 Park Gate Close, Bredbury, Stockport SK6 2SZ, U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 161 406 3400 Fax: +44 (0) 161 406 8984 Web: www.pac.co.uk
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Version and Copyright
Version 3.4 — Jul 2011
Changes are periodically made to the product; these changes will be incorporated into new
editions of this document. Stanley Security Products shall not be liable for errors contained
herein or for any consequential damages connected with the use of this material.
Copyright and Protective Notices
Page ii
•
The copyright of this document and the associated drawings is the property of
Stanley Security Products, and is issued on condition that it is not copied, reprinted
or reproduced, nor its contents disclosed, either wholly or in part, without the
consent in writing of, or in accordance with the conditions of a contract with Stanley
Security Products.
•
The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent
or other protective rights of Stanley Security Products, or others.
•
Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical, and must be
specifically confirmed by Stanley Security Products before they become applicable
to any tender, order or contract.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Training and Technical Support (U.K. only)
Training
Training courses covering the installation and use of all PAC products are regularly held at
PAC, Stockport. For further information on course availability, or to discuss your specific
requirements, contact the Training Manager at the address below.
It is strongly recommended that any persons installing or commissioning PAC products attend a
suitable training course beforehand.
Technical Support
Technical Support for all products is available during normal office hours. This service is
provided primarily for the use of trained engineers.
End users of PAC items should first of all contact their installation or maintenance company
before contacting PAC.
Further information is given in 17409 Technical Support and Training Information.
Knowledge database available after registration: www.stanleysecurityproducts.co.uk/support/.
Contact
United Kingdom
Tel: 0845 206 3400
Fax: 0161 406 6794
International
Tel: +44 161 430 1340
Fax: +44 161 406 6794
Email
[email protected]
PAC — A Stanley Security Solutions Business
1 Park Gate Close
Bredbury
Stockport
SK6 2SZ
U.K.
Page iii
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Health and Safety
IMPORTANT
When installing the hardware the following should be noted. Please read all these instructions
and save them for later use.
Installation must be wired in accordance with National Wiring Regulations (BS7671, IEE
National Wiring Regulations in the UK). Failure to do so can result in injury or death by electric
shock.
It must also comply with any local Fire, Health and Safety regulations. A secured door that may
be part of an escape route from an area must be fitted with:
•
A fail-safe lock (A) so that the door will be released if the power fails. Ideally a
magnetic lock should be used as these are less likely to jam or seize.
•
A normally-closed break-glass or manual pull (B) in the lock supply wiring so that in
an emergency the fail-safe lock can be immediately depowered.
B
A
The controller must be earthed.
Isolate the controller power supply before working on the controller.
Cabling
The cabling used in the access control systems, e.g. reader cables, are not prone to electrical
interference. However, you should avoid routing cable close to heavy load switching cables
and equipment. If this is unavoidable, cross the cable at right angles every 3.3–6.6ft / 1–2m to
reduce the interference.
ESD Precautions
The PAC 500 series of controllers contain static-sensitive devices; an earth grounding strap
should be worn when maintaining a running system.
RFID Devices
As similar RFID technology is now widely used in a number of other industries, e.g. automotive
immobilisers, it is possible that interaction between your access control ID and other devices
may cause one or the other to function incorrectly. Should you suspect that you have
experienced such a problem the solution is to separate your access control ID from other RFID
devices.
Page iv
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Lithium Batteries
WARNING
THERE IS A DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF LITHIUM BATTERIES ARE INCORRECTLY
REPLACED OR HANDLED. PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES
CAREFULLY. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN INJURY.
•
Take steps to ensure that lithium batteries are never short circuited.
•
Always store lithium batteries separately in non-conducting materials.
•
Never replace a lithium battery with the incorrect type.
•
U.K. Only: Do not place lithium batteries with normal waste collections; dispose of
them correctly.
U.S. Only: Lithium batteries are classified by the federal government as
non-hazardous waste and are safe for disposal in the normal municipal waste
stream. Fully discharge the battery prior to disposal.
•
U.K. Only: For information on the disposal of used lithium batteries and your local
disposal sites, call the U.K. Environment Agency Helpline on 08708 506 506.
U.S. Only: Lithium batteries contain recyclable materials and are accepted for
recycling by the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation’s (RBRC) Battery
Recycling Program. Call 1 800 8 BATTERY or visit www.rbrc.org for more
information.
Page v
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Glossary
Access Controller
An access controller determines when a door is unlocked depending on the key code
received from a reader or Request to Exit switch. The type of controller determines how
many doors it can control, e.g. the PAC 512 can control 2 doors using up to 4 readers.
Access Group
An access group is a list of areas to which a keyholder is allowed access. The access may
be restricted to certain times by use of a time profile.
Airlock
An airlock is an area controlled by two or more doors. If one door is open, the other(s)
cannot be opened even with a valid key. Closing all doors allows a single door to be opened
with a valid key.
Alarm
An alarm is an event that requires attention, e.g. a door forced open alarm.
Alarm Category
An alarm category is a group of alarms defined by a privileged user. Each alarm category
has its own icon and alarm sound.
Alarm Point
An alarm point is an item that generates an alarm when in a specified state, e.g. a door that
has been propped open can generate a door left open alarm.
Anti-Passback
Anti-passback prevents a key being shared. Sharing occurs, for example, when one
keyholder accesses an area and then either holds the door open or passes the key back so
that others can gain entry. When anti-passback is applied to an area, a key that has been
used to enter the area cannot be used to enter the area again until it has been used to exit
the area. If passback is transgressed, it can be reset for the keyholder by an operator with
the appropriate privilege; you can also specify a timed reset and/or tailgate reset for the
area.
Area
An area has at least one door. The outside is counted as an area because it has a door for
entering/leaving a building.
Bolted Door
A bolted door on a PAC 512 access controller prevents access to all keyholders except
those with bolt door keyholder privilege.
A bolted door on a 1100/2100/2200 series door controller prevents any time profile
assigned to the door from unlocking the door.
Buddy Reader
A buddy reader requires two keys to open the door, i.e. two keyholders are required before
entry into an area is allowed.
Channel
A channel is a connection between two items of hardware.
See also Direct Channel, Door Channel, PC Channel, RS-485 Channel, TCP/IP Channel.
Controller
A controller is a device that controls the hardware in the system, e.g. the readers and locks.
See also Access Controller, Input Controller, Output Controller.
Page vi
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Diagnostic Code
A 2-byte hexadecimal number that can be mapped to one or more diagnostic messages. 0
indicates that no diagnostic conditions exist.
Dialup Channel
A dialup channel is the connection between controllers and a PC via modems.
Direct Channel
A direct channel is the connection between controllers and a PC via an RS-232 connection.
The connection is usually via an administration kit.
Door
A door allows or prevents access in and out of an area. Doors may have a reader on each
side to allow access to be controlled in both in and out directions. Other doors may have a
reader on one side and a Request to Exit switch on the other so that a key is not required to
leave the area.
Door Channel
A door channel is the connection between a door and a controller. The PAC 512 has two
door channels because it can control two doors. Each door channel can have two readers
(in and out) or one reader and a Request to Exit switch connected to it.
Door Contact
A door contact is a device, usually a magnetic switch, that may be installed on a door to
monitor whether the door is open or closed.
Event
An event is a transaction (does not require attention) or alarm (requires attention) that
occurs on the system. All events are logged by the system. The type of event determines
how it is reported to the operator.
Exit / Entry Out of Hours
Exit / entry out of hours is a facility that prevents a person being trapped, e.g. a keyholder
with limited time only (controlled by a time profile) enters an area with an in and out reader
and stays too long. The keyholder can still exit but an event is generated.
Fail Full Secure
Fail full secure is a communications failure mode that does not allow entry and exit into an
area.
Fail Safe
Fail safe is a communications failure mode that only allows entry and exit into an area for
certain keyholders. For PAC 500 TCP/IP channels, priority keyholders and keyholders
that have used their key are allowed to enter or exit the area. For other channels, priority
keyholders and keyholders that have been downloaded to the controller are allowed to enter
and exit the area.
Fail Secure
Fail secure is a communications failure mode that allows entry and exit into an area for
priority keyholders only.
Fail-Safe Lock
A fail-safe lock (or power to lock) requires a permanent power supply to keep the door
locked, i.e. in the event of power failure the door would become unlocked.
Fail-Secure Lock
A fail-secure lock (or power to unlock) requires power to unlock the door. These can be
dangerous in the event of emergencies such as fires. Always consult Heath and Safety
personnel before fitting a fail-secure lock.
Page vii
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Full Arm Area
A full arm area is an area where all alarm points in the area are armed and all keys (except
those with a privileged access group) are denied access.
Holiday Period
A holiday period consists of a start and end date. A number of holiday periods are assigned
to a holiday profile which can then be included in a Time or Mode profile to limit access
during holiday periods.
Holiday Profile
A holiday profile can be included in a Time or Mode profile to limit access during holiday
periods. A holiday profile consists of one or more holiday periods that can span multiple
days.
Input
An input is a digital state that indicates the state of an electronic switch, e.g. a 2-state input
would indicate closed or open.
Input Controller
An input controller provides end-of-line inputs that you can use to monitor certain
conditions, e.g. a normally closed input could generate an alarm if it went open.
Key
A key is a token, fob or card that when presented to a reader unlocks the door. The door is
only unlocked if the key is valid — i.e. the key is known to the system, allows access to the
area and is not presented outside a permitted time profile.
Keyholder
A keyholder is a person who has a key. This could be a member of staff or a visitor. The
key allocated to the keyholder is only valid for specified areas and times, e.g. visitors can be
prevented from entering an area at any time and all areas after a certain date.
Legacy Controller
A 1100 / 2100 / 2200 series controller.
See also Controller.
Legacy Organisational Unit
An Organisational Unit which uses legacy controllers, or a mixture or legacy controllers and
other controllers.
See also Legacy Controller.
Mode Profile
A mode profile can be applied to an area, door or reader to determine its mode, e.g. door
locked or unlocked. A holiday profile can be assigned to a mode profile to limit access
during holiday periods.
Offline Controller
An offline controller is not permanently connected to a PC but can be programmed and
updated by a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) or laptop computer that is connected when
required. This should not be confused with an Online Controller that has been put offline.
Omitted Alarm Point
An omitted alarm point is an alarm point that is not armed when its associated area is
armed and therefore allows the area to be armed even when the alarm point is in alarm, i.e.
the area is said to be partially armed.
Online Controller
An online controller is permanently connected to a PC and is automatically updated when
changes are made via PAC SecureNet.
Page viii
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Operator
An operator is a keyholder who is allowed to make changes to the database determined by
the operator privileges, e.g. a receptionist can add keyholders but not controllers.
Output
An output is a digital state that controls an output relay, e.g. an output would close or open
an electronic switch depending on specified conditions being detected.
Output Controller
An output controller provides relay outputs that you can use to control certain conditions,
e.g. a siren could be activated if an alarm condition is detected.
PC Channel
A PC channel is the connection between a controller and a PC.
PIN Reader
A PIN reader is a special type of reader which requires a personal identification number to
be entered in conjunction with a valid key.
Passive Infra Red
A Passive Infra Red (PIR) detector is a motion detector that you can use to detect intruders,
or as a Request to Exit switch to automatically open a door when someone approaches it.
Priority Keyholders
Priority keyholders are stored on the appropriate access controller and are therefore
allowed to enter and exit an associated area even if there is a communications failure
between the server and controllers (providing that the communications failure mode has not
been set to Fail Full Secure).
RS-485 Channel
A RS-485 channel is the connection between a server and controllers (or between
controllers on a direct channel).
Reader
A reader sends a key code to a controller when a key is presented to it. If the key is valid,
an unlock door signal is sent to the door lock.
Request to Exit Switch
A Request to Exit switch is a switch (or button) that unlocks a door when pressed. A valid
key is not required so anyone can leave the area.
Security Level
A security level (range 0 to 9) can be assigned to a key to determine which doors it can
open or areas it can access. A door or area is also assigned a security level and the
security level of the key must be equal or greater than the security level of the door or area
to allow access. However, if the security level of the door or area is 0, no access is allowed
at any time by any key.
TCP/IP Channel
A TCP/IP channel can be a PAC 500 TCP/IP channel, i.e. the Ethernet connection between
a PC and a server, or a Direct TCP/IP channel, i.e. the Ethernet connection between a PC
and an access or door controller.
Tamper Event
An alarm generated when a controller case is tampered with, e.g. broken into.
Time Period
A time period consists of a start time, end time, and one or more days. A number of time
periods are assigned to a time profile which defines when a keyholder can access an area.
Page ix
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Time Profile
A time profile can be applied to a door, keyholder or access group to only allow access
during certain times, e.g. only during office hours. A time profile consists of one or more
time periods that can span multiple days. A holiday profile can be assigned to a time profile
to limit access during holiday periods.
Transaction
A transaction is an event that does not require attention, e.g. a valid keyholder opening a
door.
Page x
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to Help File........................................................................................................1
1.1 Displaying Help Information................................................................................................1
1.2 Tab Area Facilities..............................................................................................................1
1.3 Toolbar Facilities.................................................................................................................1
1.4 Breadcrumb Trail................................................................................................................ 2
2. Hardware Specifications........................................................................................................ 3
2.1 PAC 500 Specifications...................................................................................................... 3
2.2 PAC 512 Specifications...................................................................................................... 4
2.3 PAC 520 / PAC 530 I/O Controllers...................................................................................5
3. Hardware Installation............................................................................................................. 6
3.1 PAC 500 Series..................................................................................................................6
3.2 PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series.............................................................................................. 6
3.3 Channel and Protocol Types..............................................................................................6
4. PAC SecureNet....................................................................................................................... 7
4.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 7
4.2 Installation........................................................................................................................... 8
4.3 File and Printer Sharing..................................................................................................... 8
4.4 Updates...............................................................................................................................9
5. Access Control Overview.................................................................................................... 10
5.1 Access Types................................................................................................................... 10
5.2 System Design..................................................................................................................11
5.3 System Plan..................................................................................................................... 13
5.4 Hardware Configuration using PAC 500 Channel............................................................ 14
5.5 Hardware Configuration using Offline Channel................................................................ 15
5.6 Simple Example................................................................................................................15
5.6.1 Define the Areas..................................................................................................... 16
5.6.2 Add the PAC 500 TCP/IP Channel......................................................................... 16
5.6.3 Add and Probe the Controller................................................................................. 17
5.6.4 Define the Holiday Profiles......................................................................................17
5.6.5 Define the Time or Mode Profiles........................................................................... 18
5.6.6 Update the Doors.................................................................................................... 19
5.6.7 Define the Access Groups...................................................................................... 20
5.6.8 Add Keyholders....................................................................................................... 20
5.6.9 Add Operators......................................................................................................... 21
5.6.10 Download Database to the Controller................................................................... 21
6. PAC SecureNet Tools.......................................................................................................... 22
6.1 Configure Device IP Addresses....................................................................................... 22
6.2 Help...................................................................................................................................23
6.3 Release Notes.................................................................................................................. 23
6.4 Restore Database.............................................................................................................23
6.5 Service Manager...............................................................................................................24
6.6 Upgrade Database............................................................................................................25
6.7 Application Software......................................................................................................... 25
7. PAC SecureNet Overview.................................................................................................... 26
7.1 Login................................................................................................................................. 26
7.2 PAC SecureNet Already Running.................................................................................... 27
7.3 PAC SecureNet Window.................................................................................................. 27
7.4 Welcome Screen / System Summary...............................................................................28
Page xi
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7.5 Menus............................................................................................................................... 29
7.5.1 File........................................................................................................................... 30
7.5.2 Edit...........................................................................................................................30
7.5.3 View......................................................................................................................... 30
7.5.4 Keyholders............................................................................................................... 31
7.5.5 Hardware................................................................................................................. 31
7.5.5.1 TCP/IP Channel Commands........................................................................... 31
7.5.5.2 Direct Channel Commands............................................................................. 32
7.5.5.3 Dialup Channel Commands............................................................................ 32
7.5.5.4 Offline Channel Commands............................................................................ 33
7.5.5.5 Online Controller Commands.......................................................................... 33
7.5.5.6 Offline Controller Commands.......................................................................... 34
7.5.6 Tools........................................................................................................................ 34
7.5.7 Reports.................................................................................................................... 35
7.5.8 Help......................................................................................................................... 35
7.6 Toolbar..............................................................................................................................35
7.7 Explorer Bar......................................................................................................................38
7.8 Status Bar......................................................................................................................... 38
7.9 List View........................................................................................................................... 38
7.10 Property Page.................................................................................................................40
7.11 Logoff.............................................................................................................................. 41
8. Organisation Options........................................................................................................... 42
8.1 Customisation................................................................................................................... 42
8.2 System Settings................................................................................................................42
8.2.1 PIN Readers............................................................................................................ 43
8.3 Card Format..................................................................................................................... 43
8.3.1 Proximity Reader..................................................................................................... 44
8.3.2 Magnetic Stripe........................................................................................................45
8.3.3 Wiegand (2601 format)............................................................................................46
8.3.4 Examples of start and length.................................................................................. 47
8.4 Event Archiving.................................................................................................................48
8.5 Alarm Responses............................................................................................................. 50
8.6 System Access................................................................................................................. 50
8.7 Organisational Unit Details............................................................................................... 50
8.8 Access.............................................................................................................................. 51
8.9 Custom Labels..................................................................................................................52
8.10 Categories.......................................................................................................................52
8.11 Keyholder Extra Details.................................................................................................. 53
8.12 Alarms............................................................................................................................. 54
9. Organisational Units.............................................................................................................56
9.1 Organisational Units List...................................................................................................56
9.2 Organisational Unit Details............................................................................................... 56
10. Keyholders.......................................................................................................................... 57
10.1 Keyholder List View........................................................................................................57
Page xii
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
10.2 Keyholder Property Page............................................................................................... 57
10.2.1 Keyholder Details.................................................................................................. 57
10.2.2 Keyholder Personal Details................................................................................... 59
10.2.3 Keyholder Keys..................................................................................................... 60
10.2.4 Keyholder Access Groups.....................................................................................61
10.2.4.1 Keyholder Access Groups with Legacy Controllers...................................... 62
10.2.5 Keyholder Guest Access....................................................................................... 63
10.2.6 Keyholder Personal Access.................................................................................. 64
10.2.7 Keyholder Notes.................................................................................................... 65
10.2.8 Keyholder Extra Information..................................................................................66
10.2.9 Keyholder Events.................................................................................................. 66
10.2.10 Keyholder Area Usage........................................................................................ 67
10.2.11 Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder..................................................................... 68
11. Guests..................................................................................................................................69
12. Operators.............................................................................................................................71
12.1 Operator List View..........................................................................................................71
12.2 Operator Property Page................................................................................................. 71
12.2.1 Operator Details.................................................................................................... 71
12.2.2 Operator Privileges................................................................................................72
12.2.2.1 Privilege Level............................................................................................... 74
12.2.3 Operator Alarm Viewer..........................................................................................74
12.2.4 Operator Login Options......................................................................................... 75
12.2.5 Add / Update / Delete an Operator....................................................................... 75
12.2.6 Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator................................................................ 76
13. Time & Mode Profiles.........................................................................................................77
13.1 Time & Mode Profile List View.......................................................................................77
13.2 Time & Mode Profile Property Page.............................................................................. 77
13.2.1 Daily Time Profile.................................................................................................. 77
13.2.2 Weekly Time Profile.............................................................................................. 78
13.2.3 Mode Profiles.........................................................................................................79
13.2.3.1 Area Mode Profile......................................................................................... 81
13.2.3.2 Door Mode Profiles....................................................................................... 81
13.2.3.3 Reader Mode Profiles................................................................................... 81
13.2.4 Holiday Time Profile.............................................................................................. 81
13.2.5 Add / Update / Delete a Time or Mode Profile...................................................... 83
14. Holiday Profiles...................................................................................................................85
14.1 Holiday Profile List View.................................................................................................85
14.2 Holiday Profile Property Page........................................................................................ 85
14.3 Add / Update / Delete a Holiday Profile......................................................................... 86
15. Areas.................................................................................................................................... 87
15.1 Area List View................................................................................................................ 87
15.2 Area Property Page........................................................................................................87
15.2.1 Area Details........................................................................................................... 87
15.2.2 Area Appearance...................................................................................................88
15.2.3 Area Alarm Management...................................................................................... 89
15.2.4 Area Alarm Definitions...........................................................................................89
15.2.5 Area Alarm Points................................................................................................. 90
15.2.6 Area Outputs......................................................................................................... 91
15.2.7 Area Management................................................................................................. 92
15.2.8 Area Security Level............................................................................................... 93
15.2.9 Add / Delete / Update a Area................................................................................ 94
16. Access Groups................................................................................................................... 95
16.1 Access Group List View................................................................................................. 95
Page xiii
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
16.2 Access Group Property Page.........................................................................................95
16.2.1 Access Group Details............................................................................................95
16.2.2 Access Group Information.....................................................................................96
16.2.3 Access Group Advanced.......................................................................................96
16.2.4 Add / Update / Delete an Access Group............................................................... 97
17. Hardware..............................................................................................................................99
17.1 Hardware List View........................................................................................................ 99
17.1.1 More Information on Logical and Physical Controllers........................................ 100
17.2 Channel Property Page................................................................................................ 101
17.2.1 Channel Details................................................................................................... 101
17.2.2 Channel Areas.....................................................................................................103
17.2.3 Channel PAC 500............................................................................................... 103
17.2.4 Channel Alarm Management...............................................................................104
17.2.5 Channel Settings................................................................................................. 105
17.2.6 Channel Dialup.................................................................................................... 106
17.2.7 Channel Dialback................................................................................................ 107
17.2.8 Channel Layout................................................................................................... 108
17.2.9 Add / Update / Delete Channels..........................................................................109
17.3 Controller Property Page.............................................................................................. 109
17.3.1 Controller Details................................................................................................. 110
17.3.2 Controller PAC 202/512...................................................................................... 112
17.3.3 Controller 2100/2200........................................................................................... 112
17.3.4 Controller Doors.................................................................................................. 114
17.3.5 Controller Inputs.................................................................................................. 114
17.3.5.1 Input Types..................................................................................................117
17.3.5.2 Input Modes.................................................................................................117
17.3.5.3 Debounce Time Examples.......................................................................... 117
17.3.5.4 Input Templates...........................................................................................118
17.3.6 Controller Outputs............................................................................................... 118
17.3.6.1 Output Types............................................................................................... 121
17.3.6.2 Output Templates........................................................................................ 121
17.3.6.3 PIN Reader Duress..................................................................................... 121
17.3.7 Controller Alarm Management............................................................................ 121
17.3.8 Add / Update / Delete a Controller...................................................................... 122
17.3.9 Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller...................................................... 123
17.3.10 Unconfigured Controller Tasks.......................................................................... 123
17.4 Offline Channel and Controller Tasks.......................................................................... 125
17.4.1 Download Database to the Controllers using the PC..........................................125
17.4.2 Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA....................................... 126
17.4.3 Upload Database from a PDA to a PC............................................................... 127
17.5 Lift Property Page.........................................................................................................127
17.5.1 Lift Details............................................................................................................127
17.5.2 Lift Destinations................................................................................................... 128
17.5.3 Lift Access........................................................................................................... 129
17.5.4 Add / Update / Delete a Lift.................................................................................130
18. Doors..................................................................................................................................131
18.1 Door List View.............................................................................................................. 131
Page xiv
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
18.2 Door Property Page......................................................................................................131
18.2.1 Door Details.........................................................................................................131
18.2.2 Door Access........................................................................................................ 133
18.2.3 Door Configuration.............................................................................................. 135
18.2.3.1 4-State Door Inputs..................................................................................... 137
18.2.3.2 Door Configuration Modes.......................................................................... 138
18.2.4 Door Auxiliary IO................................................................................................. 138
18.2.5 Door Alarm Management.................................................................................... 139
18.2.6 Door Security Level............................................................................................. 140
18.2.7 Add / Update / Delete a Door..............................................................................141
19. Video Source.....................................................................................................................142
19.1 Video Source List View................................................................................................ 142
19.2 Video Source Property Page........................................................................................142
19.3 Add / Update / Delete a Video Source......................................................................... 142
19.4 Configuring Video Sources...........................................................................................143
19.4.1 General Video Source Options........................................................................... 143
19.4.2 Video Source Presets..........................................................................................144
19.4.2.1 General Options.......................................................................................... 144
19.4.2.2 View Options............................................................................................... 145
19.4.2.3 Alarm Points................................................................................................ 146
20. Reports.............................................................................................................................. 147
20.1 Report Facilities............................................................................................................ 147
20.2 Reports Provided.......................................................................................................... 149
20.3 Report Search Parameters...........................................................................................151
20.3.1 Report Parameters Comparison Operators.........................................................152
20.4 Export a Report............................................................................................................ 154
20.5 Add a Report to Favourites.......................................................................................... 155
20.6 Add a Custom Report...................................................................................................157
21. Image Capture...................................................................................................................160
21.1 Image Capture Introduction.......................................................................................... 160
21.2 Using the Image Capture Utility................................................................................... 160
21.3 Capture Source.............................................................................................................160
21.4 Preview Window........................................................................................................... 161
22. ID Card Designer.............................................................................................................. 163
22.1 Card Designer Introduction...........................................................................................163
22.2 Card Designer Interactive Map.....................................................................................163
22.3 Card Designer Menus...................................................................................................164
22.3.1 Design Menu....................................................................................................... 164
22.3.2 Edit Menu............................................................................................................ 164
22.3.3 View Menu...........................................................................................................165
22.3.4 Help Menu........................................................................................................... 165
22.4 Toolbar, Browser and Status Bar................................................................................. 165
22.4.1 Card Designer Toolbar........................................................................................ 166
22.4.2 Card Designer Browser....................................................................................... 167
22.4.3 Card Designer Status Bar................................................................................... 167
22.5 Design Regions............................................................................................................ 167
22.5.1 Add Items Region................................................................................................168
22.5.2 Card Face Region............................................................................................... 168
22.5.3 Properties Region................................................................................................169
22.5.4 Buttons Region.................................................................................................... 170
Page xv
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.6 Card Design Overview..................................................................................................170
22.6.1 Drawing and Placing Items................................................................................. 170
22.6.2 Editing Properties................................................................................................ 171
22.6.3 Grouping and Ungrouping................................................................................... 172
22.6.4 Select Mode.........................................................................................................172
22.6.5 Move, Resize and Delete.................................................................................... 172
22.6.6 Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer.................... 173
22.7 Item Properties............................................................................................................. 174
22.7.1 Shape Item Properties.........................................................................................175
22.7.2 Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties.......................................... 175
22.7.3 Line Item Properties............................................................................................ 176
22.7.4 Text Item / Text Data Item Properties................................................................. 176
22.7.5 Multiple Item Properties.......................................................................................177
22.7.6 Group Item Properties......................................................................................... 177
22.8 Individual Properties..................................................................................................... 178
22.8.1 Name Property.................................................................................................... 178
22.8.2 Units Property......................................................................................................178
22.8.3 Background Properties........................................................................................ 178
22.8.4 Snap Grid Properties...........................................................................................178
22.8.5 Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties...................................................179
22.8.6 Orientation........................................................................................................... 179
22.8.7 X, Y, Width and Height Properties...................................................................... 179
22.8.8 Aspect Lock Property.......................................................................................... 180
22.8.9 Anchor and Angle Properties.............................................................................. 180
22.8.10 Transparency Property...................................................................................... 181
22.8.11 Shape Properties...............................................................................................181
22.8.12 Text Properties.................................................................................................. 181
22.8.13 Line Properties.................................................................................................. 181
22.8.14 Image Property.................................................................................................. 182
22.8.15 Shadow Properties............................................................................................ 182
22.8.16 Colour Properties...............................................................................................182
22.8.17 Data Field Property........................................................................................... 183
22.9 Context Menus..............................................................................................................183
22.9.1 Card Face............................................................................................................183
22.9.2 Ruler.................................................................................................................... 184
22.9.3 Multiple Items...................................................................................................... 184
22.9.4 Group...................................................................................................................184
22.9.5 Single Items.........................................................................................................184
22.9.6 Image...................................................................................................................184
22.9.7 Line...................................................................................................................... 185
22.10 Common Items........................................................................................................... 185
22.10.1 Align to Grid...................................................................................................... 185
22.10.2 Docking Items....................................................................................................185
22.10.3 Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face.......................................................187
22.10.4 Zoom Function...................................................................................................187
22.10.5 Measurement..................................................................................................... 188
22.10.6 Colour Selector..................................................................................................188
22.10.7 Font Selector..................................................................................................... 188
23. Alarm Map Designer.........................................................................................................189
23.1 Alarm Map Designer — Introduction............................................................................ 189
23.1.1 Guidance on Image Formats and Sizes..............................................................189
23.2 Alarm Map Designer Glossary..................................................................................... 189
23.3 Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map........................................................................... 190
Page xvi
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.4 Alarm Map Designer Menus.........................................................................................190
23.4.1 Design Menu....................................................................................................... 191
23.4.1.1 Export.......................................................................................................... 191
23.4.1.2 Import...........................................................................................................191
23.4.2 Edit Menu............................................................................................................ 191
23.4.2.1 Align to Grid................................................................................................ 191
23.4.2.2 Ordering Items / Groups on the Page......................................................... 192
23.4.3 View Menu...........................................................................................................192
23.4.3.1 Zoom Function.............................................................................................192
23.4.4 Help Menu........................................................................................................... 193
23.5 Alarm Map Designer Toolbar....................................................................................... 193
23.6 Add Items Region.........................................................................................................194
23.6.1 General Tab.........................................................................................................194
23.6.2 Areas Tab............................................................................................................ 194
23.6.3 Inputs Tab............................................................................................................195
23.6.4 Outputs Tab.........................................................................................................195
23.6.5 CCTV Tab............................................................................................................196
23.6.6 Alarm Points Tab.................................................................................................196
23.6.7 Further Information on the Add Items Region.....................................................196
23.7 Design Editor Region................................................................................................... 197
23.7.1 Map Making and Editing..................................................................................... 198
23.7.1.1 Map Making Hints....................................................................................... 198
23.7.1.2 Adding / Deleting / Copying Pages..............................................................199
23.7.1.3 Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor......................................................... 199
23.7.1.4 Editing Properties........................................................................................ 200
23.7.1.5 Page Tabs................................................................................................... 200
23.7.1.6 Grouping and Ungrouping........................................................................... 201
23.7.1.7 Select Mode................................................................................................ 201
23.7.1.8 Move / Resize / Delete Items...................................................................... 202
23.7.1.9 Drawing and Placing Items......................................................................... 203
23.7.1.10 Measurement.............................................................................................204
23.7.2 Context Menus.................................................................................................... 204
23.7.2.1 Single Items.................................................................................................204
23.7.2.2 Line.............................................................................................................. 205
23.7.2.3 Image...........................................................................................................205
23.7.2.4 Multiple Items.............................................................................................. 205
23.7.2.5 Group...........................................................................................................205
23.7.2.6 Ruler............................................................................................................ 205
23.7.2.7 Page............................................................................................................ 205
Page xvii
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.8 Properties Region......................................................................................................... 206
23.8.1 Item Properties.................................................................................................... 206
23.8.1.1 Shape Item Properties.................................................................................207
23.8.1.2 Image Item Properties................................................................................. 207
23.8.1.3 Line Item Properties.................................................................................... 208
23.8.1.4 Text Item Properties.................................................................................... 208
23.8.1.5 View Item Properties................................................................................... 209
23.8.1.6 Button Item Properties.................................................................................209
23.8.1.7 Alarm Area Properties................................................................................. 210
23.8.1.8 Alarm Point / Output Properties.................................................................. 210
23.8.1.9 Video Source Properties............................................................................. 211
23.8.1.10 Multiple Item Properties.............................................................................211
23.8.1.11 Group Item Properties............................................................................... 212
23.8.2 Individual Properties............................................................................................ 213
23.8.2.1 Name, Tooltip and Action Properties.......................................................... 213
23.8.2.2 Action and Set Action..................................................................................213
23.8.2.3 X, Y, Height and Width Properties.............................................................. 214
23.8.2.4 Resolution and Units Properties..................................................................214
23.8.2.5 Background Properties................................................................................ 214
23.8.2.6 Aspect Lock Property.................................................................................. 214
23.8.2.7 Anchor and Angle Properties...................................................................... 215
23.8.2.8 Display Mode...............................................................................................215
23.8.2.9 Transparency Property................................................................................ 215
23.8.2.10 Text Property............................................................................................. 215
23.8.2.11 Font Property.............................................................................................216
23.8.2.12 Multi-line Property......................................................................................216
23.8.2.13 Fill Colour and Colour Property.................................................................216
23.8.2.14 Line Width Property...................................................................................216
23.8.2.15 Image Property.......................................................................................... 216
23.8.2.16 Shadow Properties.................................................................................... 216
23.8.2.17 Shape Properties.......................................................................................217
23.8.2.18 Snap Grid Properties.................................................................................217
23.8.2.19 Common Icon Property............................................................................. 217
23.9 Status Bar..................................................................................................................... 217
23.10 Common Items........................................................................................................... 217
23.10.1 Colour Selector..................................................................................................218
23.10.2 Font Selector..................................................................................................... 218
24. Alarm Viewer..................................................................................................................... 219
24.1 Alarm Viewer — Introduction........................................................................................219
24.2 Alarm Viewer Glossary................................................................................................. 219
24.3 Interactive Map............................................................................................................. 220
24.4 Alarm Viewer Menus.................................................................................................... 220
24.4.1 File Menu.............................................................................................................221
24.4.2 View Menu...........................................................................................................221
24.4.2.1 Visual Notification........................................................................................ 221
24.4.3 Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu................................................ 222
24.4.4 Alarm Board Menu.............................................................................................. 222
24.4.5 Areas Menu......................................................................................................... 223
24.4.6 Map Menu............................................................................................................223
24.4.7 CCTV Menu.........................................................................................................223
24.4.7.1 Incident Report Details................................................................................ 223
24.4.8 Context Menu...................................................................................................... 225
Page xviii
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24.5 Alarm Viewer Toolbars................................................................................................. 225
24.5.1 Alarm Viewer Toolbar..........................................................................................225
24.5.2 Active Alarm Toolbar........................................................................................... 225
24.5.3 Event Log Viewer Toolbar...................................................................................226
24.5.4 Alarm History Toolbar..........................................................................................227
24.5.5 CCTV Region Toolbar......................................................................................... 227
24.6 Alarm / Event Region................................................................................................... 228
24.6.1 Active Alarms.......................................................................................................228
24.6.2 Managing Alarms.................................................................................................228
24.6.3 Acknowledge Commands.................................................................................... 229
24.6.4 Silence Commands............................................................................................. 229
24.6.5 Event Log Viewer................................................................................................ 230
24.6.6 Alarm History....................................................................................................... 230
24.7 Alarm / Areas Board Tab Area..................................................................................... 231
24.7.1 Areas Board.........................................................................................................231
24.7.2 Issuing Commands to Areas............................................................................... 232
24.7.3 Alarm Board.........................................................................................................233
24.7.4 Issuing Commands to Alarm Points.................................................................... 234
24.7.5 Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States................................................................. 235
24.7.6 Selecting Items on the Alarm Board and the Areas Board..................................236
24.8 Map Region.................................................................................................................. 236
24.9 CCTV Region................................................................................................................237
24.9.1 Expanding Video Sources................................................................................... 237
24.9.2 Panning, Tilting and Enlarging............................................................................ 237
24.9.3 CCTV Archive Tools............................................................................................238
24.10 If an Alarm Occurs..................................................................................................... 239
25. Event Facilities..................................................................................................................241
25.1 Event Log..................................................................................................................... 241
25.1.1 Highlighting Events..............................................................................................243
25.1.2 Filtering Events with User Defined Criteria......................................................... 245
25.1.3 Cloning the Events Log Viewer...........................................................................245
25.2 Alarm Events and System Alarms................................................................................246
25.3 Alarm Alerts.................................................................................................................. 246
25.4 Event Archive................................................................................................................248
25.5 Event Archive Restore..................................................................................................250
25.6 Event to Action............................................................................................................. 251
25.6.1 Event to Action Details........................................................................................251
25.6.2 Event to Action Configuration..............................................................................252
25.6.3 Configure Send Email......................................................................................... 253
25.6.4 Configure Remote IP Event Link.........................................................................254
25.6.5 Automatic Alarm Management............................................................................ 255
25.7 Muster and Evacuation.................................................................................................256
25.7.1 Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster.................................................................257
25.7.2 Specifying a Scenario for Muster........................................................................ 259
25.7.3 Adding the Muster Event and Action...................................................................259
25.7.4 Configuring the Muster Action.............................................................................260
25.7.5 Adding Further Events and Actions.....................................................................263
25.7.6 Muster Operation.................................................................................................264
26. Other Facilities..................................................................................................................265
26.1 Modems........................................................................................................................ 265
26.2 Modem Initialization String........................................................................................... 266
26.3 Database Backup......................................................................................................... 266
26.3.1 Scheduling Regular Backups.............................................................................. 267
26.4 Import............................................................................................................................ 267
Page xix
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
26.5 Licensing....................................................................................................................... 269
26.5.1 Upgrade License................................................................................................. 269
26.6 Configure Peripherals................................................................................................... 270
26.7 Manage Controller Firmware........................................................................................ 272
26.8 Change Password........................................................................................................ 273
26.9 Reset Password............................................................................................................274
26.10 Edit Privilege Templates.............................................................................................275
26.11 Search for a Keyholder.............................................................................................. 277
26.11.1 The Search Bar................................................................................................. 277
26.11.2 Advanced Keyholder Search............................................................................. 278
26.12 Encode Keycode.........................................................................................................279
26.12.1 Printing and Encoding Magnetic Stripe Cards using an Eltron P420 Card
Printer..............................................................................................................................280
26.13 Audit Trail....................................................................................................................285
26.14 Configure Organisations............................................................................................. 286
26.14.1 Multiple Org Units Details..................................................................................287
26.14.1.1 Upgrading your Licence to Activate Org Units.......................................... 287
26.14.1.2 Logging into an Org Unit...........................................................................287
26.14.1.3 Configuring Org Units................................................................................287
26.14.1.4 Guests....................................................................................................... 289
26.14.1.5 Operators...................................................................................................289
26.14.1.6 Reports...................................................................................................... 290
26.14.1.7 Alarm Viewer............................................................................................. 290
26.14.1.8 Database Backup, Archive and Restore................................................... 290
26.14.2 Multiple Org Units Configuration....................................................................... 290
26.14.2.1 User Interface............................................................................................ 290
26.14.2.2 Database Download.................................................................................. 290
26.14.3 Multiple Org Units Configure Actions................................................................ 290
26.14.3.1 Configuring Org Units................................................................................291
26.14.3.2 Login.......................................................................................................... 291
26.14.3.3 Operator Property Page............................................................................ 291
26.14.3.4 Event Log Viewer...................................................................................... 291
26.14.3.5 Guests....................................................................................................... 292
26.14.3.6 Hardware................................................................................................... 292
26.14.3.7 Alarm Viewer............................................................................................. 292
26.14.3.8 Miscellaneous............................................................................................ 292
26.15 Tear Off Controls........................................................................................................293
26.15.1 Example of Regions Moved About the Screen................................................. 294
26.15.2 Tear Off Confirmation Window.......................................................................... 294
27. Error Messages.................................................................................................................295
Page xx
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
1. Introduction to Help File
1.1 Displaying Help Information
To display PAC SecureNet help information:
1. Choose Help › Contents.
To display context-sensitive help information:
1. Select an area on the PAC SecureNet window and press F1 on the keyboard.
To display the PAC 500 series help information:
1. Choose Start › All Programs › PAC SecureNet Tools › PAC 500 Series Manual.
1.2 Tab Area Facilities
To navigate the help information:
1. Select the Contents tab and select an item in the contents list, or:
Select the Index tab, enter a keyword, and select an item in the index list, or:
Select the Search tab, enter a keyword, and select an item in the search list, or:
Select the Favorites tab and double click an item in the favourites list, or:
Select an in-text link (indicated by blue text).
To add items to the favourites list:
1. Navigate to the required help information, select the Favorites tab, and Choose Add.
To remove items from the favourites list:
1. Select the Favorites tab, select the item in the favourites list, and select Remove.
To display glossary definitions:
1. Select the Glossary in the Contents tab, or:
Select an in-text glossary item (indicated by red text); to return to the text, click on the
Back button.
1.3 Toolbar Facilities
To hide / show the tab area:
1. Click on the Hide icon — the tab area is closed and the icon changes to Show; to
redisplay the tab area select the Show icon.
To locate the displayed topic in the table of contents:
1. Click on the Locate button.
To move backwards and forwards in table-of-contents order:
1. Click on the Previous or Next icon.
Page 1
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To move backwards and forwards in displayed order:
1. Click on the Back or Forward icon.
To display the title page:
1. Click the Home icon.
To print a topic:
1. Click the Print icon.
If no subtopics are displayed in the Contents tab, the Print window (that allows a printer
to be selected) is displayed.
If subtopics are displayed in the Contents tab, the Print Topics window (that gives the
option to display all the subtopics) is displayed before the Print window.
1.4 Breadcrumb Trail
The breadcrumb trail at the top of each page shows the path to the currently displayed topic
within the help file’s hierarchy of topics.
To navigate up to a higher level topic:
1. Click on the topic’s name in the breadcrumb trail.
Page 2
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
2. Hardware Specifications
2.1 PAC 500 Specifications
System Limits
Maximum number of controllers on each RS-485
channel:
24
Maximum distance between the server and controller
on a network:
1500ft/500m alarm cable or
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable
Number of RS-485 channels:
2
Number of RS-232 channels:
1
Maximum number of doors served:
128
Maximum number of keyholders served:
75,000
Maximum number of events in memory buffer:
10,000
Maximum number of access groups served:
5000
Maximum number of time profiles served:
200
Maximum number of system holidays served:
20
Power
Power supply:
10.5 to 14V dc (use an isolated PSU with backup battery)
Lithium battery: Non-replaceable:
(for real-time
Life expectancy 20 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit not powered
clock)
Environment
Temperature:
-10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F
Humidity:
0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Facilities
One-Touch™ installation testing.
High speed network communications.
Built in TCP/IP & Ethernet support.
Plug-n-play network management.
Global anti-passback across all controllers connected to the PAC 500 access and alarm server
Alarm integration.
Encrypted Communications.
PSTN connectivity via external modem.
Alarm dial-back.
Downloadable firmware into FLASH™ Memory.
Page 3
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2.2 PAC 512 Specifications
System Limits
Maximum number of doors per controller:
2
Maximum number of proximity readers per controller: 4
Maximum number of Wiegand or Magstripe readers
per controller:
2
Maximum distance between the first controller and
last controller on a network:
1500ft/500m alarm cable or
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable
Maximum distance between controllers:
1500ft/500m alarm cable or
3000ft/1000m CAT5 cable
Maximum distance between controller and reader:
see below
Maximum number of keys:
10,000
Maximum number of events in memory buffer:
4000
Maximum number of access groups:
2000 (PAC 202) /
5000 (PAC 512)
see Notes
Notes
•
The maximum number of keys is reduced if any keyholders have more than one
access group/personal access assigned.
•
Other system limits, e.g. number of controllers per system, depend on your PAC
SecureNet license. See Licensing.
Controller to Reader Distances
The following table gives the recommended maximum distance between a reader and controller
assuming 24AWG/0.22mm² unshielded cable is used and allows for 11V battery power.
Note
The figures below are for readers powered from the controller. The cable distances can
be doubled by locally powering the readers or using a 24V power supply.
Type of Reader
Page 4
Maximum Recommended
Distance from Controller
Feet
Metres
Low Profile, Panel Mount and Vandal Resistant
230
70
Standard Plus, Slimline and Standard Plus Vandal Resistant
825
250
KeyPAC Medium Range, Slimline and Vandal Resistant
825
250
DualTech Reader
230
70
PIN Reader
66
20
Wiegand and Magstripe Readers
Depends on the type of
reader, see manufacturer’s
documentation
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Power
Power supply:
10.5 to 14V dc (it is recommended to use an isolated PSU with backup
battery)
Lithium battery: Type CR2450:
Life expectancy 3 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit not powered
Life expectancy 10 years @ 25°C/75°F when unit powered
Environment
Temperature:
-10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F
Humidity:
0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Facilities
One-Touch™ installation testing.
High speed network communications.
Plug-n-play network management.
Downloadable firmware into FLASH™ Memory.
2.3 PAC 520 / PAC 530 I/O Controllers
System Limits
PAC 520
PAC 530
Maximum number of inputs:
20
2
Maximum number of low power outputs:
2
10
Maximum number of high power outputs:
0
2
Number of RS-485 channels:
1
1
Power
Power supply:
10.5 to 14V dc (it is recommended to use an isolated PSU with backup
battery)
Environment
Temperature:
-10 to 55°C/14 to 130°F
Humidity:
0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Facilities
One-Touch™ installation testing.
High speed network communications.
Downloadable firmware into FLASH™ Memory.
Page 5
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Hardware Installation
3.1 PAC 500 Series
PAC 500 series controllers can be administered by PAC SecureNet via a PAC 500 TCP/IP
channel.
PAC 512 access controllers can also be connected on a Direct Channel or Dialup Channel.
PAC 512 IP access controllers can be administered by PAC SecureNet but must be connected
on a Direct TCP/IP channel.
The hardware installation is described in the help files supplied with the software and in the
quick start guides supplied with the controllers.
3.2 PAC 1100/2100/2200 Series
If the license allows, PAC 1100/2100/2200 series door controllers can be administered by PAC
SecureNet but must be connected on a Direct Channel or Dialup Channel.
PAC 2200 IP door controllers can be administered by PAC SecureNet but must be connected
on a Direct TCP/IP channel.
The hardware installation is described in the documentation supplied with the controllers.
3.3 Channel and Protocol Types
Channel Type
Protocol Type
Options
Meaning
Direct
2100/2200 - RS232 SWB
PAC 1100/2100/2200 controllers connected
directly to a PC RS-232 port via the PC six
wire bus.
PAC 200/500 Series
RS232
PAC 202/512 controllers connected directly to
a PC RS-232 port via the RS-485 network.
2100/2200 - RS232 SWB - CNC
PAC 1100/2100/2200 controllers connected to
a PC via the CNC six wire bus.
PAC 200/500 Series
RS232
A PAC 202/512 controller connected to a PC
via modems.
PAC 2100/2200
PAC 1100/2100/2200 controllers connected to
a PC via a modem.
Easikey 1000
Easikey 1000N controllers connected to a PC
via a modem.
PAC 200/500 Series
RS232
A PAC 512 IP controller connected to a PC via
a network.
2100/2200 - RS232 SWB
A PAC 2200IP controller connected to a PC
via a network.
Dialup
TCP/IP
Page 6
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
4. PAC SecureNet
4.1 Introduction
PAC SecureNet is a PC-based administrative software package for access control systems.
To obtain information on the following tasks:
1. Click on the appropriate icon. The tasks are listed in the recommended order for
creating an access control system, but editing can be performed in any order. See
Simple Example.
Login (from Windows desktop)
Customise company name, module names, categories, keyholder information, and
access options.
Customise the list view and alter its appearance.
Add / update / delete areas — only in Access by Areas mode, see Access Types.
Start / stop the PAC SecureNet engines — engines should be running.
Add / update / delete channels.
Add / update / delete controllers.
Probe / configure / unconfigure controllers.
Add / update / delete holiday profiles.
Add / update / delete time profiles.
Add / update / delete doors.
Add / update / delete an access group — only in Access by Access Group mode, see
Access Types.
Add / update / delete Keyholders.
Add / update / delete operators.
Configure video sources — a license is required for this facility.
Download database to the controllers.
Logoff.
Page 7
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
4.2 Installation
PAC SecureNet is provided on CD. When the CD is placed in the CD drive of the PC the
following options are available.
Important
•
Before installing, ensure that File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is
enabled.
•
Make a note of any existing license keys. If PAC SecureNet is re-installed, you must
re-enter the license keys.
To install PAC SecureNet:
1. Start the PAC SecureNet installation program.
The PAC SecureNet installation window is displayed.
2. Choose one of the following commands:
•
Install PAC SecureNet.
•
Install the PAC SecureNet Client only.
•
View the release notes.
•
Display help files.
•
Exit the installer.
Note
If you choose Install PAC SecureNet, the following actions are performed:
•
.NET Framework 3.5 installed
•
Crystal Reports 11 installed
•
Microsoft Message Queuing configured
•
Microsoft Web Service Extensions installed
•
SQL Express 2008 R2 Database installed
•
PAC SecureNet checked for existing database
Important
•
Installation can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator and
should be performed by the local administrator.
•
The options can also be displayed by running Setup.exe provided on the CD.
•
The software is installed with access controlled by areas and access groups.
•
The software is installed in demonstration mode, which allows the database to be
specified, but the controllers cannot be configured until a valid license key has been
specified.
•
If upgrading PAC SecureNet, new license keys are required.
4.3 File and Printer Sharing
To ensure File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks is enabled:
1. Choose Start › Settings › Control Panel.
The Control Panel window is displayed.
Page 8
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
2. Select Network Connections.
The Network Connections window is displayed.
3. Right click on the connection and choose Properties.
4. Ensure that the File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks checkbox is
selected.
5. Choose OK.
6. If necessary, start the Server service.
To start the Server service:
1. Choose Start › Run.
The Run window is displayed.
2. Enter cmd and choose OK.
3. Enter net start and a list of services that have started is displayed.
4. If Server has not started, enter net start server.
4.4 Updates
The existing PAC SecureNet software can be updated by upgrading the license agreement —
see Upgrade License, or updating the software — see Installation.
There is an option when updating the software to retain the existing database. Alternatively, you
can restore a database that has been saved using the Database Backup facility — see Restore
Database; or you can import a database — see Import.
Page 9
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
5. Access Control Overview
5.1 Access Types
PAC SecureNet may provide the following access types options:
Areas and
access groups
Each keyholder is assigned to access groups that allow access to certain
areas. For example, used in systems where there is more than one door into
most areas and a large number of areas that require grouping according to
who has access.
Areas and
security levels
Each keyholder and area are assigned a security level which determines
which areas each keyholder can access. For example, used in systems
where there is more than one door into most areas and a small number of
areas.
Doors and
access groups
Keyholders are assigned to access groups that allow access to certain
doors. For example, used in systems where there is only one door into each
area and a large number of areas that require grouping according to who
has access.
Doors and
security levels
Each keyholder and door are assigned a security level which determines
which doors each keyholder can open. For example, used in systems where
there is only one door into each area and a small number of areas.
The access type required is specified at installation but can be changed using Customisation.
Important
It is recommended to take a backup of the system before changing access type
because information could be lost, e.g. access groups and areas.
Page 10
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
5.2 System Design
When designing an access control system, it is necessary to plan the requirements of the
system. This includes deciding how many areas, doors, keyholders, etc. are needed with
consideration given to possible modification and expansion.
To help you plan your access control system, an example and glossary is given below and
advice given in the following sections. You should aim to have a similar map of your site before
you specify, install or commission your system. A simple example to get you started is given in
Simple Example.
Access Controller
An access controller determines when a door is unlocked depending on the key code
received from a reader or Request to Exit switch. The type of door controller determines
how many doors it can control, e.g. the PAC 512 can control 2 doors using up to 4 readers.
The example requires seven PAC 512 controllers.
Area
An area has at least one door. The example has 9 areas (the outside is counted as an
area).
Door
A door allows or prevents access in and out of an area. The example has 13 doors. Several
doors have a reader on each side to allow access to be controlled in both in and out
directions. Other doors have a Request to Exit switch that allows anyone to leave the area.
Door Channel
A door channel is the connection between a door and a controller. The PAC 512 has two
door channels because it can control two doors. Each door channel can have two readers
(in and out) or one reader and a Request to Exit switch connected to it. The door channels
are specified as described in Door Configuration.
Key
A key is a token, fob or card that when presented to a reader unlocks the door. The door is
only unlocked if the key is valid — i.e. the key is known to the system, allows access to the
area and is not presented outside a permitted time profile.
Page 11
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Keyholder
A keyholder is a person who has a key. This could be a member of staff or a visitor. The
key allocated to the keyholder is only valid for specified areas and times, e.g. visitors can
be prevented from entering the Development area at any time and all areas after a certain
date.
Reader
A reader sends a key code to a controller when a key is presented to it. If the key is valid,
an unlock door signal is sent to the door lock.
Request to Exit Switch
A Request to Exit switch is a switch (or button) that unlocks a door when pressed. A valid
key is not required, so anyone can leave an area.
Time Profile
A time profile can be applied to a door, keyholder or access group to only allow access
during certain times, e.g. only during office hours.
Page 12
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
5.3 System Plan
The example given in System Design requires the following information to plan the access
control system. The example uses seven PAC 512 access controllers — see or . Each access
controller can control two doors.
Doors
Door
Controller
Door Channel
Reader/RTE
Outside/Reception
1
1
In reader
Out reader
Reception/Accounts
1
2
In reader
Request to Exit
Reception/Technical Support
2
1
In reader
Request to Exit
Reception/Development
2
2
In reader
Request to Exit
Reception/Corridor
3
1
In reader
Request to Exit
Reception/Sales
3
2
In reader
Request to Exit
Accounts/Technical Support
4
1
In reader
Out reader
Technical Support/Development
4
2
In reader
Out reader
Development/Stores
5
1
In reader
Out reader
Stores/Corridor
5
2
In reader
Request to Exit
Canteen/Corridor
6
1
In reader
Request to Exit
Corridor/Outside
6
2
In reader
Out reader
Corridor/Sales
7
1
In reader
Request to Exit
Spare
7
2
Not used
Holiday Profiles
Shutdown Periods
Time Profiles
No Access, Access at all times, Long Day, Office hours, Evening, and Night Shift.
Access Groups
Accountants, Canteen Staff, Cleaners, Development Team, Sales Team, Security, Stores, and
Technical Support.
Page 13
PAC SecureNet
5.4 Hardware Configuration using PAC 500 Channel
The example shows how you can connect the controllers described in System Plan:
Page 14
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
5.5 Hardware Configuration using Offline Channel
The example shows how you can connect the controllers described in System Plan if using an
offline channel.
5.6 Simple Example
This example demonstrates how you can configure and administrate a simple access control
system using PAC SecureNet. You should use the context-sensitive help (accessed by pressing
F1) throughout the example to discover more information, e.g. how to customise the views and
the use of right click.
Note
Although this is a simple example, access is defined by areas and access groups (see
Access Types) to demonstrate how a more complex system would be defined. It can be
used as a starting point and then modified for an actual system.
Page 15
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Perform the following tasks in the following order:
•
Define the Areas
•
Add the PAC 500 TCP/IP channel
•
Add and probe the controller
•
Define the holiday profiles
•
Define the time profiles
•
Update the doors
•
Define access groups
•
Add Keyholders
•
Add Operators
•
Download the database to the controller
The system can then be edited in any order to configure your own system.
5.6.1 Define the Areas
This example has 3 areas (outside, reception and sales). Outside is automatically created.
To define the areas:
1. Select Area in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New in the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name, i.e. Reception.
4. Enter the Description, i.e. Access to/from Outside and Sales.
5. Choose Add on the Property Page.
Note
Door access to areas is automatically entered when the doors have been defined.
6. Repeat for the sales area.
Now add the PAC 500 TCP/IP channel.
5.6.2 Add the PAC 500 TCP/IP Channel
For this example, only one PAC 500 server is required.
To add the PAC 500 TCP/IP channel:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New and Create New PAC 500 on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name, i.e. PAC 500 TCP/IP channel.
4. Select Protocol Type, i.e. TCP/IP via permanent connection.
5. Select the computer name, e.g. PCNAME.
6. Enter the PAC 500 URL (e.g. http://192.168.31.14) or choose the PAC 500 Probe
button.
7. Select the Areas tab and select all the areas.
8. Choose Add on the Property Page.
9. Wait for the communications to be established.
Now add and probe the controller.
Page 16
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
5.6.3 Add and Probe the Controller
For this example, only one PAC 512 is required. The reception door has an in and out reader
and the sales door has an in reader and a Request to Exit switch.
To add the PAC 512 controller:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New and Create New Controller on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name, i.e. Controller 1.
4. Enter the Description, i.e. Reception and Sales.
5. Select Type, i.e. PAC 512.
6. Select PAC 500, i.e. PAC 500 TCP/IP channel.
7. Choose Add on the Property Page.
To probe the PAC 512 controller:
1.
Choose Hardware › Probe Channels or click on the
icon.
The physical connections are probed. If any PAC 512 controllers are connected, the
serial number of the PAC 512 is displayed.
2. Drag the controller from the list on the right on to the serial number on the left.
3. Select the option to download to the controller and choose OK.
Now define the holiday profiles.
5.6.4 Define the Holiday Profiles
To define the Holiday profiles:
1. Select Holiday in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name, i.e. Shutdown Periods.
4. Enter the Description, i.e. Bank Holidays and Works Shutdown.
5. Add a holiday:
i.
Select Add Holiday on the Property Page.
ii.
Enter the name of the holiday, e.g. Christmas.
iii. Select the start date and time from the drop-down calendar.
iv. Select the end date and time from the drop-down calendar.
6. Repeat 5 for each shutdown period.
7. Choose Add on the Property Page.
Repeat if another holiday profile is required.
Now define the time profiles.
Page 17
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
5.6.5 Define the Time or Mode Profiles
Notes
•
There are two different ways of defining a Time or Mode profile, depending on
whether your organisation uses legacy controllers (i.e. 1100 / 2100 / 2200) or not.
•
Legacy controllers use daily time profiles and PAC 512 controllers use weekly time
profiles. If your organisation uses any legacy controllers, both types of controller
use daily time profiles.
•
If your organisation uses legacy controllers, you must define the time profiles after
the controllers.
To add Time or Mode profiles:
1. Select Time & Mode Profiles in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New and Create New Time Profile, Create New Door Profile or Create New
Reader Profile on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name, i.e. Office Hours.
4. Enter the Description, i.e. 09:00 to 17:00 Weekdays.
5. If specifying a mode profile, select the Mode.
6. Specify the active period for each day:
i.
Click on a day to create a new time period and drag the created time bar.
ii.
To fine tune the period start and end, use the From and To increment boxes, e.g.
Monday 09:00 to Monday 17:00.
iii. To copy the time period to another day, press and hold the Ctrl key, select a time
period and drag it to another day, then release the Ctrl key.
iv. Alternatively, to copy the time period, right click on a time period, choose Copy,
right click on another day and choose Paste.
v.
Repeat for each day.
7. Specify the active periods for a holiday:
i.
Select the Holiday tab.
ii.
Select the holiday profile, e.g. Bank Holidays.
iii. Click on the holiday bar to create a new time period and drag the created time bar.
iv. Fine-tune the time using the From and To increment boxes, e.g. 09:00 to 17:00.
Repeat if other Time or Mode profiles are required.
Now update the doors.
To add daily time profiles — legacy Org Units:
1. Select Time Profile in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name, i.e. Office Hours.
4. Enter the Description, i.e. 09:00 to 17:00 Weekdays.
5. Specify the active times for each day:
i.
Select the Period 1 check box.
ii.
Specify the Start Time.
iii. Specify the End Time.
iv. Select the day check boxes for each day the time period applies to.
Page 18
Helpfile Ver 3.4
v.
PAC SecureNet
Repeat for other time periods, e.g. weekends may be different to week days.
6. Specify whether the time period applies during a holiday period — if the No Holiday
Period option button is selected, the time profile applies during holidays.
7. Choose Add on the Property Page.
Repeat if other time profiles are required.
Now update the doors.
5.6.6 Update the Doors
This example has 2 doors: the reception door has an in and out reader, and the sales door has
an in reader and a Request to Exit switch.
To update the Reception door:
1. Select Doors in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the reception door, e.g. Controller 1 Door 1.
3. Edit the Name, i.e. Reception door.
4. Enter the Description, i.e. Outside/Reception.
5. Select the Configuration tab and ensure the settings are correct.
6. Select the Access tab.
7. Select Reader Type.
8. Define SIG A for the reception door:
i.
Select the area to access from drop-down menu, i.e. Outside.
ii.
Select Reader connected option button.
9. Define SIG B for the reception door:
i.
Select the area to access from drop-down menu, i.e. Reception.
ii.
Select the Reader connected option button.
10. Choose Update on the Property Page.
To update the Sales door:
1. Select the sales door, e.g. Controller 1 Door 2.
2. Edit the Name, i.e. Sales door.
3. Enter the Description, i.e. Sales/Reception.
4. Select the Configuration tab and ensure the settings are correct, e.g. reader.
5. Select the Access tab.
6. Define SIG A for reception door:
i.
Select the area to access from drop-down menu, i.e. Sales.
ii.
Select Reader connected option button.
7. Define SIG B for reception door:
i.
Select the No reader connected option button (Request to Exit switch is used to
exit Sales).
8. Choose Update on the Property Page.
Now define the access groups.
Page 19
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
5.6.7 Define the Access Groups
To define the Access Groups:
1. Select Access Group in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Name, i.e. Sales Team.
4. Enter the Description, i.e. Sales Personnel.
5. Select the Access Groups tab.
6. Select Profile 1 check box.
7. Select a time profile from the drop-down menu, i.e. Office Hours.
8. Select the check boxes next to each area that this group can access.
9. Choose Add on the Property Page.
Repeat if other access groups are required.
Now add Keyholders.
5.6.8 Add Keyholders
To add Keyholders:
1. Select Keyholders in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the details and photo.
4. Select the Details tab and fill in the details. In most cases, the End Date check box
should not be selected, because the end date is not known.
5. Select the Notes tab and enter appropriate text, e.g. any disability that might require
longer door open time.
6. Select the Keys tab and present a key to the administration reader.
7. If required, choose the Set PIN button and specify a PIN to be used with OneProx PIN
Readers.
8. Select the Extra Information tab and enter the details — only available if extra fields
have been specified, see Customisation.
9. Select the Personal Access tab and define areas the keyholder can access:
i.
Select the Profile 1 check box.
ii.
Select the time profile from the drop-down list. Selecting No Time Profile allows
access to the selected areas at all times.
iii. Specify the areas the time profile applies to by selecting/deselecting the area check
boxes.
iv. If required, repeat for Profile 2.
10. Select the Access Groups tab and select the access group(s) that keyholder belongs
to.
11. Choose Add on the Property Page.
12. Select the Events tab, present the key to the readers and check that the events are
reported and access is allowed / disallowed depending on keys access rights.
Repeat for other Keyholders.
Now add operators.
Page 20
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
5.6.9 Add Operators
To add operators:
1. Select Operators in the Explorer bar.
2. Select New on the Property Page.
3. Enter the Login Name, e.g. Supervisor.
4. Select Set Password and specify a password for the operator. If password is not set, a
password is requested on first login.
5. Select the Keyholder who is to have operator privileges. A new Keyholder can be
specified by selecting Create New.
6. Specify other fields as required.
7. Select the Privileges tab and select the operator template that determines which
facilities the Keyholder can access — see Operator Privileges.
8. Choose Add on the Property Page.
Repeat for any other operators.
Now download database to the controller.
5.6.10 Download Database to the Controller
To download the database to the controller:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select a controller.
3. Choose the Tasks button.
4. Select Download controller database.
The simple example is now configured and can be used as a basis for an actual system.
Page 21
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
6. PAC SecureNet Tools
6.1 Configure Device IP Addresses
To configure a static IP address:
1. Choose Start › All Programs › PAC SecureNet Tools › Configure Device IP
Addresses from the Windows Start Menu.
The IP Device Address Configuration Utility window is displayed.
2. Select a tab: PAC 500, PAC 512 IP, or 2200IP and others.
Note
The columns are described below.
3. Select a device.
Note
On the 2200IP and others tab, some listed devices may not be 2200IP devices.
Confirm the MAC address of any device before attempting to configure it.
4. Choose Entry › Modify.
The Set IP Parameters window is displayed.
Note
If the PAC 500 selected is locked, it must be unlocked by powering it up with the OneTouch™ button pressed.
5. Obtain the IP address automatically or enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default
Gateway.
6. Choose OK.
To refresh the window:
1. Choose File › Refresh.
Page 22
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To exit the window:
1. Choose File › Exit or click on the
icon.
Column Headings
MAC Address
The MAC address of the device, i.e. the unique identifier for the TCP/IP port.
[1]
Serial Number
The serial number of the device.
[1]
Auto IP
An indication of whether the IP address has been automatically allocated
(True) or not (False).
Locked [2]
An indication of whether the IP address has been locked and cannot be
reset (True) or not (False).
IP Address
The IP address of the device.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask of the network.
Default
Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway.
Device Type [3]
The device type.
6.2 Help
To display the PAC SecureNet help file:
1. Choose Start › All Programs › PAC SecureNet Tools › Help.
For context-sensitive help:
1. Select an area on a PAC SecureNet window and press F1 on the keyboard.
6.3 Release Notes
To display the release notes for PAC SecureNet:
1. Choose Start › All Programs › PAC SecureNet Tools › Release Notes.
6.4 Restore Database
Note
Database restore can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator.
To restore a database:
1. Ensure that all users are logged off.
2. Choose Start › All Programs › PAC SecureNet Tools › Restore Database.
[1]
PAC 512 IP and 2200 IP only
[2]
PAC 500 only
[3]
2200IP only
Page 23
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. If the User Account Control dialog box appears, asking if you want to allow the program
to make changes to this computer, choose the Yes button.
The PAC SecureNet Database Restore window is displayed.
4. In the Select the backup to restore box, enter the full name and path of a file to
restore, or click on the browse button to the right and select a file.
When a file is selected, the Schema ID and Product are shown below the file name.
5. If you want to restore the main database, select the Restore Main Database check
box.
6. If you want to restore the event log associated with this backup file, select the Restore
Event Log check box. (This check box is only available if there is an event log
associated with this backup file.)
7. Choose the Restore button.
6.5 Service Manager
Note
Starting and stopping an engine can only be performed by an Operating System
Administrator.
To start / stop an Engine:
1. Choose Start › All Programs › PAC SecureNet Tools › Service Manager or double
click the
icon in the Windows taskbar.
2. Select which engines are to be started/stopped.
Page 24
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Choose the Start or Stop button.
Client Engine
A client engine can be installed on a client PC to allow administration and monitoring from the
client PC. The client engine can be installed when installing PAC SecureNet on the client PC or
by selecting Tools › Configure Client Engine on the client PC.
The client engine can be unconfigured if no channels are defined by selecting Tools ›
Unconfigure Client Engine on the client PC.
6.6 Upgrade Database
Note
Database upgrades can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator.
To upgrade a database:
1. Ensure that all users are logged off.
2. Choose Start › All Programs › PAC SecureNet Tools › Upgrade Database.
The Upgrade window is displayed.
3. Select a file using the browse facility.
4. Choose the Upgrade button.
6.7 Application Software
To log on to PAC SecureNet:
1. Choose Start › All Programs › PAC SecureNet, or:
Click on the
icon.
Page 25
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7. PAC SecureNet Overview
7.1 Login
To login to the PAC SecureNet Access Control Software:
1.
Double click the PAC SecureNet
icon on the Windows desktop.
The Log on / Exit window is displayed.
2. Select or enter an operator name and password. The operator privileges determine the
facilities that this operator can access — see Operator Privileges.
3. If the system has multiple organisational units, select the Organisation.
4. If you can (or must) use a key to log on, select the Key login checkbox and present a
valid key to the administration reader.
5. Users with Operating System Administrator privileges can use the Options button
to specify the server the client PC is connected to. The server should be inside the
organisation firewall.
Important
When using 10BaseT cabling, you must use a hub to network PCs together. Do not
simply plug a CAT5 crossover cable between two PC network cards as this proves
unreliable.
6. Choose Log on and the PAC SecureNet window is displayed.
Notes
When logging on for the first time after installation, the Login Name must be
Installer. You can then select Log on and specify a password.
The Log on/Exit window also shows the licensed product level of the application and the
type of installation, Client or Server.
If a system alarm (or selected alarms not assigned to an area) are detected at login, a
System Alarms window is displayed.
Page 26
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
7.2 PAC SecureNet Already Running
Only one instance of PAC SecureNet can be running at any one time. If you attempt to activate
PAC SecureNet while another instance is already running, an error message is displayed.
You can either use the Windows Task Manager to end the task, or log out of the current task
before attempting a re-activation.
To use the Windows Task Manager:
1. Press Ctrl-Shift-Esc.
2. Select the PAC SecureNet program and choose End Task (to close the program) or
Switch To (to locate the program).
7.3 PAC SecureNet Window
The PAC SecureNet Window has a Welcome Screen, Menus, Toolbar, Explorer Bar and
Status Bar.
The Welcome Screen is replaced by the List View and Property Page when a module is
selected in the Explorer bar. The Welcome Screen can be redisplayed by selecting the
organisational unit and System Summary tab. The organisational unit name can be edited
using the Customisation facilities.
The window can be maximised, minimised and resized and the List View, Explore Bar and
Property Page can be resized by dragging the edges.
Menus
Toolbar
List View
Property Page with Tabs
Explorer Bar
Status Bar
Page 27
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7.4 Welcome Screen / System Summary
The Welcome Screen is displayed after the first login and when the System Summary tab is
selected. The Welcome Screen displays information on the selected organisational unit, e.g.
number of keyholders and maximum limits of the system. If the operator privileges allow, it
also has a Set Organisation Options link that allows the modules to be customised — see
Customisation.
To display the welcome screen / system summary:
1. If necessary, select the organisational unit.
2. Select the System Summary tab.
To display the list view and property page:
1. If necessary, select the organisational unit.
Page 28
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
2. Select a module in the Explorer bar.
The modules allowed by the user’s privileges for the selected organisational unit are
displayed.
A module can be redisplayed by selecting the appropriate tab, or closed by selecting
.
Further information on screen areas is given in PAC SecureNet Window.
7.5 Menus
Normal Menu
Bar
Keyholder Menu
Bar
Hardware Menu
Bar
The menus that can be accessed depend on the operator privileges. The list below details all
menus available to an Installer.
File
Edit
View
Keyholders (only on Keyholder module)
Hardware (only on Hardware module)
Tools
Reports
Help
Page 29
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7.5.1 File
Logoff
Displays the Log on / Exit window.
Import
Displays the File Import window.
Activate Alarm
Alerts
Enables/disables the Alarm Alert popups.
Preview ID
Card
Displays a previously-created photo ID card for the selected keyholder(s)
which can then be printed (Keyholder List View only).
Print ID Card
Prints a previously-created photo ID card for the selected keyholder
(Keyholder List View only).
Exit
Exits immediately.
7.5.2 Edit
Update or Add
Current Record
Saves a new record or updates an existing record.
Create a New
Record
Creates a new record.
Delete Current
Record
Deletes the selected record.
Make Copy
Record
Copies the selected record. To paste the record, select Update or Add
Record.
Discard
Changes to
Current Record
Discards any changes since the last Update or Add operation.
These facilities are the same as those offered by the buttons on the Property Page.
7.5.3 View
Explorer Bar
Toggles the display of the Explorer bar.
Toolbar
Displays toolbar submenu:
•
Standard Buttons: Toggles the display of the toolbar.
•
Show Text: Toggles the display of icon names.
•
Large Icons: Toggles the display of large icons.
Windows
Page 30
Displays Windows submenu:
•
Restore Panes: Displays all tabs and restores undocked
windows back to their default position.
•
Show all tear offs: Enables tips to be displayed when
attempting to use the tear off facility.
•
Don’t show tear off tips: Disables the tear off tips.
•
Enable/Disable Tearoff: Toggles the tear off facility. If disabled,
any undocked windows can be moved but not docked.
•
Tech Support Mode: Toggles between default windows
settings and customised windows settings.
•
A list of windows that can be brought to the front when selected.
Large Icons
Displays the list with associated large icons (List View only).
Small Icons
Displays the list with associated small icons (List View only).
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Details
Displays the list with extra information in columns (List View only).
Thumbnails
Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder List View only).
Tree View
Displays the list with parent and subordinate areas (Area List View only).
Choose
Columns
Specifies the columns to be displayed in the list view.
Back
Selects the previously selected module.
Forward
Selects the next module if Back has been used.
Keyholder
Detail Report
Displays the Keyholder Detail report for the selected keyholder
(Keyholder List View only).
Keyholder
Event Report
Displays the Keyholder Event search parameters for selecting an event
report for the selected keyholder (Keyholder List View only).
Show Details
Displays information on the selected record in a separate window, e.g. time
profile in access groups.
Navigate to
Displays information on the selected record in the PAC SecureNet window,
e.g. time profile in access groups.
Refresh
Updates the current display.
7.5.4 Keyholders
The Keyholders menu is only available when the Keyholder module is selected.
Anti-Passback
Forgive
Forgives an anti-passback violation by the selected keyholder.
Encode
Keycode
Displays the Encode Keycode window — see Encode Keycode.
Search Bar
Displays the Search bar — see The Search Bar.
7.5.5 Hardware
The Hardware menu is only available when the Hardware module is selected.
The commands available in this menu depend on the type of channel or controller selected:
PAC 500 TCP/IP channel
Direct channel
Dialup channel
Offline channel
Online controller
Offline controller
7.5.5.1 TCP/IP Channel Commands
The following commands are available in the Hardware menu when a PAC 500 TCP/IP channel
is selected:
Reset
Password
Displays a warning message to consult the hardware documentation — see
Manage Controller Firmware.
Probe
Channels
Examines the communications channels to locate physically connected
controllers.
Download
direct channels
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected direct/dialup channels.
Page 31
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Download
offline
channels
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline channels
— see Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.
Download
Channel
Database
Downloads the database of all controllers on the selected PAC 500 channel.
Synchronise all
channel clocks
Synchronises all clocks on the system with the clock on the PC.
Firmware
Displays the Manage Firmware window — see Manage Controller Firmware.
Download
Important
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
Modems
Displays the Modems window — see Modems.
7.5.5.2 Direct Channel Commands
The following commands are available in the Hardware menu when a direct channel is
selected:
Probe
Channels
Examines the communications channels to locate physically connected
controllers.
Download
direct channels
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected direct/dialup channels.
Download
offline
channels
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline channels
— see Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.
Initialise CNC
Initialises the CNC if the selected channel is a 1100/2100/2200 — RS232 —
SWB — CNC channel.
[4]
Abort Channel
Download [5]
Aborts a channel download.
Download
Channel
Database
Downloads the database to all controllers on the selected channel.
Synchronise all
channel clocks
Synchronises all clocks on the system with the clock on the PC.
Modems
Displays the Modems window — see Modems.
7.5.5.3 Dialup Channel Commands
The following commands are available in the Hardware menu when a dialup channel is
selected:
Page 32
Dial Now
Displays the Dialup Connection window to dialup a modem — see Modems.
Show Call
Progress
Display the Dialup Connection window to show the dialup progress — see
Modems.
Hang Up
Display the Dialup Connection window to hang up a dialup connection —
see Modems.
Reset
Password [6]
Displays a warning message to consult the hardware documentation — see
Modems.
[4]
1100/2100/2200 — RS232 — SWB — CNC channel only
[5]
1100/2100/2200 channel only
[6]
PAC 512 only
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Probe
Channels
Examines the communications channels to locate physically connected
controllers.
Download
direct channels
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected direct / dialup
channels.
Download
offline
channels
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline channels
— see Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.
Abort Channel
Download [7]
Aborts a channel download.
Download
Channel
Database
Downloads the database to all controllers on the selected channel.
Synchronise
all controller
clocks
Synchronises all clocks on the channel to the clock on the PC.
Modems
Displays the Modems window — see Modems.
7.5.5.4 Offline Channel Commands
The following commands are available in the Hardware menu when an offline channel is
selected:
Reset
Password
Displays a warning message to consult the hardware documentation. See
Reset Password.
Probe
Channels
Examines the communications channels to locate physically connected
controllers.
Download
direct channels
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected direct/dialup channels.
Download
offline
channels
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline channels
— see Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.
7.5.5.5 Online Controller Commands
The following commands are available in the Hardware menu when an online controller is
selected:
Probe
Channels
Examines the communications channels to locate physically connected
controllers.
Download
direct channels
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected direct/dialup channels.
Download
offline
channels
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline channels
— see Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.
Configure
controller [8]
Displays the Configure Controller window — see Probe / Configure /
Unconfigure a Controller.
Unconfigure
controller [9]
Unconfigures the selected controller from its channel.
[7]
1100/2100/2200 channel only
[8]
Unconfigured controller only
[9]
Configured controller only
Page 33
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Download
controller
database
Downloads the database to the selected controller.
Reset
Diagnostic
Code
Resets the diagnostic code.
Set Modem
Initialisation
String
Displays the Modem Initialization String window — see Modem Initialization
String.
Firmware
Displays the Manage Firmware window — see Manage Controller Firmware.
download
Important
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
Modems
Displays the Modems window — see Modems.
7.5.5.6 Offline Controller Commands
The following commands are available in the Hardware menu when an offline controller is
selected:
Probe
Channels
Examines the communications channels to locate physically connected
controllers.
Download
direct channels
Downloads the database to all controllers on selected direct/dialup channels.
Download
offline
channels
Downloads the database to a PDA on selected connected offline channels
— see Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.
Connect to
Controller
Connects the controller.
Disconnect
from controller
Disconnects the controller.
Identify
Controller
Displays the Identify/Configure Controller window — see Download
Database to the Controllers using the PC.
7.5.6 Tools
Event Log
Displays the Event Log window — see Event Log.
System Alarms
Displays the System Alarms window — see Alarm Events and System
Alarms.
Alarm Viewer
Displays the Alarm Viewer window — see Alarm Viewer — Introduction.
Card Designer
Displays the ID Card Designer window — see Card Designer Introduction.
Audit Trail
Displays the Audit Trail window — see Audit Trail.
Alarm Map
Designer
Displays the Alarm Map Designer window — see Alarm Map Designer —
Introduction.
Event to Action
Configuration
Displays the Event to Action Configuration window — see Event to Action.
Configure
Organisations
Displays the Configure Organisations window — see Configure
Organisations.
Manage OEM
Interface [10]
Displays the OEM Interface Configuration window. Further information is
given in documentation supplied with the OEM product.
[10]
Page 34
Only if license allows.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Database
Backup
Displays the Backup window — see Database Backup.
Event
Archiving
Displays the Event Archiving window — see Event Archive.
Advanced
Keyholder
Search
Displays the Advanced Keyholder window — Keyholder List View only, see
Advanced Keyholder Search.
Key Seek
Displays the Find Keyholder by Key window — see Search for a Keyholder.
Upgrade
License
Displays the License Keys window — see Upgrade License.
Configure
Peripherals
Displays the Configure Peripherals window — see Configure Peripherals.
Manage
Controller
Firmware
Displays the Manage Firmware window — see Manage Controller Firmware.
Change
Password
Changes the current user’s password — see Change Password.
Options
Displays the Organisation Options window — see Customisation.
7.5.7 Reports
Favourites
A Manage Favourites option that displays the Favourite Reports Manager
window (see Add a Report to Favourites) and a list of favourite reports that
are displayed when selected.
Custom Report
Manager
Displays the Custom Report Manager window — see Add a Custom Report.
Custom
Reports
A list of custom reports that are displayed when selected.
Saved Reports
A list of saved reports that are displayed when selected.
Refresh reports
explorer and
menu
Updates the list of reports in the Explorer bar and Reports menu.
7.5.8 Help
Contents
Displays this Help file.
About
Displays information about the currently running version and build of PAC
SecureNet. The Installer tab displays information entered at software
installation and the System Info button accesses standard Windows
facilities.
7.6 Toolbar
To alter the appearance of the icons:
1. To toggle the button name, right click on the toolbar and choose Show Text.
2. To toggle the button size, right click on the toolbar and choose Large Icons — this also
affects the Navigator tab in the Explorer bar.
Page 35
PAC SecureNet
To display the full name of the icon:
1. Move the cursor over the button but do not select it.
Page 36
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Toolbar Icons
Go Back selects the previously selected module. Selecting the down arrow on the
right of the icon gives a list of modules for reselection.
Go Forward selects the next module if the Go Back icon has been used. Selecting
the down arrow on the right of the icon gives a list of modules for reselection.
View/Hide Explorer Bar toggles the Explorer bar display.
Update or Add a Current Record confirms any changes made to the current record.
Create a New Record creates a new record.
Delete Current Record deletes the selected record.
Discard Changes to Current Record discards any changes since the last Update or
Add operation.
Key Seek displays the Find Keyholder by Key window — see Search for a
Keyholder.
Displays the Search bar in the Keyholder module — see The Search Bar.
Search Criteria to Refine List View displays the Search bar — Keyholder module
only; see The Search Bar.
List View Modes selects how the List View displays its contents. Selecting the down
arrow gives the following options:
•
Large Icons: Displays the list with associated large icons.
•
Small Icons: Displays the list with associated small icons.
•
List: Displays the list only.
•
Details: Displays the list with extra information in columns.
•
Thumbnails: Displays the list with associated photos (Keyholder
module only).
•
Tree View: Displays a tree view of the areas (Area module only).
View Event Log displays the Event Log window.
Alarms displays the Alarm Viewer window.
Backup Database displays the Backup window.
Anti Passback Forgive forgives an anti-passback violation by the selected keyholder
— Keyholder module only.
Probe Controller Connections collects information from physical connections —
Hardware module only.
Bring up Modem Configuration Dialog displays the Modems window — Hardware
module only.
Refresh updates the current display.
Page 37
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7.7 Explorer Bar
The Explorer bar has three tabs:
•
The Navigator tab displays a modules list. Selecting a module displays appropriate
information in the List View and Property Page.
•
The Shortcuts tab displays a tools list. Selecting a tool (Event Log,
Database Backup, Alarm Viewer, Alarm Map Designer, Event to Action,
ID Card Designer, Event Archiving or Audit Trail) activates the appropriate tool.
•
The Reports tab displays a report folders list. Selecting a report folder displays a
list of reports in that folder. Selecting a report displays the report and provides Print
facilities.
7.8 Status Bar
The Status bar displays the following:
•
Messages.
•
The currently logged on operator.
•
The name of the current Organisational Unit.
•
A count of the number of records in the module.
•
The maximum number of records allowed in the module (if appropriate).
7.9 List View
The List View displays all of the records that are associated with the module selected in the
Explorer bar. Selecting a record in the List View causes the properties associated with that
record to be displayed in the Property Page.
The List View can be resized by dragging any of the edges.
Page 38
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To customise the list view using the Custom Settings window:
1. Choose View › Choose Columns from the Menu bar.
The Column Settings window is displayed.
2. Select the check box next to the columns to be displayed.
3. Enter the column widths.
4. Select from a drop-down list the column to be used to sort the list.
5. Choose the Ascending or Descending option to specify how the list is sorted.
6. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to cancel.
To customise the list view from the list view:
1. To select which columns to display, right click on the column heading and choose which
columns to display from the drop-down menu.
2. To alter the column widths, drag the border in the column heading.
3. To toggle the list view order, select the column heading and the triangle toggles for
ascending or descending order.
To alter the list view:
1.
Right click a record, or select the View menu, or the arrow next to the
icon.
2. Select a view from the drop-down menu:
Large Icons
Displays the list with associated large icons.
Small Icons
Displays the list with associated small icons.
Details
Displays the list with extra information in columns.
Thumbnails
(Keyholder
module only)
Displays the list with associated photos.
Tree View (Area
module only)
Displays a tree view of the areas.
To create a record:
1. Right click on a record and choose New from the shortcut menu, or choose Edit ›
Create a New Record, or click on the
icon.
2. Edit the new record.
Page 39
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Choose the Update or Add button, or choose Edit › Update or Add Current Record,
or click on the
icon.
To copy a record:
1. Right click on a record and choose Copy from the drop-down menu, or select a record
and choose Edit › Make a Copy of Current Record.
2. Edit the new record.
3. Choose the Update or Add button, or choose Edit › Update or Add Current Record,
or click on the
icon.
To delete a record:
1. Right click on a record and choose Delete from the drop-down menu, or select a record
and choose the Delete button, or choose Edit › Delete Current Record, or the click on
the
icon.
To display a report:
1. Right click on a record and choose Report from the shortcut menu, or select a record
and choose View › Report List Selection.
To find a record:
1. Select a column.
2. Enter the first character(s) of the record, e.g. entering S in the Name column finds the
first record with a name starting with S.
To refresh the display:
1. Right click on a record and choose Refresh from the shortcut menu, or select a record
and choose View › Refresh, or click on the
icon, or press the F5 key.
7.10 Property Page
The Property Page displays information associated with the record selected in the List View.
The Property Page can be resized by dragging any of the edges. When there is insufficient
room to display the fields required, scroll bars are displayed to allow access to these fields.
The information is displayed on tabbed areas and some modules have more than one tab to
accommodate all the relevant information.
Each Property Page has four buttons:
Update or Add
Update is displayed if data is edited. When selected, any changes are
saved.
Add is displayed if a new record is being added. When selected, the new
record is saved.
New
Allows a new record to be created.
Delete
Allows the selected record to be deleted.
Cancel
Discards any changes made to the current record providing Update or Add
have not been selected.
Note
The buttons affect the whole Property Page, not just the currently displayed tab.
Page 40
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
7.11 Logoff
To logoff from PAC SecureNet:
1. Choose File › Logoff or press Ctrl-Q.
The Log on/Exit window is displayed.
2. You can log on again (see Login) or exit the window by selecting Exit.
Note
The system logs off automatically after 10 minutes if not used. This auto-logout time can
be modified for each operator — see Operator Details.
Page 41
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
8. Organisation Options
8.1 Customisation
Note
The options available for customisation depend on the license(s). To apply license(s),
see Upgrade License.
To customise the system and organisational unit:
1. Display the Organisation Options window by selecting Set Organisation Options on
the Welcome Screen or choosing the Tools › Options command.
2. To customise the system settings, select System Settings.
3. To customise the system card formats, select Card Format.
4. To customise the system event archiving options, select Event Archiving.
5. To customise the alarm response messages, select Alarm Responses.
6. To customise the system access options, select System Access.
7. To customise the organisational unit details, select Organisational Unit Details.
8. To customise the organisational unit access options, select Access.
9. To customise the organisational unit module names, select Custom Labels.
10. To customise the organisational unit categories, select Categories.
11. To customise the organisational unit Keyholder extra information, select
Keyholder Extra Details.
12. To customise the organisational unit alarms, select Alarms.
13. Choose Apply (window remains open) or OK (closes window).
Note
OK and Apply save the changes on all the tabs.
8.2 System Settings
To customise the system settings:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. Select System Settings.
Page 42
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Specify the following options as required:
•
Specify the Default backup directory for database backups, or click on the
Browse button to select a location.
•
Specify the Backup reminder interval.
•
If required, select the Event Action timeout checkbox and the timeout in
minutes. This timeout applies to remote event to action and remote event IP
link. Any change will not take affect until after an Event Manager restart.
•
Specify PIN Length.
•
Select / deselect User Definable PIN.
•
Select / deselect Allow PIN Change at Door. To change the PIN at the
door, see PIN Readers.
•
Specify a Communication Protection Password for 1100 / 2100 / 2200
Series Door Controller dialup channels. The password is an 8-digit key
code that can be entered manually or via the administration desktop reader.
4. Select another option or close the window.
8.2.1 PIN Readers
To enter an area controlled by a legacy Stanley PIN reader:
1. Present a valid key and enter its PIN code.
To enter an area controlled by a OneProx reader:
1. Present a valid key and enter its PIN code followed by #.
To change the PIN at the door:
1. Create a reader mode profile for PIN only or PIN and Token access.
2. Select the Door Access tab and apply the reader mode profile to the PIN reader.
3. If using PIN and Token mode, present a valid key to the PIN reader.
4. Press * and enter the current PIN followed by #.
5. Enter the new PIN followed by #.
6. Repeat 5 to confirm the new PIN.
Example
* 1234 # 4321 # 4321 #
8.3 Card Format
Important
This feature is only available if it is included in your PAC SecureNet licence. To enable
this feature, see Upgrade License.
To customise the system card formats:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
Page 43
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Select Card Format.
3. Specify the following options as required:
•
Add a new card format.
•
Edit a card format.
•
Delete a card format.
•
Move a card format up or down to determine validation order.
4. Select another option or close the window.
Notes
To add or edit a proximity reader card format, see Proximity Reader.
To add or edit a Magstripe card format, see Magnetic Stripe.
To add or edit a Wiegand (2601) card format, see Wiegand (2601 format).
8.3.1 Proximity Reader
To add or edit a proximity reader card format:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. To add, select Card Format and choose the Add button.
To edit, choose Card Format › Proximity Reader and choose the Edit button or
Proximity Reader.
3. Enter the name and description of the format.
4. Select the type of format, i.e. Proximity Reader.
5. Select the display mode.
6. Select another option or confirm the changes.
Page 44
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
8.3.2 Magnetic Stripe
To add or edit a Magnetic Stripe reader card format:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. To add, select Card Format and choose the Add button.
To edit, choose Card Format › Magnetic Stripe and choose the Edit button or
Magnetic Stripe.
3. Enter the name and description of the format.
4. Select the type of format, i.e. Magnetic Stripe.
5. Select/deselect LRC Checking, i.e. is longitudinal redundancy checking used?
6. Select the display mode.
7. Select another option or confirm the changes.
8. Select the Layout tab.
9. Select token Start (the position of the first character from the card’s data that forms part
of the keycode) and Length (the number of characters). For further information, see the
manufacturer’s documentation. For examples, see Examples of start and length.
Important
If the length is changed after adding keys, the keys become invalid.
10. Select/deselect Facility Code. If selected, specify the facility code start and length. If
Facility Code is specified then an access group can be selected to determine what
access should be granted for all cards using the specified facility code.
11. Select/deselect Issue Code. If selected, specify the issue code start and length.
12. Select/deselect the Issue Code Look Ahead check box. If selected, specify the Offset
(i.e. the value added to the issue code when you choose the New Issue button on the
Keyholder Keys page) and Range (determines the maximum issue code allowed, e.g.
offset 1 range 3 then 1, 2, 3 and 4 are valid issue codes).
Page 45
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
13. The token length is automatically calculated (start + facility code length + issue code
length) but can be increased.
The bar at the bottom indicates the following:
14. Select another option or close the window.
8.3.3 Wiegand (2601 format)
Note
If using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, the standard Wiegand card format
used with the door controllers must be used for all controllers on the system.
To add or edit a Wiegand reader card format:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. To add, select Card Format and choose the Add button.
To edit, choose Card Format › Wiegand (2601) and choose the Edit button.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Enter the name and description of the format.
5. Select the type of format, i.e. Wiegand (2601).
6. Select Custom Wiegand, Universal Wiegand, or Corporate HID.
7. Select the display mode.
To specify the layout if Custom Wiegand is selected:
1. Select the Layout tab.
Page 46
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Note
If Wiegand Universal is selected this tab is not displayed.
2. Select token Start (the position of the first character from the card’s data that forms part
of the keycode) and Length (the number of characters). For further information, see the
manufacturer’s documentation. For examples, see Examples of start and length.
Important
If the length is changed after adding keys, the keys become invalid.
3. Select/deselect Facility Code. If selected, specify the facility code start and length. If
Facility Code is specified then an access group can be selected to determine what
access should be granted for all cards using the specified facility code.
4. Select/deselect Issue Code. If selected, specify the issue code start and length.
5. The token length is automatically calculated (start + facility code length + issue code
length) but can be increased.
6. Select/deselect Number Even Parity. If selected, specify the number of bits to use in
the even parity check.
7. Select/deselect Number Odd Parity. If selected, specify the number of bits to use in
the odd parity check.
The bar at the bottom indicates the following:
8. Select another option or close the window.
8.3.4 Examples of start and length
Example One
Start: 1
Length: 9
Data: 123456789
⇒
Keycode is: 123456789
Simple case
Page 47
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Example Two
Start: 1
Length: 9
Data: 123456789012345690123456789
⇒
Keycode is: 123456789
Data after the 9th digit is ignored as this is not part of the token format data
Example Three
Start: 3
Length: 9
Data: 123456789012345690123456789
⇒
Keycode is: 345678901
Keycode starts from the 3rd digit and is 9 digits long
Example Four
Start: 5
Length: 4
Data: 115000213
⇒
Keycode is: 21
The keycode data has some leading zeros, which means the keycode is 0021. As the keycode
is numerical the leading 0’s add nothing to the keycode, making the keycode value 21.
Example Five
Start: 7
Length: 4
Data: 123456789012345690123456789
⇒
Keycode is: 7890
When encoding to cards, keycodes are padded with leading zeros to the full keycode length.
Example Six
Start: 5
Length: 5
Keycode: 385
⇒
Data is written as: 000000385
4 zeros to get to the start position, and 2 more leading zeros pad out the keycode to make it the
full 5 digits in length.
8.4 Event Archiving
Old events must be removed from the event log so that the event log does not become too big.
You can delete old events or save them in an archive. You can choose to do either of these
automatically or manually. This page enables you to specify what happens to old events. It is
only displayed if you have Installer or Supervisor privileges.
To customise the event archive settings:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
Page 48
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
2. Select Event Archiving.
3. If you want to delete old events, select the Discard All Events (Do not save) option
button.
If you want to archive old events:
i.
Select the Archive to File option button.
ii.
Enter the Default archive location, or use the Browse button to select a location.
iii. In the Keep archives for box, enter the time in years that you want to keep archive
files.
4. If you want to archive or delete old events manually:
i.
Select the Manual Archive option button.
ii.
Use the Prompt to delete / archive when the log reaches box or the slider
beneath to select a maximum number of events. When the number of events in the
event log exceeds this maximum, you will be prompted to perform a manual archive
or delete.
If you want to archive or delete old events automatically:
i.
Select the Automatic Archive option button.
ii.
In the Delete / Archive events older than box, specify how long events will be kept
in the event log before they are automatically archived or deleted.
iii. In the Don’t delete / archive if less than box, specify a minimum number of events
that will be retained in the event log. (If there are only a few events in the event log,
none of these events will be automatically archived or deleted, even if some of them
are older than the specified maximum age.)
5. Select another option or close the window.
Notes
Only one archiving / deleting operation can be performed each day.
Automatic archiving / deleting is performed at 18:00 every day, as long as the minimum
number of events are available, the events are older than the specified age, and manual
archiving / deleting has not been performed that day.
If you specify that old events are to be archived, two files are created for each archiving
operation. The file EKdate.CSV contains archived events; the file AUDdate.CSV
contains the archived audit trail. All archive files are in CSV (Comma-Separated Value)
text file format.
Important
If you specify that old events are to be deleted automatically, ensure that Delete events
older than is set to at least 120 days.
Page 49
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
8.5 Alarm Responses
To customise the alarm responses:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. Select Alarm Responses.
3. To add an alarm response text, choose the Add button and enter the new alarm
response text.
4. To delete an alarm response text, select the text and choose the Delete button.
5. Select another option or close the window.
8.6 System Access
Important
It is recommended to take a backup of the database before changing the access type
because information could be lost, e.g. access groups and areas.
To customise the system access:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. Select System Access.
3. Select the Access defined by option.
4. Select the Access based on option.
5. Select another option or close the window.
8.7 Organisational Unit Details
Important
Some of these features are only available if they are included in your PAC SecureNet
licence. See Upgrade License.
Page 50
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To customise the Organisational Unit details:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. If necessary, select the organisational unit.
3. Enter the Organisational Unit name.
4. Enter the Organisational Unit description.
5. Select the start of the week.
6. Select the time zone.
7. Select the default card format.
8. If licensed for Legacy Organisational Units:
If this Organisational Unit contains any legacy controllers, select Support 2100/2200
series controllers.
9. If keyholders in this Organisational Unit use coloured key fobs and you want to
associate a colour with each key, select Show Key Colours.
10. If licensed for Event to Action:
Enter the e-mail address and name of the SMTP server that uses Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol to send the e-mail generated by the Event to Action facility.
11. If licensed for Remote IP Event Link:
Enter the target address, target port and termination character(s) that will be the default
settings for the Remote IP Event Link facility.
12. Select another option or confirm the changes.
Notes
You cannot change an organisational unit to a legacy organisational unit if it contains
weekly time profiles, or if it contains more than one holiday profile. A warning is
displayed if any keyholders in the organisational unit have more than one access group.
You cannot change a legacy organisational unit to a non-legacy organisational unit if it
contains any legacy controllers.
8.8 Access
To customise the Organisational Unit access options:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
Page 51
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Select Access.
3. Select / deselect Enable Anti-Passback Reset Time. If selected, specify
Anti-Passback Reset Time of Day.
4. Select / deselect Enable Denied Access Counting. If selected, specify the number of
Attempts allowed and the Lockdown Time in minutes if the number of failed attempts
is exceeded.
5. Select another option or close the window.
8.9 Custom Labels
Note
Changing the module names affects the names in the Explorer bar, e.g. Keyholders
could be changed to Personnel. Also some of the tab labels may be changed, e.g.
Category could be changed to Department.
To customise the organisational unit module names:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. Select Custom Labels.
3. Enter the new names for the available customised labels.
4. Select another option or confirm the changes.
8.10 Categories
To customise the Organisational Unit categories:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
Page 52
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
2. Select Categories (or relevant customised label).
3. Specify the following options as required:
•
Add a new category by choosing Add and entering a new name and
description.
•
Edit a category by editing the name and description.
•
Delete a category by selecting the category and choosing Delete.
•
Design an ID card for the selected category by selecting the
see Card Designer Introduction.
button —
If areas are assigned to a PAC 500 channel:
•
Limit the number of times a keyholder in the selected category is allowed
to enter the area by selecting an area, selecting the checkbox and
incrementing the limit.
•
Reset the area usage for all keyholders in this category by selecting the
button.
•
If the Priority Keyholders check box is selected, keyholders in this
category are always downloaded to the PAC 512 controllers. Otherwise,
keyholders are downloaded on demand.
4. Select another option or confirm the changes.
8.11 Keyholder Extra Details
Note
The fields are displayed in the Keyholder Property Page when you select the Extra
Information tab — see Keyholder Extra Information. You can only display the first 5
fields in the Keyholder List View — see Keyholder List View.
To customise the Organisational Unit Keyholder information:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in the
Customisation section.
Page 53
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Select Keyholder Extra Details (or relevant customised label).
3. Select the number of fields required.
4. Enter a description of the information to be included in the column.
5. Enter the size of the column. Alternatively, use the increment / decrement buttons to set
the required size.
6. Select another option or confirm the changes.
8.12 Alarms
To customise the Organisational Unit alarms:
1. If necessary, display the Organisation Options window as described in Customisation.
2. Select Alarms.
3. Specify the following options as required:
•
Specify the duration of the alarm sound.
•
Test the alarm sound —
alarm sound.
starts the alarm sound and
stops the
•
Change the alarm sound — choose the Change button and select a .wav
file.
•
Reset the alarm sound — choose the Reset button.
4. Select another option or confirm the changes.
If alarm management has been licensed, the alarm points that are not assigned to an area for
monitoring by the Alarm Viewer can be specified for monitoring via the System Alarms window.
1. Choose Alarms › Detail.
Page 54
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
2. Select the Show alarm dialog for unmanaged alarms check box.
3. Select which events are alarms — these will be displayed in the System Alarms
window.
4. Select another option or confirm the changes.
If alarm monitoring has not been licensed, you can specify the events to be classed as alarms
and thus monitored via the System Alarms window:
1. Choose Alarms › Detail.
2. Select which events are alarms — these will be displayed in the System Alarms
window.
3. Select another option or confirm the changes.
Page 55
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
9. Organisational Units
9.1 Organisational Units List
Note
This facility is only available if licensed for more than one organisational unit.
To display the organisational unit list:
1. Choose Tools › Configure Organisations.
The Configure Organisations window is displayed.
Further information is given in Configure Organisations.
9.2 Organisational Unit Details
Note
This facility is only available if licensed for more than one organisational unit.
To add / edit / delete an organisational unit:
1. Choose Tools › Configure Organisations.
The Configure Organisations window is displayed.
2. Perform one of the following:
To add, choose the Add New button and enter the organisation’s details.
To edit, select the organisation, choose the Edit button and enter the new details.
To delete, select the organisation and choose the Delete button.
3. Choose the OK or Apply button.
Further information is given in Configure Organisations.
Page 56
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
10. Keyholders
10.1 Keyholder List View
On initial viewing, the Keyholder List View displays information on keyholders in columns and is
in alphabetical order.
To alter the list display:
1.
Select the arrow next to the
icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a view from the drop-down menu, e.g. Thumbnails displays photos of
keyholders.
To display extra information in the list view:
1. Right click on the headings and choose which columns should be displayed. The
Customisation facilities can be used to create columns.
Note
The first 5 extra information fields can be displayed in the Keyholder List View using the
Customisation facilities. All the extra information fields are displayed in the Keyholder
Property Page — see Keyholder Extra Information.
To display information on a keyholder:
1. Select a keyholder in the Keyholder List View and the appropriate information is
displayed in the Keyholder Property Page.
To search for a keyholder:
1. See Search for a Keyholder.
Other facilities are described in List View.
10.2 Keyholder Property Page
The Keyholder Property Page is used to define Keyholders, e.g. personal details and access
group.
The Keyholder Properties Page may contain the following tabs:
Details
Personal Details
Keys
Groups
Guest Access
Personal Access
Notes
Extra Information
Events
Area Usage
10.2.1 Keyholder Details
When you display the Keyholder Property Page, the Details tab is displayed by default.
Note
Some labels and table names may have been changed by Customisation.
Page 57
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To display details information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Title
The title of the keyholder, selected from a drop-down list.
Last Name
The last name of the keyholder, specified by data entry.
First Name
The first name of the keyholder, specified by data entry.
Initials
The initials of the keyholder, specified by data entry.
Start Date
The date and time from which the keyholder should be granted
access, entered by data entry and drop-down calendar. Enabled /
disabled by selecting its check box. If enabled, access is not allowed
until the specified date and time but events (e.g. an attempt to enter)
are reported.
End Date
The date and time after which the keyholder should not be granted
access, entered by data entry and drop-down calendar. Enabled /
disabled by selecting its check box. If enabled, access is no longer
allowed after the specified date and time but events (e.g. an attempt
to enter) are still reported.
Category
The category of the keyholder, selected from a drop-down list. The
Customisation facilities can be used to create / edit categories.
The category determines the format of the ID card — see Card
Designer Introduction.
Photo
A photo of the keyholder.
The photo can be captured from an image file, Twain device or
Video device using the Capture button — see Using the Image
Capture Utility.
A previously-captured photo can be cleared by choosing the Clear
button.
You can print a previously-created photo ID card for the keyholder
by choosing the Print ID Card button. For further information, see
Keyholder List View.
Security Level
[11]
The security level of the keyholder, selected by increments 0 to 9 —
0 preventing access to all areas.
Requires Extra
Door Time
An indication of whether the keyholder requires extra time to get
through the door, specified by check box.
[11]
Page 58
Access by Security Level mode only
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To forgive an anti-passback violation by this keyholder:
1. Choose the Tasks button.
Select Anti-Passback Forgive.
To display a photo ID card print preview:
1. Select a keyholder (or keyholders) and choose the File › Preview ID Card command, or
right click on a keyholder (or keyholders) and choose the Preview ID Card command.
The Print window is displayed.
2. Select a printer and choose the OK button.
The Print Preview window is displayed.
3.
To print the card(s), click on the
icon.
To print photo ID card(s):
1. Select a keyholder and choose the Print ID Card button on the Details tab, or select a
keyholder and choose the File › Print ID Card command, or right click on a keyholder
and choose the Print ID Card command. If more than one keyholder is selected, the
Print ID Card button cannot be selected.
2. Select a printer and choose the OK button. If one keyholder is selected and you choose
the Print ID Card button, the Print Preview window is displayed. To print the card, click
on the
icon.
If using a single-sided card printer, the front is printed first and a message asking if the
back is to be printed is displayed. After the front is printed, turn the card over, load it to
the printer and select Yes; if the back is not required, select No.
For information on batch printing, see .
To encode a magnetic stripe card using an MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:
1. Select a keyholder and choose the Keyholders › Encode Keycode command, or right
click on a keyholder and choose Encode Keycode.
The Encode Keycode window is displayed — see Encode Keycode.
To print and encode a magnetic stripe card using an Eltron P420 Card Printer:
1. See Printing and Encoding Magnetic Stripe Cards using an Eltron P420 Card Printer.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.2 Keyholder Personal Details
To display personal details information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
Page 59
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Select the Personal Details tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Employee
Number
The employee (staff) number of the keyholder, specified by data
entry.
Date of Birth
The date of birth of the keyholder, specified by data entry or dropdown calendar.
Home Tel.
The home telephone number of the keyholder, specified by data
entry.
Work Tel.
The work telephone number of the keyholder, specified by data
entry.
Mobile Tel.
The mobile telephone number of the keyholder, specified by data
entry.
e-Mail
The e-mail address of the keyholder, specified by data entry. For
PAC SecureNet to be able to send e-mail to this keyholder, the email address should be in SMTP format, e.g. [email protected].
Signature
An image of the keyholder’s signature.
The signature can be captured from an image file, Twain device
or Video device using the Capture button — see Using the Image
Capture Utility.
A previously-captured image can be cleared by choosing the Clear
button.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.3 Keyholder Keys
If an administration reader is to be used to add key codes, you must connect and configure an
administration reader — see Configure Peripherals.
If the Search bar is displayed in the List View, you must deselect the Key Code check box —
see Keyholder List View.
Important
If adding magnetic stripe cards, ensure that the position and length are specified first —
see Magnetic Stripe.
If a PAC 1100/2100/2200 master controller has been configured on the administration
kit channel, keys cannot be added if the master controller is not connected or
communicating. If this occurs, deselect the Online check box on the master controller
Details tab.
Page 60
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To display keys information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Keys tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
•
If required, specify the PIN number to be used with OneProx readers that
support user-defined PINs by clicking the Set PIN button. The PIN number
can be cleared by selecting
next to the Set PIN button.
The PIN number to be used with the legacy Stanley PIN reader cannot be
changed and is only displayed when the PIN field is selected.
•
Enable/disable a key by selecting/deselecting a check box. If the key is
disabled, the key will not open any door.
•
Add a new key by presenting the key to the administration reader or by
selecting Add New Key and entering the key code. The PIN number is
calculated from the keycode but is only displayed when the PIN field is
selected. The card format can be selected from a drop-down list.
•
If this keyholder uses a coloured key fob and you have specified
Show Key Colours, open the Colour drop-down list and select a colour for
the key.
•
If this keyholder uses a Magnetic Stripe key and you have specified
Issue Code Look Ahead, a New Issue button is displayed for when a new
issue code is required.
•
Delete a key by selecting
next to the key.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.4 Keyholder Access Groups
This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode — see Access Types.
Notes
Before you can allocate access groups to a keyholder, you must define the access
groups — see Access Group Details.
If this organisational unit uses 1100 / 2100 / 2200 series door controllers, you can only
assign one access group to each keyholder.
Page 61
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To display access group information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Access Group tab.
To allocate access groups to the keyholder:
1. Select the appropriate check box(es).
The buttons are described in Property Page.
Note
If you attempt to assign more than one access group to a keyholder in a legacy
organisational unit, a warning message is displayed. See Keyholder Access Groups
with Legacy Controllers for more information.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.4.1 Keyholder Access Groups with Legacy Controllers
PAC 2100/2200 controllers do not support multiple access groups for a keyholder.
If you attempt to assign multiple access groups to a keyholder in an org unit which contains
PAC 2100/2200 controllers, the following warning message is displayed:
Page 62
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To remove the warning message:
1. If you don’t want this message to be displayed again in the current session, select the
Do not show this warning again until I next log in check box.
2. If you are sure that you want to assign multiple access groups to this keyholder, choose
the Yes button.
If you want to cancel the operation and return to the keyholder property page, choose
the No button.
Notes
Instead of using multiple access groups in a legacy Org Unit, you can:
•
Create a new access group that provides equivalent access, or:
•
Use personal access instead of access groups.
Under exceptional circumstances, it may be acceptable to assign multiple access
groups to a keyholder in a legacy Org Unit:
•
The legacy Org Unit must contain at least one PAC 512 / 202 controller, and you
must be confident that keyholder access is not needed by the PAC 2100/2200
controllers. You will need to look carefully at which areas are controlled by which
controllers.
•
If you do inadvertently assign a keyholder with multiple access groups to an area
controlled by a legacy controller, a system alarm will be raised when the legacy
controller is loaded. You will then need to examine all keyholders on the system to
determine which one is at fault.
•
Because the Outside area is common to all org units, special care should be
taken when including it in an access group and using it on PAC 2100/2200 doors,
because that access group must then be downloaded to the PAC 2100/2200
controller.
10.2.5 Keyholder Guest Access
This tab is only displayed in Access by Access Groups mode (see Access Types) and when
multiple organisational units are licensed.
Notes
Before guest access groups can be allocated to a keyholder, you must define the
access groups in the other organisational unit — see Access Group Details.
If this organisational unit uses 1100 / 2100 / 2200 series door controllers, you can only
assign one access group to each keyholder.
To display guest access information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
Page 63
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Select the Guest Access tab.
To allocate guest access groups to the keyholder:
1. Select the organisational unit and a list of available access groups in that organisational
unit is displayed.
2. Select the appropriate check box(es).
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.6 Keyholder Personal Access
This tab is only displayed if using Access by Access Groups mode — see Access Types.
To display personal access group information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a Keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Personal Access tab.
To allocate access:
1. Select the Profile 1 check box.
2. Select the time profile from the drop-down list. Selecting None allows access to the
selected areas at all times.
3. Specify the areas that the time profile applies to by selecting / deselecting the area
check boxes.
4. If access to areas in other organisational units is to be granted, choose the More button
to display the Additional Areas window. Select the organisational unit and specify the
areas by selecting / deselecting the area check boxes.
5. If required, repeat for Profile 2.
Page 64
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Note
The number of time profiles that can be allocated to a personal access group is 2, i.e. 2
columns. If a column is blank it is ignored.
Tip
A keyholder’s time profile can be used in conjunction with a PIN reader to limit access
but a valid key and PIN is always required to gain access during that time profile.
Important
Time profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The legacy Stanley
PIN Reader is the only reader that you can use with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door
Controllers.
To display the time profile:
1. Right click on the column heading.
2. Specify the following options as required:
•
Display the time profile by selecting Show Details.
•
Go to the Time Profile Property Page by selecting Navigate To.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.7 Keyholder Notes
To display notes information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Notes tab.
4. Type in notes as required.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
Page 65
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
10.2.8 Keyholder Extra Information
This tab is only displayed if extra information fields have been defined using the Customisation
facilities.
To display extra information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Extra Information tab.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.9 Keyholder Events
To display recent events information for this keyholder:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Events tab.
The latest 10 events associated with the keyholder are then displayed.
To update the display:
1. Choose the Refresh button.
To select which columns to display:
1. Right click on the column heading.
2. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.
To toggle the event order:
1. Select the column heading and the triangle toggles for ascending or descending order.
Page 66
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To display information on the keyholder that generated the event:
1. Right click on the event and choose Show Details for keyholder or Navigate to
keyholder from the shortcut menu.
To display controller time:
1. Select the Controller Time option.
To display system time:
1. Deselect the Controller Time option.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.10 Keyholder Area Usage
This tab is only displayed in Access by Areas mode (see Access Types) and requires a PAC
500 TCP/IP channel to operate.
To display area usage information:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. Select the Area Usage tab.
4. View the following information:
Name
The name of the area.
Default Limit
The default number of entries this keyholder is allowed to make into
this area, specified by category customisation.
Note
The keyholder must have the same category as that set up in customisation. If the
keyholder has no category or the category default has not been specified, this field is
blank.
Remaining
The remaining number of entries this keyholder is allowed to make
into this area, specified by data entry or increments — automatically
updated when display is refreshed.
To refresh the display automatically:
1. Tick the Update Area Usage every check box.
Page 67
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Enter a number of seconds in the seconds box.
The Area Usage totals are refreshed periodically so that you can see real time changes
as the keyholder uses the system.
Notes
When you are modifying the keyholder settings, automatic area usage refresh is
suspended.
If multiple keyholders are selected, refresh is not available.
If you do not have write privilege for keyholders, you can still enable refresh.
To allow entry into the area if the limit has been reached:
1. Choose the Reset button.
2. Choose the Update button and the Remaining value is reset to the Default value.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Keyholders:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder.
10.2.11 Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder
Notes
If an administration reader is to be used to add key codes — see Keyholder Keys, you
must connect and configure an administration reader — see Configure Peripherals.
If the Search bar is displayed in the List View, you must deselect the Key Code check
box.
First, select the Keyholders module.
To add a Keyholder:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information — select a property page field
and press F1 to obtain help.
3. Choose Add.
To update a Keyholder:
1.
Select a keyholder — you can use the
icon to find the keyholder.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information — select a property page field
and press F1 to obtain help.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or select Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a Keyholder:
1.
Select a keyholder — you can use the
icon to find the keyholder.
2. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the keyholder.
Page 68
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
11. Guests
This module is only displayed if multiple organisational units have been defined; see Configure
Organisations.
The Guests Page is used to allow a keyholder from a different organisational unit to enter areas
in this organisational unit.
To display guest details:
1. Select the Guests module.
2. Select the Search for a Keyholders in other Organisations check box.
3. Enter the Last Name of the guest.
4. Select the Organisation the guest belongs to.
5. Choose the Search button and a list of keyholders that match the search criteria is
displayed.
6. Select the keyholder who is to be allowed access and (if necessary) select the Details
tab.
To specify access for a guest:
1. Select the Access tab and select the access group required by the guest to enter areas
(possibly restricted by time profile) in this organisational unit.
Page 69
PAC SecureNet
To display read-only details of the guest’s personal access:
1. Select the Personal Access tab.
Page 70
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
12. Operators
12.1 Operator List View
The Operator List View displays a list of PAC SecureNet operators along with each operator’s
privilege level.
See List View.
12.2 Operator Property Page
The Operator Property Page is used to define PAC SecureNet operators. Each operator must
also be a keyholder. The operator’s privileges determine which functions the operator can
access.
If you do not have a high enough privilege level to edit an operator’s properties, the operator’s
Property Page is disabled.
The Operator Property Page may contain the following tabs:
Details
Privileges
Login Options
Alarm Viewer
12.2.1 Operator Details
The Details tab is displayed by default.
To display an operator’s details:
1. Select the Operator module.
2. In the List View, select an operator whose privilege level is the same as or lower than
yours. (If you select an operator with a higher privilege level, you will not be able to
make any changes.)
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Login Name
The type of user, specified by data entry. Specify a password for the
user by choosing Set Password.
Keyholder
Name
The keyholder who is also an operator, specified by
searching for an existing keyholder or choosing Create New and
creating a new keyholder. A keyholder can only be assigned one set
of operator privileges per organisational unit.
Expiry Date
The date the operator privileges will be removed from the keyholder
if the Password Expired check box is selected, specified by data
entry and drop-down calendar.
Page 71
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Auto-Logout
Delay (mins)
If selected, the operator is logged out automatically if the system is
not used for the specified time (range 1 to 120 minutes, specified by
checkbox and data entry or increments).
Note
If this value is changed, the updated value takes affect after the next login.
Key Login
Allowed
An indication of whether you can use a key to login, specified by
check box.
Key Login
Required
An indication of whether you must use a key to login, specified by
check box.
Password
Expired
An indication of whether the password has expired and a new
password must be specified, specified by check box.
Account
Disabled
An indication of whether the user is prevented from logging in,
specified by check box.
Last Login
The date of the last login (automatically entered).
To set a password:
1. Choose the Set Password button.
The Set Password window is displayed.
2. Enter the new password (at least 6 characters) and confirm password.
3. Choose OK.
The other buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete operators:
1. See Add / Update / Delete an Operator.
12.2.2 Operator Privileges
You can assign privileges to operators by applying a predefined privilege template to that
operator. Each privilege template gives the ability to access or change a set of features specific
to a certain operator rôle.
Notes
Each privilege template has an associated privilege level. Each template’s privilege
level is shown next to the name of the privilege template. See Privilege Level for more
information.
You can edit the exist privilege templates, or create new ones. See Edit Privilege
Templates for more information.
To display operator privileges:
1. Select the Operator module.
2. In the List View, select an operator whose privilege level is the same as or lower than
yours. (If you select an operator with a higher privilege level, you will not be able to
make any changes.)
Page 72
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Select the Privileges tab.
To allocate privileges:
1. If multiple organisational units exist, select the Organisation.
2. Open the Privilege Template drop-down list and select a privilege template. (If your
own privilege template does not allow you to apply a privilege template, this drop-down
list is disabled.)
Installer
Full control over all product features.
Supervisor
All facilities except write hardware facilities.
Note
If specifying an installer or supervisor, system Customisation is only allowed if installer /
supervisor privileges are given to all organisational units.
Hardware
Engineer
Write access to hardware module and read access to alarm and
event facilities.
Operator
Write access to all facilities except Hardware, Alarm Map Designer,
Card Designer, Event to Action and Audit Trail.
Manager
Read access to all facilities except Operators; plus write access to
keyholders and add access to event archiving.
Security
Manager
Read access to all facilities except Operators, Event Archiving and
Audit Trail; plus write access to keyholders, access groups, areas,
time and mode profiles, holiday profiles.
Monitor
Event log facilities only and read only access to time profiles, holiday
profiles, areas, channels, controllers and doors.
Guard
Alarm Viewer and no auto-logout.
Guest
Read access only. No access to Database Backup, Alarm Viewer,
Alarm Map Designer, Event to Action, Card Designer, Event
Archiving, and Audit Trail.
Guest
Administrator
Note
Write access to guest facilities.
A guest administrator must be given a privilege that allows logon to a different
organisational unit. For example, Manager in Org 1 and Guest Administrator in Org 2
allows logon to Org 1 only; when logged on to Org 1, the Guest Administrator privileges
allows access rights to be assigned to guests from Org 2.
No privilege
Cannot access the Organisational Unit.
Page 73
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. If you want the operator to be able to perform administration tasks such as backups,
event archives and license upgrades, select the System Administrator check box; if
not, deselect this check box.
4. Repeat for each organisational unit; No privilege is the default.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete operators:
1. See Add / Update / Delete an Operator.
12.2.2.1 Privilege Level
Each privilege template has a privilege level associated with it. The privilege level is a number
from 0 to 100. The privilege level controls whether an operator can modify another operator,
and whether an operator can assign a particular template to an operator.
For example, if an operator has a template in an org unit with a privilege level of 40:
•
He or she may edit or delete any operators in that org unit with privilege level 40
and below.
•
He or she may assign any template with privilege level 40 and below to an operator
in that org unit — as long as that operator also has privilege level 40 and below.
12.2.3 Operator Alarm Viewer
To display operator alarm viewer information:
1. Select the Operator module.
2. In the List View, select an operator whose privilege level is the same as or lower than
yours. (If you select an operator with a higher privilege level, you will not be able to
make any changes.)
3. Select the Alarm Viewer tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Pop up window
when alarms
are activated
An indication whether an alarm pop-up window is displayed when an
alarm is generated, specified by check box.
Use flashing
icons
An indication whether the alarm icon flashes when an alarm is
generated, specified by check box.
Disable alarm
sounds
An indication whether the alarm sound is disabled for this operator,
specified by check box.
Note
Any changes take affect after the next login.
Page 74
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete operators:
1. See Add / Update / Delete an Operator.
12.2.4 Operator Login Options
To display operator login options:
1. Select the Operator module.
2. In the List View, select an operator whose privilege level is the same as or lower than
yours. (If you select an operator with a higher privilege level, you will not be able to
make any changes.)
3. Select the Login Options tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Log into
the main
application
When this operator logs in, the welcome screen will be displayed.
Log directly
into Event
Log Viewer or
Alarm Viewer
When this operator logs in, the Event Log Viewer or Alarm Viewer
will be displayed, depending on the operator’s privilege template.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete operators:
1. See Add / Update / Delete an Operator.
12.2.5 Add / Update / Delete an Operator
The number of operators depends on the software option.
First, select the Operator module.
To add an operator:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information — select a property page field
and press F1 to obtain help.
3. Choose Add.
To update an operator:
1. Select an operator.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
Page 75
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To delete an operator:
1. Select an operator.
2. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the operator.
12.2.6 Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator
When specifying a keyholder as an operator there are three methods of searching for the
keyholder.
To specify a keyholder by auto-selection:
1. Click in the Keyholder Name box and start to type.
PAC SecureNet guesses the rest of the name.
2. Accept the name or carry on typing.
To specify a keyholder from a drop-down list:
1.
Click on the
icon.
A drop-down list of keyholders is displayed.
2. Select the keyholder you want from the list.
The last option in the list is ..., which displays the Advanced Keyholder Selection
window.
To specify a keyholder using Advanced Keyholder Search:
1.
Click on the
icon, or click on the
icon and choose the ... option.
The Advanced Keyholder Selection window is displayed. See Advanced Keyholder
Search for more information.
Page 76
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
13. Time & Mode Profiles
13.1 Time & Mode Profile List View
The Time & Mode Profile List View displays a list of Time and Mode profiles. A time profile
can be applied to a keyholder or door. A mode profile can be applied to an area, door or reader.
When a time profile is applied to a keyholder (or access group) it determines when a keyholder
has access through a door. When a mode profile is applied to a door or reader, it determines
the mode — e.g. area armed or disarmed, door open or closed. For further information on the
modes that you can apply, see , or .
A Time or Mode profile consists of one or more time periods, each of which can span multiple
days.
A holiday profile can be assigned to a Time or Mode profile to limit access during holiday
periods.
Note
If 1100/2100/2200 controllers are being used, you must define the time profiles after the
controllers.
See List View.
13.2 Time & Mode Profile Property Page
The Daily Time Profiles property page is displayed for legacy Org Units. The
Weekly Time Profiles property page is displayed on systems that have no 1100 / 2100 / 2200
controllers.
The Weekly Mode Profiles property page is displayed for Area Mode Profiles, Door Mode
Profiles and Reader Mode Profiles.
The Holiday property page is displayed on systems that have no 1100 / 2100 / 2200 controllers.
13.2.1 Daily Time Profile
The Daily Time Profile Property Page is displayed for legacy Org Units.
Up to four different time profiles can be specified — e.g. profile 1 for morning access, profile 2
for evening access, profile 3 for Saturday access, profile 4 for Sunday access.
Notes
This type of profile is not applicable to mode profiles.
Daily time profiles cannot use public holiday profiles.
To display daily time profile information:
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.
2. Select a time profile in the List View.
3. Specify the following options as required:
Page 77
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Name
The name of the time profile, specified by data entry, e.g. At all
Times, Office Hours, Early Morning, Evening Night, etc.
Description
A description of the time profile, specified by data entry.
This time or
mode profile
is available
to other
Organisations
Tick the check box if this is a public time profile, i.e. if it is available
to other organisational units.
Start Time
The start time of the time profile, specified by data entry or
increments. The Profile check box must be selected.
End Time
The end time of the time profile, specified by data entry or
increments.
Sunday to
Saturday
The days of the week the time profile applies to, specified by check
boxes.
No Holiday
Profile
An indication of whether a holiday profile is not used, selected
by option button. If selected, the time profile applies through any
holidays.
Use Holiday
Profile
An indication of whether the holiday profile is used. Only one holiday
profile can be specified for a legacy Org Unit. If selected, no access
is granted during the holiday periods defined by the holiday profile.
To add / update / delete Time and Mode profiles:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Time or Mode Profile.
13.2.2 Weekly Time Profile
The Weekly time profile Property Page is displayed for Organisational Units that do not use
1100 / 2100 / 2200 Series Door Controllers.
To display Weekly time profile information:
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.
2. Select a time profile in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Week tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Page 78
Name
The name of the time profile, specified by data entry, e.g. At all
Times, Office Hours, Early Morning, Evening Night, etc.
Description
A description of the time profile, specified by data entry.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
This time or
mode profile
is available
to other
Organisations
Tick the check box if this is a public time profile, i.e. if it is available
to other organisational units.
Sunday to
Saturday [12]
A graphical representation of the start and end times of access for
each day of the week, specified by selecting an area in the bar and
dragging with the mouse button pressed down. A bar represents the
start and end times for access and may cover more than one day
and occur more than once in a day — e.g. allowed access in the
morning and evening but not during the day. The start and end times
can be changed by selecting and dragging the left or right edge. The
boxes at the bottom of the display show the day and time of the start
and end of the selected time period. You can use these to alter the
specification or fine tune it.
Notes
•
You can use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move between bars.
•
You can use the Shift- keys on the keyboard to resize the bars.
•
You can use the Ctrl- keys on the keyboard to move the bars.
To insert a bar:
1. Right click on a day and choose New from the shortcut menu, press the Insert key
on the keyboard or click inside the day at the required start point and, keeping the left
mouse button pressed, drag the cursor to the required end time then release the mouse
button.
To copy a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Copy, then right click on a day and choose Paste, or:
Press and hold the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position, then release
the Ctrl key.
To move a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Cut, then right click on a day and choose Paste, or:
Press and hold the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position, then release
the Shift key.
To delete a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Delete from the shortcut menu, press the Delete key
on the keyboard, or choose Edit › Delete Current Record on the main menu.
To add / update / delete Time and Mode profiles:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Time or Mode Profile.
13.2.3 Mode Profiles
To display mode profile information:
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.
2. Select a mode profile in the List View.
[12]
Start of week may have been changed by customisation
Page 79
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. If necessary, select the Week tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the mode profile, specified by data entry.
Description
A description of the mode profile, specified by data entry.
This Time or
Mode profile
is available
to other
Organisations
Tick the check box if this is a public mode profile, i.e. if it is available
to other organisational units.
Sunday to
Saturday [13]
A graphical representation of the start and end times of the mode
(determined by the Mode field) for each day of the week, specified
by selecting an area in the bar and dragging with the mouse button
pressed down. A bar represents the start and end times for the
mode and may cover more than one day and occur more than once
in a day — e.g. allowed access in the morning and evening but not
during the day. The start and end times can be changed by selecting
and dragging the left or right edge. The boxes at the bottom of the
display show the day and time of the start and end of the selected
time period. You can use these to alter the specification or fine tune
it.
Access Options
The options that are to be applied to the specified times during the
time period. These options depend on the type of mode profile:
Area Mode Profile
Door Mode Profile
Reader Mode Profile
Notes
•
You can use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move between bars.
•
You can use the Shift- keys on the keyboard to resize the bars.
•
You can use the Ctrl- keys on the keyboard to move the bars.
To insert a bar:
1. Right click on a day and choose New from the shortcut menu, or press the Insert key
on the keyboard, or click inside the day at the required start point and, keeping the left
mouse button pressed, drag the cursor to the required end time then release the mouse
button.
[13]
Page 80
Start of week may have been changed by customisation
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To copy a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Copy, then right click on a day and choose Paste, or:
Press and hold the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position, then release
the Ctrl key.
To move a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Cut, then right click on a day and choose Paste, or:
Press and hold the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position, then release
the Shift key.
To delete a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Delete from the shortcut menu, or press the Delete key
on the keyboard, or choose Edit › Delete Current Record on the main menu.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete Time and Mode profiles:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Time or Mode Profile.
13.2.3.1 Area Mode Profile
Mode
The area access mode (armed or disarmed) that is applied to the specified
periods, selected from a drop-down list.
Airlock
Airlock can be applied to the area for the specified time periods, selected by
checkbox.
Anti-passback
Anti-passback can be applied to the area for the specified time periods,
selected by checkbox.
13.2.3.2 Door Mode Profiles
Mode
The door mode (open, first open, bolted or anti-passback) that is applied to
the specified times, selected from a drop-down list.
13.2.3.3 Reader Mode Profiles
Mode
The reader access mode (PIN, token, PIN or token, or PIN and token) that is
applied to the specified times, selected from a drop-down list.
Important
Mode profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The legacy Stanley
PIN Reader is the only reader that you can use with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door
Controllers.
Two Key
Access
If this checkbox is selected, two valid keys are required for access.
13.2.4 Holiday Time Profile
The Holiday Time Profile Property Page is displayed for Organisational Units that only use
PAC 500 series door controllers. It is not displayed for legacy Org Units. You can assign holiday
profile(s) to a Time or Mode profile to allow or restrict access during holiday periods.
Notes
If a holiday profile is to be assigned to the Time or Mode profile, you must define the
holiday profile first — see Holiday Profile Property Page.
If the start and end times for the holiday period (specified below) overlap the time
profile, the holiday period overrides the time period. For example, if a time period
allows access up to 20:00 but the holiday profile prevents access after 18:00, access is
prevented after 18:00 during the holiday period.
Page 81
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To display holiday time profile information:
1. Select the Time & Mode Profile module.
2. Select a Time or Mode profile in the List View.
3. Select the Holiday tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Holiday
Profiles
A list of holiday profiles that can be assigned to the Time or Mode
profile, selected by check box. Public holiday profiles from other org
units are shown with their org unit prefix, or the full org unit name if it
has no prefix. You can see public holiday profiles from all org units,
even those you have no privilege for.
Holiday Profile
The name of the selected holiday profile (automatically entered).
Start and End
Times
A graphical representation of the start and end times of mode for
each day of the holiday period(s), specified by selecting an area in
the bar and dragging with the mouse button pressed down. A bar
represents the start and end times for access — e.g. allowed access
in the morning and evening but not during the day. The start and
end times can be changed by selecting and dragging the left or right
edge. The boxes at the bottom of the display show the day and time
of the start and end of the selected holiday period. You can use
these to alter the specification or fine tune it.
Access
Options [14]
The access that is applied to the specified times during the holiday
period. The access options depend on the type of mode profile:
Area Mode Profile
Door Mode Profile
Reader Mode Profile
[14]
Page 82
Mode profiles only
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Notes
•
You can use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move between bars.
•
You can use the Shift- keys on the keyboard to resize the bars.
•
You can use the Ctrl- keys on the keyboard to move the bars.
To insert a bar:
1. Right click on a day and choose New from the shortcut menu, or press the Insert key
on the keyboard, or click inside the day at the required start point and, keeping the left
mouse button pressed, drag the cursor to the required end time then release the mouse
button.
To copy a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Copy, then right click on a day and choose Paste, or:
Press and hold the Ctrl key, select a bar and drag it to the new position, then release
the Ctrl key.
To move a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Cut, then right click on a day and choose Paste, or:
Press and hold the Shift key, select a bar and drag it to the new position, then release
the Shift key.
To delete a bar:
1. Right click on a bar and choose Delete from the shortcut menu, press the Delete key
on the keyboard or choose Edit › Delete Current Record on the main menu.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete Time and Mode profiles:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Time or Mode Profile.
13.2.5 Add / Update / Delete a Time or Mode Profile
First select the Time or Mode profile.
To add a Time or Mode profile:
1. Do one of the following:
Click on the New button, then use the pop-up menu to choose the Time or Mode profile
that you want to create — Create New Simple Time Profile, Create New Area Time
Profile, Create New Door Mode Profile, or Create New Reader Mode Profile, or:
Click on the
icon to create a new time profile, or click on the arrow to the right
and select Create New Time Profile, Create New Door Mode Profile or Create New
Reader Mode Profile, or:
Choose Edit › Create a New Record and select Create New Time Profile, Create
New Door Mode Profile or Create New Reader Mode Profile.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information — select a property page field
and press F1 to obtain help.
3. Choose Add.
To update a Time or Mode profile:
1. Select a Time or Mode profile.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
Page 83
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3.
Choose Update or press Ctrl-S or click on the
discard changes.
icon to save changes or Cancel to
To delete a Time or Mode profile:
1. Select a Time or Mode profile.
2.
Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D or click on the
icon.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the Time or Mode profile.
Page 84
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
14. Holiday Profiles
14.1 Holiday Profile List View
The Holiday Profile List View displays a list of holiday profiles. Holiday profile(s) can be
applied to a time profile and take precedence over the time profile. For example, if a keyholder
has a time profile that allows access at any time, access is still prevented at times specified by
the holiday profile.
A holiday profile consists of one or more holiday periods that can span multiple days.
Note
In legacy Organisational Units, only one holiday profile is allowed.
See List View.
14.2 Holiday Profile Property Page
The Holiday Profiles Property Page is used to define holiday profiles, e.g. start and end dates.
A holiday profile can be applied to a time profile, and overrides it (prevents it from functioning) if
the time profile occurs on any of the dates defined in the holiday profile.
To display holiday profile information:
1. Select the Holiday Profile module.
2. Select a holiday profile in the List View.
3. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the holiday profile — e.g. Standard, Personal.
Description
A description of the holiday profile, specified by data entry.
This holiday
profile is
available
to other
Organisations
Tick the check box if this is a public holiday profile, i.e. if it is
available to other organisational units.
4. Each holiday profile contains one or more holiday periods. For each holiday period,
specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the holiday period, specified by data entry, e.g. Easter,
Christmas, etc.
Start Date
The start date of the holiday period, specified by data entry or dropdown calendar.
Start Time [15]
The start time of the holiday period, specified by data entry or by
increments.
[15]
PAC 512 systems only
Page 85
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
End Date
The end date of the holiday period, specified by data entry or dropdown calendar.
End Time [15]
The end time of the holiday period, specified by data entry or by
increments.
To create a holiday period:
1. Select Add Holiday and specify the holiday period name and dates as described in the
above table. The holiday period must be in the future, not the current date.
To delete a holiday period:
1. Select a holiday period from the Holiday Period Name list.
2. Choose the Delete Holiday button.
To advance the holiday profile 1 year:
1. Choose the Add +1 Year button and all the holiday periods are advanced 1 year.
2. Edit any dates that have changed from the previous year — e.g. Easter.
The other buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete holiday profiles:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Holiday Profile.
14.3 Add / Update / Delete a Holiday Profile
First select the Holiday Profile module.
To add a holiday profile:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Add.
To update a holiday profile:
1. Select a holiday profile.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a holiday profile:
1. Select a holiday profile.
2. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the holiday profile.
Page 86
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
15. Areas
15.1 Area List View
The Area List View and Property Page are only displayed in Access by Areas mode — see
Access Types.
The Area List View displays a list of areas. An area is defined by the doors that allow entry into
it and exit out of it.
To move an area to a different part of the tree:
1. Ensure View › Tree View is selected.
2. Drag and drop the area in to the new position.
See List View.
15.2 Area Property Page
The Area Property Page is used to define or edit Areas.
The Area Property Page may contain the following tabs:
Details
Appearance
Alarm Management
Alarm Definitions
Alarm Points
Outputs
Area Management
Security Level
15.2.1 Area Details
The Details tab is displayed by default.
To display Area information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select a Area in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Page 87
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Name
The name of the Area, specified by data entry, e.g. Reception,
Development, etc.
Important
Area names that contain only numbers are not recommended.
Description
A description of the Area, specified by data entry.
Parent Area
The parent Area this Area belongs to in the hierarchical list of Areas,
selected from drop-down list.
This area
can be used
in personal
access in other
Organisations
An indication of whether keyholders from other organisational units
can access the area, specified by checkbox.
[16]
Door Access
A list of associated doors, specified in the Door module — see Door
Access. A list of associated readers can be displayed by clicking on
the icon next to a door.
Comms Failure
Mode
The lock action in the area if the communications should fail. The
options are fail safe, fail secure or fail full secure, selected by option
button.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Areas:
1. See Add / Delete / Update a Area.
15.2.2 Area Appearance
To display appearance information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Appearance tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Area Icons
Small and large icons to be used in the area, selected using the
Browse buttons to locate a graphic file. Default icons can be used
by selecting the Use default icons check box.
Area Colour
The colour to be used on the alarm display board to identify which
area an alarm is associated with — selected using the Choose
button.
[16]
Page 88
Only if licensed for multiple organisational units.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Areas:
1. See Add / Delete / Update a Area.
15.2.3 Area Alarm Management
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a PAC 500 channel — see Channel
Areas, or a 1100/2100/2200 controller — see Controller Alarm Management.
To display alarm management information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Arm Area Time
Profile
The time profile used to arm and disarm the area, selected from a
drop-down list.
Alarm Priority
(1 to 99)
The priority assigned to alarm, specified by data entry or increments.
1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority.
Sounder resets
when area
acknowledged
If the check box is selected, the sounder for this area is reset when
the area alarm is acknowledged.
Sounder resets
when area
reset
If the check box is selected, the sounder for this area is reset when
the area alarm is reset.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Areas:
1. See Add / Delete / Update a Area.
15.2.4 Area Alarm Definitions
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a PAC 500 channel — see Channel
Areas, or a 1100/2100/2200 controller — see Controller Alarm Management.
To display alarm definition information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
Page 89
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Select the Alarm Definitions tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Event
Description
A list of event descriptions associated with each alarm.
Always an
Alarm
An indication of whether the event is always an alarm, specified by
option button.
Only when
Armed
An indication of whether the event is only an alarm when the area is
armed, specified by option button.
To select all Always An Alarm option buttons:
1. Choose the Always On button.
To select all Only When Armed option buttons:
1. Choose the When Armed button.
The other buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Areas:
1. See Add / Delete / Update a Area.
15.2.5 Area Alarm Points
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a PAC 500 channel — see Channel
Areas, or a 1100/2100/2200 controller — see Controller Alarm Management.
To display alarm points information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Alarm Points tab.
Page 90
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
4. View the following options:
Alarm Points
A name and description of alarm points assigned to the area
(automatically entered).
To assign alarm points to an area:
1. See the following sections:
Door Alarm Management
Channel Alarm Management
Controller Alarm Management
Controller Inputs
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Areas:
1. See Add / Delete / Update a Area.
15.2.6 Area Outputs
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a PAC 500 channel — see Channel
Areas.
To display outputs information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select the Outputs tab.
4. View the following options:
Area Sounders
The names and description of outputs that activate sounders
assigned to the area, automatically entered.
Alarm Sensors
Resets
The names and description of outputs that reset inputs assigned to
the area, automatically entered.
To assign outputs to an area:
1. See Controller Outputs.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Areas:
1. See Add / Delete / Update a Area.
Page 91
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
15.2.7 Area Management
This tab is only displayed if the area has been assigned to a PAC 500 channel — see Channel
Areas.
To specify anti-passback parameters:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
3. Select an Area Management tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Timed Forgive
(mins)
The timeout period when anti-passback violations are cancelled,
specified by checkbox and data entry or by increments.
Disallow antipassback
forgive
An indication of whether an operator cannot override an
anti-passback violation in the area, specified by check box.
Tailgate reset
An indication of whether an anti-passback violation in an area is
reset by presentation of the key into a different area, providing the
key is valid for that area and is not within the violated area, specified
by check box.
Note
You must specify an anti-passback area mode profile in the Alarm Management tab.
To specify the area as an airlock:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
Page 92
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Select an Area Management tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Door
The doors that determine the airlock (at least two must be selected
by checkbox)
No Entry
The output that is activated if entry through the door is prohibited,
selected from a drop-down list.
Normal
The output that is activated while in normal condition, i.e. both doors
locked and no key being presented, selected from a drop-down list.
Enter
The output that is activated if entry through the door is allowed,
selected from a drop-down list.
Notes
You must specify an airlock area mode profile in the Alarm Management tab.
The outputs should be latched outputs with no maximum activation time or event-to
action to turn them off. To specify outputs, see Controller Outputs.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Areas:
1. See Add / Delete / Update a Area.
15.2.8 Area Security Level
This tab is only displayed in Access by Areas and Security Level mode — see Access Types.
To display access information:
1. Select the Area module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
Page 93
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Select the Security Level tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Default
Security Level
The security level required to access the area outside the time
profile, specified by data entry or by increments.
Timed Security
Level
The security level required to access the area during the time profile,
specified by data entry or by increments.
Time Profile
The time profile allocated to the area, selected from a drop-down list.
Note
A security level of 0 prevents access to the area at any time by any key.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / edit / delete Areas:
1. See Add / Delete / Update a Area.
15.2.9 Add / Delete / Update a Area
First select the Area module.
To add a Area:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Add.
To update a Area:
1. Select a Area.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a Area:
1. Select a Area.
2. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the Area.
Page 94
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
16. Access Groups
16.1 Access Group List View
The Access Group List View and Property Page are only displayed in Access by Access
Groups mode — see Access Types.
The Access Group List View displays a list of access groups. An access group is a group of
Areas which may have a specific time profile associated with it.
You can apply an access group to a keyholder (see Keyholder Access Groups) to restrict the
movement of the keyholder to the areas contained in the access group at the times specified by
the associated time profiles — see Keyholder Personal Access.
See List View.
16.2 Access Group Property Page
The Access Group Property Page is used to define access groups, e.g. the Areas associated
with each access group.
Note
The number of access groups that you can define depends on the software license and
the hardware connected.
This Property Page may contain the following tabs:
Details
Access
Advanced
16.2.1 Access Group Details
The Details tab is displayed by default.
To display access group details:
1. Select the Access Group module.
2. Select an access group in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the access group, e.g. Development Team, Night
Guard, Visitor, etc.
Description
A description of the access group, specified by data entry.
Page 95
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
This access
group is
available
to other
Organisations
An indication of whether keyholders from other organisational units
can use the access group, specified by checkbox.
[17]
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete access groups:
1. See Add / Update / Delete an Access Group.
16.2.2 Access Group Information
To display access group information:
1. Select the Access Group module.
2. Select an access group in the List View.
3. Select the Access tab.
4. Do one of the following:
i.
Select the Active check box, or:
ii.
If access group time profiles are licensed, select a Profile check box.
5. If access group time profiles are licensed, open the Time Profile drop-down list and
select a time profile.
6. Specify the areas associated with the access group by selecting / deselecting the area
check boxes.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete access groups:
1. See Add / Update / Delete an Access Group.
16.2.3 Access Group Advanced
To display advanced information:
1. Select the Access Group module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
[17]
Page 96
Only if licensed for multiple organisational units.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Select the Advanced tab.
4. Specify the options you require:
Ignore bolted
doors
If this check box is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door, any locked/bolted door conditions are ignored.
Ignore antipassback
If this check box is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door, any anti-passback conditions are ignored.
Ignore dead
bolted doors
If this check box is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door, any deadbolt override/door bolted conditions
are ignored.
Ignore “Two
Key Access”
mode
If this check box is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door, any two key access requirements are ignored.
Disarm
privilege
If this check box is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door, the area is disarmed.
Ignore airlocks
If this check box is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door, any airlocks are ignored.
5. If access is not controlled by airlock, anti-passback, area usage limits, or two-key
access, specify the following options as required:
Allow passage
mode
If this check box is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group presents the key twice within the Lock Release Time (LRT),
the door is unlocked and remains unlocked until the key is presented
twice again. This time must be >3s.
Important
Passage mode can only be cancelled by presenting the key twice, therefore a door
opened using the passage mode facility is not closed by a Time or Mode profile’s end
time.
Allow first
token unlock
If this check box is selected, when a keyholder with this access
group opens a door, the door remains unlocked.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete access groups:
1. See Add / Update / Delete an Access Group.
16.2.4 Add / Update / Delete an Access Group
The appropriate areas and time profiles must be created first.
First select the Access Group module.
To add an access group:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
Page 97
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Add.
To update an access group:
1. Select an access group.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete an access group:
1. Select an access group.
2. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the access group.
Page 98
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
17. Hardware
17.1 Hardware List View
The Hardware List View displays a list of channels and controllers. The Connected Controllers
list can be expanded to display connected controllers, doors and lifts. The configuration can
be set up before the actual hardware is in place. PAC 500 series controller connections can be
“probed” to locate the physically-connected controllers.
See More Information on Logical and Physical Controllers.
An example of how controllers can be physically connected is given in Hardware Configuration
using PAC 500 Channel.
As well as a tree view of channels and controllers, you can display the following controller
information using the normal list view facilities to manipulate the columns — see List View.
Name
The name of the controller.
Description
The description of the controller.
Type
The type of controller, e.g. PAC 512.
Doors
The number of doors allowed for this type of controller.
Base Door
The number of the first door on the controller based on its order on the
channel.
Loaded
An indication that the controller has a valid database.
Online
An indication of whether controller is online (True) or offline (False).
Comms OK
An indication that the PC is communicating with the controller (True) or not
(False).
Loading
An indication that the controller is being loaded with the database.
Firmware
Version
The current firmware in the controller.
Serial Number
The serial number of the controller.
In addition to the normal list view facilities (see List View), the following facilities are also
available:
To contract an expanded tree view:
1.
Click on the
icon.
To copy or delete a channel:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view and select Copy or Delete.
To probe / configure / unconfigure controllers:
1. See Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller.
To access PAC 500 TCP/IP channel facilities:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.
Page 99
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Do one of the following:
Choose Reset Password to reset the server password. You must also reset the
password at the PAC 500 — see Manage Controller Firmware.
Choose Download channel database to download the channel database to all
controllers on the channel.
Choose Synchronise all controller clocks to synchronise all controller clocks on the
channel.
Choose Firmware Download to manage controller firmware.
To access direct channel facilities:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.
2. Do one of the following:
Choose Initialise CNC to initialise the CNC (1100/2100/2200 CNC channel only).
Choose Download channel database to download the channel database to all
controllers on the channel.
Choose Abort channel download to abort a channel download ( 1100/2100/2200
channel only).
Choose Synchronise all controller clocks to synchronise all controller clocks.
Choose Disconnect the channel to disconnect the channel.
To access dialup channel facilities:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.
2. Do one of the following:
Choose Dial Now, Show Call Progress or Hang Up to display the Dialup Connection
window.
Choose Reset Password to reset the password. You must also reset the password at
the controller — see Modems.
Choose Download channel database to download the channel database to all
controllers on the channel.
Choose Synchronise all controller clocks to synchronise all controller clocks.
To access offline channel facilities:
1. Right click the channel in the tree view.
2. Do one of the following:
Choose Reset Password to reset the password. You must also reset the password at
the controller — see Reset Password.
Choose Download to PC or Download to PDA to download the channel database to a
PC or PDA — see Download Database to the Controllers using the PC and Download
Database to the Controllers using the PDA.
See also List View.
17.1.1 More Information on Logical and Physical Controllers
The concept of logical and physical controllers helps to ease the configuration and installation of
a PAC SecureNet system.
A logical controller enables the configuration of a PAC SecureNet system without the need
for any physical hardware and enables the areas, access groups, etc. to be configured offsite
without having hardware present.
Page 100
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
A physical controller handles the physical connection between the communications engine
and the controller hardware and these are created during the probe from the Hardware
module. Once the physical controllers have been located, you can drop the logical controller
configurations onto the physical controllers to link the required configuration to the physical
controller. Likewise, should a physical controller need replacing due a hardware failure, you can
simply move the configuration to the new controller.
To probe a controller when more than one channel is defined:
1. Request the probe. The Select Channels window is displayed.
2. Select the channels to be probed. All channels can be selected using the Select All
button. All channels can be deselected by choosing the Clear All button.
3. Choose the OK button to start the probe or the Cancel window to cancel the request.
17.2 Channel Property Page
The Channel Property Page is used to define the channels.
This Property Page may contain the following tabs:
Details
Areas
PAC 500
Alarm Management
Settings
Dialup
Dialback
Layout
17.2.1 Channel Details
The Details tab is displayed on initial selection.
To display channel details information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a channel in the List View.
Page 101
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the channel, specified by data entry.
Channel Type
The type of channel, selected from drop-down list — see Channel
and Protocol Types.
Protocol Type
The type of protocol, selected from drop-down list — see Channel
and Protocol Types.
Computer
Name
The name of the computer in a multi-PC system, selected from dropdown list.
Communications The number of the communications port on the PC, selected from
Port [18]
drop-down list.
Note
If a communications port is configured for a modem, it is not displayed for selection
even if the modem is not connected.
PAC 500 URL
[19]
The Universal Resource Locator (i.e. http://address) of the server,
specified by data entry or by using the PAC 500 Probe button.
IP Address [20]
The IP address of the PAC 512 IP or 2200IP connected to a
Ethernet, specified by data entry or by choosing the IP Address
Probe button. It is recommended to use a static IP address specified
as described in Configure Device IP Addresses.
Online
The channel can be taken online / offline, specified by check box.
To perform channel tasks:
1. Select Tasks.
2. Choose one of the following commands:
Page 102
Reset
Password [21]
Resets the PAC 500 or offline channel password — see Reset
Password.
Dial Now, Show
Call Progress
or Hang Up [22]
Displays the Dialup Connection window to dialup a modem — see
Modems.
Download
channel
database
Downloads to the selected channel.
[18]
Direct channel only
[19]
PAC 500 TCP/IP channel only
[20]
Direct TCP/IP channel only
[21]
PAC 500 or offline channel only
[22]
Dialup channel only
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Abort
download [23]
Aborts the download. Only applicable during a download.
Synchronise
controller time
Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.
Firmware
download [24]
Downloads the added firmware to the selected server — see
Manage Controller Firmware.
Important
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete channels:
1. See Add / Update / Delete Channels.
17.2.2 Channel Areas
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a PAC 500 TCP/IP channel.
To display areas information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a PAC 500 TCP/IP channel in the List View.
3. Select the Areas tab.
4. Specify the following as required:
Areas
A list of areas that can be assigned to the PAC 500, selected by
check boxes.
Note
The default area (i.e. Outside) cannot be assigned to a PAC 500.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete channels:
1. See Add / Update / Delete Channels.
17.2.3 Channel PAC 500
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a PAC 500 TCP/IP channel.
To display PAC 500 information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a PAC 500 TCP/IP channel in the List View.
[23]
1100/2100/2200 only
[24]
PAC 500 channel only
Page 103
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Select the PAC 500 tab.
4. View the following — the information is displayed but can not be modified:
Loaded
An indication that the server has a valid database.
Loading
An indication that the server is being downloaded.
Board Identity
The name allocated to the printed circuit board.
Board Version
The version number of the printed circuit board.
Firmware Type
The type of firmware in the server. Different types may provide
different features.
Firmware
Version
The version firmware that has been added.
Board Support
Package
Version
The version of Microsoft Windows CE used on the PAC 500.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To suppress / unsuppress asynchronous events:
1. Select / deselect the Suppress async events check box.
To use unencrypted / encrypted communications:
1. Select / deselect the Use unencrypted communications check box.
To add / update / delete channels:
1. See Add / Update / Delete Channels.
To specify the override as a 2-state or 4-state input:
1. Select the Override is 2-state or Override is 4-state option button.
17.2.4 Channel Alarm Management
To display alarm management information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a channel in the List View.
Page 104
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Alarm Area
The alarm area that should be armed if the server is to be armed,
specified by drop-down list.
If none is specified, the server cannot be armed.
Omit Permitted
An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this channel
to be omitted from arming, specified by check box.
Silent Alarm
An indication of whether the alarms associated with this channel are
silent, specified by check box.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete channels:
1. See Add / Update / Delete Channels.
17.2.5 Channel Settings
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a direct channel.
To display settings information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a channel in the List View.
3. Select the Settings tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Line Speed [25]
The baud rate of the channel, selected from drop-down list.
5. View the following options — these options are displayed but cannot be modified:
Timeout
The time in milliseconds before a communication attempt is
cancelled because communication has not been established.
Retry Count
The number of communication attempts to try before abandoning the
communication.
[25]
Direct and Dialup channels only
Page 105
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Poll Interval
The time in milliseconds between polling for communications on the
line.
Polls in Slow
Poll
The number of polls in the poll interval after a communications
failure.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete channels:
1. See Add / Update / Delete Channels.
17.2.6 Channel Dialup
This tab is only displayed if the selected channel is a dialup channel.
To display dialup information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a dialup channel in the List View.
3. Select the Dialup tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Phone Number
The telephone number of the modem connected to the server/
controller, specified by data entry.
Connect
Timeout (mins)
The timeout in minutes to terminate the connection if there are no
updates to the controller.
Dialup
Schedule
If the check box is selected, you can specify the next dialup and
dialup interval.
Next schedule
dialup at
The date and time for the next dialup, specified by data entry or
drop-down calendar and time. If the date specified is in the past, a
dialup is performed when Update is selected and the next dialup
calculated from the dialup interval.
Dialup interval
The time between successive dialups.
Use any
available
modem
You can use any available modem connected to the PC by selecting
the option.
Use the
following
modems
A list of modems connected to the PC. Modems to use can be
specified by selecting the option button and then the modem check
box(es) from the list.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete channels:
1. See Add / Update / Delete Channels.
Page 106
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
17.2.7 Channel Dialback
Notes
•
This tab is not displayed on an Easikey 1000N channel.
•
Dialback is only applicable to the controller the modem is connected to.
•
For a 1100/2100/2200 dialup channel, you must configure a master controller
before this tab is displayed.
To display dialback information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a dialup channel in the List View.
3. Select the Dialback tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Enable
Dialback
Dialback is enabled by selecting the option button. If enabled, a
dialback is initiated by events at the server/controller.
Primary Modem
The name of the primary modem connected to the PC, selected from
a drop-down list. The modem must be configured — see Modems.
Secondary
Modem
The name of the secondary modem connected to the PC. The
secondary modem is used if the primary modem is unavailable,
selected from a drop-down list. The modem must be configured, see
Modems.
Threshold
(percent)
The percentage events in the event buffer required to initiate a
dialback to the PC, specified by data entry or by increments.
PC Site
Number [26]
The PC site number (range 2 to 128) that is unique on each PC and
identifies the channel’s site, selected from a drop-down list. Sites 2
to 33 can support up to 8 controllers (1 master and 7 slaves). Sites
34 to 128 support 1 controller (each one a master).
Note
Site 1 is reserved for direct six wire bus channels.
Dialback
Events
[26]
A list of events that initiate a dialback, selected by check boxes.
1100/2100/2200 only.
Page 107
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Keep Line Alive
[27]
If using a GSM modem on the controller with a “Pay as You Go” SIM
card that requires at least one outward call in a specified interval
(e.g. every 180 days), the line can be kept alive by specifying a
periodic dialback.
Notes
The system makes a call between 00:00 and 00:10 hours on the appropriate day and
the call must be answered and kept connected for at least 1 minute.
Periodically check your credit by phoning the customer services department of your
service provider and top up if necessary.
Phone Number
If this option button is selected, the phone number for periodic
dialback is specified by data entry.
If your service provider allows, it is recommended to dial the
speaking clock (123); the call automatically disconnects after 1
minute. If not dialling the speaking clock, ensure that each channel
dials back on a different day or to a different number.
Dialback to PC
If this option button is selected, periodic dialback is to a modem
connected to the administration PC.
Interval (in
days)
The interval for periodic dialback specified by data entry or
increments. Consult your service provider to determine the call
frequency required. Always ensure a call is made a few days before
the expiry time to allow for service failures.
Important
A firmware download resets the keep line alive interval counter to 0.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete channels:
1. See Add / Update / Delete Channels.
17.2.8 Channel Layout
To display layout information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a channel in the List View.
3. Select the Layout tab.
The layout displays a list of controllers associated with the channel.
[27]
Page 108
PAC 512 only.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To display a list of controllers associated with a server:
1. Click on the
icon next to the server.
To display a list of doors associated with an access controller:
1. Click on the
icon next to the access controller.
To display a list of readers associated with a door:
1. Click on the
icon next to the door.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete channels:
1. See Add / Update / Delete Channels.
17.2.9 Add / Update / Delete Channels
To add, update or delete channels, you must first select the Hardware module.
To add a channel:
1. Choose New and Create New Channel or Create New PAC 500.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information — select a property page field
and press F1 to obtain help.
3. Choose Add.
4. Wait for the communications to be established before probing for controllers.
To update an channel:
1. Select a channel.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete an channel:
1. Select an channel.
2. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the channel.
17.3 Controller Property Page
The Controller Property Page is used to define controllers, e.g. controller type and address.
This Property Page may contain the following tabs:
Details
Controller
1100 / 2100 / 2200
Doors
Inputs
Outputs
Alarm Management
If a probed but unconfigured controller is selected, this Property Page contains
unconfigured controller options.
Page 109
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
17.3.1 Controller Details
The controller details are displayed on initial selection.
To display details information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the controller.
Description
A description of the controller.
4-State
Override
An indication of whether 4-state monitoring of the controller override
is used, specified by checkbox.
Type
The type of controller, selected from a drop-down list.
Channel [28]
The channel associated with the controller (automatically entered).
PAC 500 [29]
The PAC 500 associated with the controller, selected from a dropdown list. Select None if the controller is not on a PAC 500 channel.
Lock Sharing
(n and m) [30]
An indication of whether the lock is controlled by an in and out
reader on door channels n and m, specified by check box. This
should only be used with 1100/2100 Series Door Controllers or
Wiegand in and out readers.
Online [31]
The controller can be taken online/offline, specified by check box.
To enable support for legacy controllers in this Organisational Unit — only available if
licensed:
1. Click on the Click here to enable 2100/2200 series support for this Organisation
link.
The Organisation Options window is displayed. See Organisational Unit Details.
To perform controller tasks:
1. Click on the Tasks button.
The following options are available for an online controller:
Page 110
[28]
Only if the controller has been assigned to a channel.
[29]
Only if the controller has not been assigned to a channel
[30]
Not input/output controllers
[31]
Only for connected controllers
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Configure
controller /
Unconfigure
controller
Displays the Configure Controller or Unconfigure Controller window.
Download
controller data
Downloads to the selected controller.
Abort
download [32]
Aborts the download. Only applicable during a download.
Synchronise
controller time
Synchronises the time on all controllers with the PC.
Set Modem
Initialization
String
Displays the Modem Initialization String window.
Firmware
download
Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller — see
Manage Controller Firmware.
Important
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
Reset
diagnostic
code
Resets the diagnostic code.
The following options are available for an offline controller:
Identify
Controller
Displays status information for the controller currently connected.
Connect to
Controller
Connects the controller to the PC — this option is grayed out until
the Identify Controller steps have been completed.
Whilst connected a further set of options becomes available under the tasks menu:
Download
controller
database
Downloads the database to the selected controller.
Firmware
download
Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller — see
Manage Controller Firmware.
Important
Only download firmware to one controller at a time.
Reset
diagnostic
code
Resets the diagnostic code.
Disconnect
from Controller
Disconnects the controller from the PC.
The other buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete controllers:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Controller.
To probe / configure / unconfigure controllers:
1. See Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller.
[32]
1100/2100/2200 only
Page 111
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
17.3.2 Controller PAC 202/512
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller has been probed.
To display controller information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. Select the Controller tab.
4. View the following information — the information is displayed but can not be modified:
Serial Number
The serial number of the controller.
Firmware ID
The firmware identity of the controller.
Firmware
Version
The current firmware in the controller.
Firmware Type
The type of firmware in the controller. Different types may provide
different features.
Board Revision
The revision number of the printed circuit board of the controller.
Power Status
The status of the controller’s power supply.
Battery Status
The status of the controller’s battery.
Backup Battery
Status
The status of the controller’s backup battery.
Battery Level
The charge on the controller’s battery.
Diagnostic
Code
The diagnostic code of the controller.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete controllers:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Controller.
To probe / configure / unconfigure controllers:
1. See Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller.
17.3.3 Controller 2100/2200
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller is a 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controller.
Note
You can only create a 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controller in a legacy Org Unit.
To display 1100/2100/2200 information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a 1100/2100/2200 controller in the List View.
Page 112
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Select the 2100/2200 tab.
4. Specify the following as required:
Master [33]
An indication of whether the door controller is a master controller,
specified by option button.
Slave [33]
An indication of whether the door controller is a slave controller,
specified by option button.
Slave Address
The address of the slave controller is selected by data entry or
increment.
For 1100/2100/2200 — RS232 — SWB protocol, the address of the
master controller is always 1 and is automatically allocated if the
Master radio switch is selected. The slave address range is 2 to 8.
For 1100/2100/2200 — RS232 — SWB — CNC protocol, the CNC is
the master controller. The slave address range is 1 to 32.
Master
Override Input
An indication of whether a override condition on the master (e.g.
fire alarm) unlocks all the doors on the slave controller, specified by
check box.
This option is only available for 2200 master and slave controllers.
When it is selected, an override condition on the master controller
causes the doors on the master and all configured slave controllers
to unlock. The slave controllers must also have this option selected.
[34]
Important
This feature is not suitable for safety critical systems which should use a hard wiring
solution by daisy chaining the controller override inputs together.
Anti-passback
m and n
An indication of whether anti-passback is enabled on the door
channels m and n, specified by check box.
Also apply to
exit
An indication of whether the anti-passback also applies to the Exit
readers of the door channels, specified by check box.
Anti-passback
timeout
The timeout period (in minutes) when an anti-passback violation is
cancelled, specified by data entry or by increments.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete controllers:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Controller.
To configure / unconfigure controllers:
1. See Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller.
[33]
1100/2100/2200 — RS232 — SWB protocol only
[34]
2200s only
Page 113
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
17.3.4 Controller Doors
This tab is only displayed if the selected controller is an access or door controller.
To display doors information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. Select the Doors tab.
The Doors tab displays a list of doors associated with the controller.
To display a list of readers associated with a door:
1. Click on the
sign next to the door.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete controllers:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Controller.
To probe / configure / unconfigure controllers:
1. See Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller.
17.3.5 Controller Inputs
To display input configuration information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. Select the Inputs tab.
4. If necessary, select the Input Configuration tab.
5. Specify the following options as required:
Page 114
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
List
A list of inputs associated with the controller (automatically entered).
You can define an input by selecting a check box or check boxes.
If a 1100/2100/2200 controller is selected, the list is a tree view that
you can expand to list the inputs on any Alarm Event Managers
connected to the controller.
Name of Input
n
The name of the selected input, specified by data entry.
Description
The description of the selected input, specified by data entry.
Input Type [35]
The type of the selected input, specified by drop-down list. See Input
Types.
Note
AEM input types must be set using the switch bank and jumper on the AEM.
Disarm Time
Profile [36]
The time profile that disarms the input, specified by drop-down list.
If specified, no alarms or events are generated during the time
profile.
Input Mode
The mode of the selected input, specified by drop-down list. See
Input Modes.
Pulse Count [35]
The number of triggers that need to occur before an alarm is
generated for the selected input, specified by data entry or
increments.
Pulse Count
Time [35]
The time in seconds that the pulse count operates for the selected
input, specified by drop-down list.
Count is reset when time expires and starts from last activation.
Debounce Time
The time in milliseconds that the selected input must be in a state
before that state is registered, specified by drop-down list.
Debounce time is important for proper use of pressure switches,
strain gauges and other sensors that are “bouncy”. Debouncing is
also important for resistance to AC induction on long cable runs. See
Debounce Time Examples.
[35]
Important
Do not set a time that overrides the pulse count.
Note
When specifying a debounce time, the input signal must be in a stable state for at least
200mS after the end of the debounce time before it is recognised.
Configured
from Template
A template of input conditions to aid specification, selected for a
drop-down list. The template specifies the input configuration and
alarm properties. See Input Templates.
To display alarm properties information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Inputs tab.
[35]
PAC 500 Series Controller only
[36]
1100/2100/2200 only
Page 115
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
4. Select the Alarm Properties tab.
5. Specify the following options as required:
List
A list of inputs associated with the controller (automatically entered).
A single input or several inputs can be specified by selected a check
box or check boxes.
Alarm Area
The alarm area that should be armed if the controller is to be armed,
specified by drop-down list.
If none is specified, the controller cannot be armed.
Omit permitted
An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this input
can be omitted from arming, specified by check box.
Silent Alarm
An indication of whether the alarms associated with this input are
silent, specified by check box.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete controllers:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Controller.
To probe / configure / unconfigure controllers:
1. See Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller.
Page 116
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
17.3.5.1 Input Types
Type
State
PAC 512 Event
1100/2100/2200 Series Event
NO
Open
input normal
sensor open
Closed
input active
sensor closed
Open
input active
sensor open
Closed
input normal
sensor closed
Open
input normal
N/A
Closed
input active
N/A
Cut
input open tamper
N/A
Open
input active
N/A
Closed
input normal
N/A
Short
input short tamper
N/A
Open
input normal
sensor open
Closed
input active
sensor closed
Cut
input open tamper
circuit cut
Short
input short tamper
circuit shorted
Closed
input normal
sensor closed
Open
input active
sensor open
Cut
input open tamper
circuit cut
Short
input short tamper
circuit shorted
NC
3 State NO
3 State NC
4 State NO
4 State NC
17.3.5.2 Input Modes
24-Hour Alarm
If the input enters an active or tamper alarm state, an alarm message is
displayed in the Alarm Viewer and Event Log. Input inactive events only
appear in the Event Log.
24-Hour
Information
If the input enters a tamper alarm state, an alarm message is displayed
in the Alarm Viewer and Event Log. Input active events and input inactive
events only appear in the Event Log.
Controlled
Alarm
If the input enters an active or tamper alarm state, an alarm message is
displayed in the Alarm Viewer only if the area is armed. Note that input
tamper alarm messages also displayed in the Alarm Viewer when the area is
not armed.
Lift
An input that allows a lift button selection to be monitored.
17.3.5.3 Debounce Time Examples
Input Function
Debounce Time (mS)
Request-to-exit
200
Break-glass, DC Override, Alarm
Zone
500
Door Contact, Latch Contact
>1s
Page 117
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
17.3.5.4 Input Templates
Template
Input Type
Input Mode
Pulse Count
and Time
24-Hour
Visible Panic
4 State N0
24-Hour
Alarm
200ms
24-Hour
Invisible
Panic
4 State N0
24-Hour
Alarm
200ms
24-Hour
Burglary
4 State N0
24-Hour
Alarm
24-Hour
Information
4 State N0
24-Hour
Alarm
200ms
Silent alarm
Controlled
Interior
4 State N0
Controlled
Alarm
200ms
Omit permitted
Controlled
Exterior
4 State N0
Controlled
Alarm
200ms
Omit permitted
Lift
NO
Lift
3; 5s
3; 5s
Debounce
Time
Alarm Properties
Silent Alarm
200ms
200ms
17.3.6 Controller Outputs
To display output configuration information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.
4. If necessary, select the Output Configuration tab.
5. Specify the following options as required:
Page 118
List
A list of outputs associated with the controller (automatically
entered). You can specify an output by selecting a check box or
check boxes.
If a 1100/2100/2200 controller is selected, the list is a tree view
that you can expand to list the outputs on the controller and on any
Alarm Event Managers connected to the controller.
Name of Output
n
The name of the selected output, specified by data entry.
Description
The description of the selected output, specified by data entry.
Time Profile
The time profile to apply to the output, specified by drop-down list.
Output Type
The type of the selected output, specified by drop-down list. See
Output Types.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Momentary
Time [37]
The time that the selected output is on, specified by drop-down list.
Delay Before
Activation
(secs) [38]
The time delay before the output activates; 0 means no delay.
Selected by check box and specified by drop-down list if the Delay
Before Activation check box is selected.
Maximum
Activation Time
(min) [39]
The time in minutes before the selected output is automatically
turned off; 0 means no maximum activation time. Selected by check
box and specified by drop-down list if the Maximum Activation
Time check box is selected.
Cycle Time (s)
The total time in seconds for the pulse to cycle on/off, specified by
data entry or increments.
[40]
Active (%) [40]
The period of cycle the selected output is on as % of cycle time,
specified by data entry or increments.
Number of
Pulses [40]
The maximum number of pulses of the selected output, specified
by data entry or increments if the Number of Pulses check box is
selected.
Configured
from Template
A template of output conditions to aid specification, selected from a
drop-down list. The template specifies the output configuration. See
Output Templates.
To display output details information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.
5. Specify the following options as required:
Relay Rating
The relay rating on the relay on the selected controller, automatically
entered.
Assigned to
Area
The area associated with the output, selected from a drop-down list.
[37]
Momentary outputs only
[38]
1100/2100/2200 only
[39]
Latched outputs only
[40]
Pulsed outputs only
Page 119
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Area Sounders
If the option button is selected, the output activates a sounder for the
specified area.
Note
Area sounder should not be used with a toggle output as the output is automatically
reset when the alarm is acknowledged and / or restored — see Area Alarm
Management.
Alarm Sensors
Reset
If the option button is selected, the output resets an input that is in
alarm, i.e. an Area Reset command from the Alarm Viewer clears
the alarm condition.
Manual
If the option button is selected, the output is activated manually.
Note
The output cab be placed on an Alarm Map and then manually controlled from the
Alarm Viewer.
Local Area
Alarm
If the option button is selected, the output is activated if the area is
armed.
To specify output activation information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Outputs tab.
4. If necessary, select the Output Activation tab.
5. To add an output activation condition, choose the Add button.
6. Repeat 5 for each output activation condition required; e.g. if the output is to be
activated when an input active or door left open alarm is detected, two output activation
conditions must be specified.
7. Specify the following options for each output activation condition as required:
Name
The name of the output condition, specified by data entry.
When condition
The event that triggers the output activation, selected from a dropdown list.
Note
If PIN Reader Duress is selected, you must specify a maximum activation time for the
relay output to switch off the output.
The following events cannot trigger an output in PAC SecureNet: AEM tamper, Input
active, Manual input enable, Automatic input enable, Controller power on, Input open
tamper, Input short tamper.
Source Name
Page 120
The name of the item that may generate the event, selected from a
drop-down list.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
8. To delete an output activation condition, select an output activation condition and
choose the Delete button.
The other buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete controllers:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Controller.
To probe / configure / unconfigure controllers:
1. See Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller.
17.3.6.1 Output Types
Latched
The output stays on until turned off (e.g. by event to action) or the maximum
activation time expires.
Momentary
The output stays on until the momentary time expires.
Toggle
The output toggles its state each time it is activated — i.e. if the output is
on, the next activation switches it off; if the output is off, the next activation
switches off.
Pulsed
The output pulses until turned off (e.g. by event to action) or the number of
pulses expires.
17.3.6.2 Output Templates
Template
Output
Type
Internal
Sounder
Pulsed
Sensor Reset Momentary
Momentary
Time
Cycle Time
Active
2s
50%
3s
17.3.6.3 PIN Reader Duress
PIN Reader Duress allows a keyholder access if the PIN+1 is entered (e.g. 1235 is entered for
1234) but generates a silent alarm indicating that the keyholder is being threatened.
Note
The PIN+1 only affects only the last digit — e.g. the duress number for 6789 is 6780 not
6790.
Important
The duress facility is not implemented in PIN only mode.
17.3.7 Controller Alarm Management
To display alarm management information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
Page 121
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Select the Alarm Management tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Alarm Area
The alarm area that should be armed if the server is to be armed,
specified by drop-down list.
If none is specified, the server cannot be armed.
Omit Permitted
An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this
controller to be omitted from arming, specified by check box.
Silent Alarm
An indication of whether the alarms associated with this controller
are silent, specified by check box.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete controllers:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Controller.
To probe / configure / unconfigure controllers:
1. See Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller.
17.3.8 Add / Update / Delete a Controller
Select the Hardware module.
To add a controller:
1. Choose New › Create New Controller or press Alt-N-C.
2. Enter the controller details and select each tab in turn to check the other information —
select a property page field and press F1 to obtain help.
3. Choose Add.
4. Probe and configure the controller.
5. Download the database to the controller:
i.
Select the Details tab.
ii.
Choose the Tasks button.
iii. Select Download controller database.
To update a controller:
1. Select a controller.
2. Enter appropriate information — select a property page field and press F1 to obtain
help.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
4. Download the new database to the controller:
i.
Page 122
Select the Details tab.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
ii.
PAC SecureNet
Choose the Tasks button.
iii. Select Download controller database.
To delete a controller:
1. Select an controller.
2. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the controller.
Notes
Deleting a controller deletes its associated doors.
You can only create legacy controllers in a legacy Org Unit.
17.3.9 Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller
Select the Hardware module.
Note
Only PAC 512 / 202 controllers support probing.
To probe the controller configuration:
1. Ensure that the channels are correctly specified.
2. Click on the Probe Channels icon or choose Controller › Probe Channels. If there is
more than one channel, the Select Channels window is displayed. Select the channels
to be probed and choose the OK button.
The physical connections are probed and the software configured.
The controller barcode allocation table provided with the controller and in the Reports
tab should be used to aid configuration.
To configure a controller to a channel:
1. Drag and drop the selected controller on to one of the connected controllers indicated
by the serial number. Alternatively, right click a controller serial number, choose
Configure Controller from the shortcut menu, enter the controller name and choose
OK.
The Configure Controller window is displayed.
2. Select the option to download to the controller and choose OK. If this option is not
selected, you can perform a download later by selecting the controller and Tasks —
see Controller Details.
To unconfigure a controller from a channel:
1. Right click the channel serial number and choose Unconfigure Controller from the
shortcut menu.
17.3.10 Unconfigured Controller Tasks
To perform controller tasks on a configured controller, see Controller Details.
To perform controller tasks on a probed but unconfigured controller:
1. Select the Hardware module.
Page 123
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Select an unconfigured controller.
The Unconfigured Controller window is displayed.
3. View the following information — the information is displayed but cannot be modified:
Last Update
The date and time of the last update.
Serial Number
The serial number of the controller.
Firmware ID
The firmware identity of the controller.
Firmware
Version
The current firmware in the controller.
Firmware Type
The type of firmware in the controller. Different types may provide
different features.
Important
Only download firmware to one server or controller at a time.
Board Revision
The revision number of the printed circuit board of the controller.
Power Status
The status of the controller’s power supply.
Battery Status
The status of the controller’s battery.
Backup Battery
Status
The status of the controller’s backup battery.
Battery Level
The charge on the controller’s battery.
Diagnostic
Code
The diagnostic code of the controller.
4. Select Tasks.
5. Set the following options as required:
Configure
Controller
Displays the Configure Controller window that allows the controller
to be named.
Set Modem
Initialization
String
Displays the Modem Initialization String window.
Firmware
Download
Downloads the added firmware to the selected controller — see
Manage Controller Firmware.
The other buttons are described in Property Page.
Page 124
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
17.4 Offline Channel and Controller Tasks
When you have finished configuring an offline controller, you must download the database to
the controller.
To download a database to the controller from the PC:
1. See Download Database to the Controllers using the PC.
To download a database to the controller from a PDA:
1. See Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA.
To upload a database to the PC from a PDA:
1. See Upload Database from a PDA to a PC.
17.4.1 Download Database to the Controllers using the PC
Important
A connected controller is automatically disconnected if you perform an update or display
a different module. Therefore, after any updates, you must follow the procedure below
from 1, or 9 if the controller is already identified and configured.
To download a database to the controllers using the PC:
1. Physically connect an offline controller to the PC. (This controller is then the gateway
controller.)
2. Select the Hardware module in the Explorer bar.
3. Select the gateway controller.
4. Choose the Tasks button.
5. Choose the Identify Controller button.
The Identify/Configure Controller window is displayed.
6. Select the COM port the gateway controller is connected to and choose the Identify
button.
The window is populated with the controller details.
Page 125
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7. Choose the Configure button.
The Configure Controller window is displayed.
8. Choose OK to configure the controller or Cancel to return to the Identify/Configure
Controller window.
9. Choose the Tasks button, then choose the Connect to Controller command from the
drop-down menu.
The Connect Controller window is displayed.
10. Select the COM port the gateway controller is connected to.
11. Choose the Connect button and choose OK on the Successfully Connected to
controller window.
The Controller Synchronization Command window is displayed.
12. When the event collection process is 100% complete, choose OK and the controller is
available for download.
13. Choose the Tasks button, then choose the Download controller database command
from the drop-down menu.
14. When the download process is 100% complete, choose OK and you can physically
disconnect the controller from the PC.
The controller can be left connected and any events are displayed in the event log.
15. Choose the Tasks button, then choose the Disconnect from controller command
from the drop-down menu.
17.4.2 Download Database to the Controllers using the PDA
To download a database to the controllers using the PDA:
1. Physically connect the PDA to the PC via an RS-232 or UBS port (using the cable
provided with the PDA).
2. Select the Hardware module in the Explorer bar.
Page 126
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Choose Hardware › Download offline channels.
The Offline synchronization required window is displayed.
4. Select the channel to download to and select Next.
5. When the download process is 100% complete, choose OK and you can physically
disconnect the PDA.
6. Physically connect the PDA to an offline controller (this controller is then the gateway
controller) and use the PDA facilities to download the database to the controllers.
17.4.3 Upload Database from a PDA to a PC
To upload the database from a PDA to a PC:
1. Select the Hardware module in the Explorer bar.
2. Physically connect the PDA to the PC via an RS-232 or USB port (using the cable
provided with the PDA) and the upload starts automatically.
17.5 Lift Property Page
The Lift Property Page is used to define lift readers. A lift reader is a multi-access reader that
you can use to control access to one or more areas, e.g. floors or lockers. When used in a lift, a
valid key would allow access to specific floors by enabling appropriate lift buttons. Each floor of
the lift is configured as an area controlled by the same PAC 500 as the controller the lift reader
is connected to.
The Lift Property Page may contain the following tabs:
Details
Destinations
Access
17.5.1 Lift Details
The Details tab is displayed on initial selection.
To display details information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in the List View.
3. Select a lift reader.
Page 127
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
4. If necessary, select the Details tab.
5. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the lift, specified by data entry.
PAC 500
The PAC 500 controlling the lift, selected from a drop-down list.
Reader
The name of the lift reader, selected from a drop-down list. Lift
readers must be specified first — see Add / Update / Delete a Lift.
The reader activates the appropriate destinations outputs when a
keyholder presents a key to the reader. Normally the destination
outputs are connected to lift floor buttons that are enabled when a
valid key is presented to the reader located inside the lift.
Selection Time
The time (in seconds) a lift button remains selectable, selected by
data entry or increments.
Extra Selection
Time
The extra time (in seconds) a lift button remains selectable if the
keyholder requires extra door time, specified by data entry or by
increments. The Requires Extra Door Time check box must be
enabled for the keyholder — see Keyholder Details.
To add / update / delete a lift reader:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Lift.
17.5.2 Lift Destinations
To display configuration information:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in the List View.
3. Select a lift reader.
4. If necessary, select the Destinations tab.
5. Specify the following options as required:
Page 128
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Area
A list of areas (floors) each associated destination output (e.g.
connected to a lift button) gives access to (added using the Add
New button and selected from a drop-down list).
Output
A list of destination outputs used to activate each lift button, selected
from a drop-down list.
Input
A list of inputs (optional) that allows a lift button selection to be
monitored, selected from a drop-down list. This is necessary to use
the area usage facility.
Out of Hours
Exit
An indication of whether out of hours exit is allowed, selected by
check box.
To add an area (floor):
1. Choose the Add New button.
To add / update / delete a lift reader:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Lift.
17.5.3 Lift Access
This tab is accessed via the Door module. Door details, door configuration and
door alarm management for door channels that have lift readers are defined in the same way as
ordinary door channels.
To display access information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door channel that has lift readers in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Access tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Reader Type
The type of reader(s) connected to the lift, selected from a dropdown list.
SIG A / SIG B
You can use one of the door channels for door access. The lift
access specified on the Lift Destinations tab.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete a lift reader:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Lift.
Page 129
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
17.5.4 Add / Update / Delete a Lift
The appropriate PAC 500, controllers, areas (floors), time profiles, inputs and outputs must
be created first. All the controllers providing readers, outputs and inputs must be connected
to the same PAC 500. All the areas must be assigned to the same PAC 500 and cannot have
anti-passback or airlock properties. Inputs can be assigned for monitoring and/or area usage.
The readers, inputs and outputs associated with a lift are assigned by the lift reader
configuration.
To add a lift reader:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Choose New and Create New Lift.
3. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information — select a property page field
and press F1 to obtain help.
4. Choose Add.
To add lift inputs and outputs:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a controller in the List View.
3. Select the Inputs tab and specify each relevant input as a lift input, i.e. 2-state normally
open.
4. Select the Outputs tab and specify each relevant output as a lift output, i.e. Latched
with no maximum activation time.
5. Choose the Update button.
To update a lift reader:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door channel with a lift reader.
3. Select each tab in turn and enter/update appropriate information — select a property
page field and press F1 to obtain help.
4. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a lift reader:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Expand the Connected Controllers list in the List View.
3. Select a lift reader.
4. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
5. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the lift reader.
Page 130
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
18. Doors
18.1 Door List View
The Door List View displays a list of doors. A door is used to access an area and is configured
by defining the readers that allow / disallow access into that area, e.g. you can define a door by
an in and out reader.
See List View.
18.2 Door Property Page
The Door Property Page is used to define doors, e.g. lock behaviour and time profile.
This Property Page may contain the following tabs:
Details
Access
Configuration
Auxiliary IO
Alarm Management
Security Levels
18.2.1 Door Details
The Details tab is displayed on initial selection.
To display details information:
1. Select the Doors module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the door, specified by data entry.
Description
A description of the door, specified by data entry.
Door Profile
A Time or Mode profile that determines when the door is unlocked or
when the door is in particular mode, e.g. anti-passback in operation,
selected from a drop-down list.
Door Status [41]
The Use Count (the number of access granted events since a
Reset Use Count) and Door Mode (controlled by a Time or Mode
profile or Tasks button).
[41]
PAC 512 only
Page 131
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To perform door tasks:
1. Click on the Tasks button to display the pop-up menu.
2. Choose one of the following commands. For Offline channels, these commands are
only available when connected to the controller:
Secure Door
This locks the door if the door is unlocked, e.g. on a time profile.
Unlock Door
This unlocks the door indefinitely or for a specified time.
Bolt Door
This has different functions for door types; see Bolted Door for
further information.
Normal Door
Operation
This returns the door to normal operation, e.g. locked or unlocked on
a time profile.
Set Mode [42]
This applies a specified door mode profile.
Unlock Once
This unlocks the door for the lock release time.
[42]
Issue Request
to Exit
This unlocks the door for the lock release time.
Reset Use
Count [42]
This reset the use count to zero.
Notes
If you choose the Unlock Door command, the Unlock Door window is displayed.
To specify unlock door options, select Unlock door indefinitely, or select Length of
time to unlock door option button and specify the length of time (max. 255 minutes).
Then choose the OK button.
If you choose the Set Mode command, the Door Mode Settings window is displayed.
The Security Mode displays the current mode. You can alter it by selecting the
required Security Mode from a drop-down list and the length of time it will be applied.
For each direction, select the Access Mode and whether Two Card Access is
required. Then choose the OK button.
The other buttons are described in Property Page.
[42]
Page 132
PAC 512 only
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To add / update / delete doors:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Door.
Note
To add or delete doors, you must add or delete the appropriate controller — see
Controller Details.
18.2.2 Door Access
Two readers (in and out) can be attached to each door. Alternatively, one reader and one
Request to Exit switch can be used.
Important
•
If the controller controls a lift, see Lift Access.
•
If the controller controls a muster reader, see Muster and Evacuation.
Note
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers only allow one reader per door channel, and
all controllers only allow one Wiegand or Magstripe reader per door channel. Therefore,
if using 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, Wiegand readers or Magstripe
readers, lock sharing must be enabled for in and out readers — see Controller Details.
To display access information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. Select the Access tab.
The Access tab displays the door channel for the selected door. If a 1100/2100 door
with lock sharing is selected, the two door channels associated with the door are
displayed. The format of the display depends on the access type and reader type. If the
reader type is defined as Wiegand, only one Wiegand reader per door channel can be
defined.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Reader Type
The type of reader(s) connected to the door, selected from a dropdown list.
PIN Reader
Connected [43]
An indication of whether a PIN reader is connected to the door.
Area [44]
The area the reader gives access to, selected from a drop-down list.
[43]
1100/2100/2200 only
[44]
Access by Areas mode only
Page 133
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Profile
For PAC 512, the reader mode profile to apply to the reader,
selected from a drop-down list.
For 1100/2100/2200, the time profile to apply to a PIN reader,
selected from a drop-down list. If a time profile is selected, a PIN is
not required during the time period, only a valid token.
Important
Mode profiles do not apply to the legacy Stanley PIN Reader. The legacy Stanley
PIN Reader is the only reader that you can use with 1100/2100/2200 Series Door
Controllers.
Allow Access
[45]
An indication of whether access is allowed through this door to valid
keyholders, specified by option button.
No reader
connected
Indicates that a Request to Exit switch is connected to this SIG line,
specified by option button.
General access
reader [44]
Indicates that a general access reader is connected to this SIG line,
specified by option button.
Note
For 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers, if this option is selected then for antipassback purposes Door Channel 1 and Door Channel 2 are considered entry readers,
and Door Channel 3 and Door Channel 4 are considered exit readers. Anti-passback is
set in the controller properties.
Entry reader
[43] [44]
Indicates that an entry reader is connected to this SIG line, specified
by option button.
Notes
This reader will generate an Entry authorised event. Only one entry reader should be
configured on the door.
This option also defines this reader as an entry reader for anti-passback purposes. Antipassback is set in the controller properties.
Exit reader [43]
[44]
Indicates that an exit reader is connected to this SIG line, specified
by option button.
Notes
This reader will generate an Exit authorised event. Only one exit reader should be
configured on the door.
This option also defines this reader as an exit reader for anti-passback purposes. Antipassback is set in the controller properties.
Out of hours
access [46]
An indication of whether out of hours access is allowed, selected by
check box.
Tamper Mode
An indication of whether reader tamper is disabled or enabled on the
door channel, selected from a drop-down list.
[47]
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete doors:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Door.
Page 134
[45]
Access by Doors mode only
[46]
Exit reader only
[47]
PAC 512 only
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Note
To add or delete doors, you must add or delete the appropriate controller — see
Controller Details.
18.2.3 Door Configuration
To display configuration information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. Select the Configuration tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Controller
The name of the controller that the controls the door — automatically
entered, but can be changed via the Hardware module. See
Controller Details.
Lock Release
Time
The time (in seconds) allowed for the door to be unlocked after a
valid access, specified by data entry or by increments.
Extra Door
Time [48]
The extra time (in seconds) allowed if the keyholder requires
extra time to get through the door, specified by data entry or by
increments. The Requires Extra Door Time check box must be
enabled for the keyholder — see Keyholder Personal Details.
Enable Lock
Toggle [48]
An indication of whether the door remains unlocked after a valid key
has been presented, or Request to Exit pressed, and only locked
when the key is presented again, or Request to Exit pressed again,
selected by check box.
Anti-passback
timeout [49]
When this option is enabled, a user who commits an anti-passback
violation will be unable to go through this door until the timeout
period specified here (in minutes) has elapsed. Enabled by
checkbox and specified by data entry or by increments.
Note
If Timed Anti-passback is enabled, this timeout also specifies the duration of
anti-passback.
[48]
PAC 512 only
[49]
PAC 512 on direct channel only
Page 135
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Timed Antipassback [49]
If this check box is selected, a user who passes through this door
twice in the same direction within the time period specified in the
Anti-passback timeout will incur an anti-passback violation, but a
user who does so outside that time period will not.
Notes
Anti-passback is implemented on the Entry reader to an area for the duration of the
Anti-Passback Timeout. This allows anti-passback to be assigned to a door with only
one reader — e.g. a Request to Exit switch is used to exit the area.
If anti-passback is in operation on more than one door into an area and Anti-Passback
Timeout is set to different times on each door, the longest Anti-Passback Timeout
timeout period applies to all doors into the area.
4-State Input
Monitoring [48]
An indication of whether the end-of-line inputs are used, allowing 4state monitoring of RTE and door contact, selected by check box.
See 4-State Door Inputs.
Failsafe [50]
An indication of whether the lock is fail safe, selected by check box.
If the check box is not selected, the lock is fail secure.
Alarm inhibit
INHB/DR3 on the controller’s door channel is used to inhibit the
readers when the area is armed.
[51]
Mode
The type of door to reader connection, selected from a drop down
list. See Door Configuration Modes.
Door Contact
Mode / RTE
Mode
The type of Door Contact / Request to Exit connection, selected
from the Mode drop-down list. See Door Configuration Modes.
Door
Monitoring
If the check box is selected, door monitoring is enabled. Door
contacts must be fitted.
Door Open
Time
The time (in seconds) the door is unlocked after a valid key
has been presented to the reader, specified by data entry or by
increments. Door contacts must be fitted.
Logging Mode
The type of transactions that are logged in the event log, selected
from a drop-down list.
Key presentation: Access-authorised events logged when key
presented.
Door opened: Access-authorised events logged when door opened
after key presentation. If door not opened, user walked away event
is generated. A door contact must be fitted and door monitoring set.
[48]
Monitored Mag
Lock
If the check box is selected, Monitored Mag Lock is enabled.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete doors:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Door.
Note
To add or delete doors, you must add or delete the appropriate controller — see
Controller Details.
Page 136
[50]
1100/2100/2200 only
[51]
2200 only
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
18.2.3.1 4-State Door Inputs
Each door channel on the controller has Input (I/P), Request to Exit (RTE) and Door Contact
(DC) connections that can be used to supervise detectors. Four different input states can be
detected by fitting end-of-line resistors to the appropriate connector and 0V. These states are:
Input States
State
Description
Meaning
1
Switch open
Reader tamper alarm
2
Switch closed
Reader tamper alarm cleared
3
Short circuit
Reader tamper line short
4
Wire cut
Reader line cut
RTE States
State
Description
Meaning
1
Switch open
Normal, no message
2
Switch closed
Request to exit
3
Short circuit
RTE line short
4
Wire cut
RTE line cut
DC States
State
Description
Meaning
1
Switch open
When door is locked generates a door forced alarm
2
Switch closed
A door forced alarm has been generated then cleared
3
Short circuit
Door contact line short
4
Wire cut
Door contact line cut
Page 137
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
18.2.3.2 Door Configuration Modes
Field
Selection
Door Modes Normal
Meaning
Door contact, RTE mode.
RTE No Lock
Lock not operated, PIR sensor.
Emergency Override
Free exit, lock operated, Emergency override.
Emergency Override No Lock
Free exit, no lock operated, Emergency override.
Auxiliary
Not used
Input Modes
Reader tamper
(PAC 512
only)
Bolt door
I/P on controller’s door channel not used.
I/P on the controller’s door channel used for reader
tamper on Wiegand or Magstripe readers.
I/P on the controller’s door channel is used to bolt
the door when the input is active, i.e. access is
denied to all users except those with bolt door
privileges.
Note
A door that is usually open due to a time
profile is bolted.
Auxiliary
Output
Mode (PAC
512 only)
Emergency override
I/P on the controller’s door channel is used to
generate an emergency override and unlock the
door.
Latch contact
I/P on the controller’s door channel is used to
detect lock latching.
General input
I/P on the controller’s door channel is used for a
special-to-project purpose.
Not used
The alarm output relay on the controller is not
used.
Door left open alarm [52]
The output relay on the controller is activated if the
door has been left open.
Door forced alarm [52]
The output relay on the controller is activated if the
door has been forced open.
Door forced / left open alarm
The output relay on the controller is activated if the
door has been forced open or left open.
[52]
Alarm shunt
The output relay on the controller is activated for
the door release time if a valid access is detected.
Time Profile
The output relay on the controller is only used
during a specified time profile.
General Output
The alarm output relay on the controller is used for
a special-to-project purpose.
18.2.4 Door Auxiliary IO
This tab is not displayed for 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers. Auxiliary IO for
1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers is specified as described in Controller Outputs.
To display Auxiliary IO information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
[52]
Page 138
Door monitoring must be enabled.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Select the Auxiliary IO tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Auxiliary Input
Mode
The use of the auxiliary input, selected from a drop-down list. See
Door Configuration Modes.
Auxiliary
Output Mode
The use of the auxiliary output, selected from a drop-down list. See
Door Configuration Modes.
Time Profile
The use of the auxiliary output, selected from a drop-down list. See
Door Configuration Modes.
Output Type
The type of the selected output, specified by drop-down list. See
Door Configuration Modes.
Momentary
Time [53]
The time that the selected output is on, specified by drop-down list.
Maximum
Activation Time
(min) [54]
The time in minutes before the selected output is automatically
turned off; 0 means no maximum activation time. Selected by check
box and specified by drop-down list if the Maximum Activation
Time check box is selected.
Cycle Time (s)
The total time in seconds for the pulse to cycle on/off, specified by
data entry or increments.
[55]
Active (%) [55]
The period of cycle the selected output is on as % of cycle time,
specified by data entry or increments.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete doors:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Door.
Note
To add or delete doors, you must add or delete the appropriate controller — see
Controller Details.
18.2.5 Door Alarm Management
To display alarm management information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select an area in the List View.
[53]
Momentary outputs only
[54]
Latched outputs only
[55]
Pulsed outputs only
Page 139
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Select the Alarms Management tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Alarm Area
The alarm area that should be armed if the door is to be armed,
specified by drop-down list.
If none is specified, the door cannot be armed.
Omit Permitted
An indication of whether to allow alarms associated with this door to
be omitted from arming, specified by check box.
Silent Alarm
An indication of whether the alarms associated with this door are
silent, specified by check box.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete doors:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Door.
Note
To add or delete doors, you must add or delete the appropriate controller — see
Controller Details.
18.2.6 Door Security Level
This tab is only displayed in Access by Doors and Security Level mode — see Access Types.
To display access information:
1. Select the Door module.
2. Select a door in the List View.
3. Select the Security Level tab.
4. Specify the following options as required:
Default
Security Level
Page 140
The security level required to open the door outside the time profile,
specified by data entry or by increments.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Timed Security
Level
The security level required to open the door during the time profile,
specified by data entry or by increments.
Time Profile
The time profile allocated to the door, specified by a drop-down list.
Note
A security level of 0 prevents the door being opened at any time by any key.
The buttons are described in Property Page.
To add / update / delete doors:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Door.
Note
To add or delete doors, you must add or delete the appropriate controller — see
Controller Details.
18.2.7 Add / Update / Delete a Door
The appropriate areas, time profiles, controllers and channels must be created first.
Select the Door module.
To add a door:
1. Create a new controller.
Doors are created automatically.
To update a door:
1. Select a door.
2. Select each tab in turn and enter / update appropriate information — select a property
page field and press F1 to obtain help.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or Cancel to discard changes.
To delete a door:
1. Delete the associated controller.
The door(s) are deleted automatically.
Page 141
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
19. Video Source
19.1 Video Source List View
The Video Source List View displays a list of configured video sources. Selecting a video source
causes the Video Source Property Page to display its settings.
19.2 Video Source Property Page
The Video Source Property Page is used to create and manage connections to video sources.
A video source is a channel for getting live or recorded video into the system. It can be either a
camera, such as a web cam, or IP camera or an input channel on a more complex device such
as a digital source video recorder.
To display the video source property page:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or choose the New button.
3. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the video source, specified by data entry.
Description
A description of the video source, specified by data entry.
Type
The type of video source, selected from a drop-down list.
To add / update / delete a video source:
1. See Add / Update / Delete a Video Source.
To configure a video source:
1. See Configuring Video Sources.
19.3 Add / Update / Delete a Video Source
Select the Video Source module.
To add a video source:
1. Select New or press Ctrl-N.
2. Select the required camera type, click the Configure button and enter the camera
address and press F1 to obtain help.
3. Choose Add.
To update a video source:
1. Select a video source.
2. Modify the video source properties as required.
3. Choose Update or press Ctrl-S to save changes or select Cancel to discard changes.
Page 142
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To delete a video source:
1. Select a video source, and click the Configure button.
2. Choose Delete or press Ctrl-D.
3. Choose OK to confirm or Cancel to keep the video source.
19.4 Configuring Video Sources
Video sources are configured using the Configure Video Source window, which is displayed by
clicking the Configure button on the Video Source Property Page.
The Configure Video Source window has two tabs: General and Presets.
19.4.1 General Video Source Options
The General tab is used to:
•
Configure the connection to the video source that was created in the
Video Source Property Page, and
•
Display the feed from a configured camera.
To display general video source options:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or choose the New button.
3. Choose the Configure button.
4. If necessary, select the General tab.
5. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the video source, specified by data entry.
Description
The description of the video source, specified by data entry.
Address
The address of the video source, specified by data entry and
choosing the Connect button.
User (optional)
The user name required by the source in order to connect to it,
specified by data entry.
Password
(optional)
The password required by the source in order to connect to it,
specified by data entry.
6. If this video source is a Web / LAN Image, specify the following additional options as
required:
Interval (ms)
The refresh rate of the video display, specified by increments or data
entry.
Page 143
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7. If this video source is an Axis IP Camera, specify the following additional options as
required:
PTZ
If this checkbox is selected, the video source being configured has
Pan, Tilt and Zoom functionality and enables the View tab in the
Presets tab.
8. If this video source is an Intivid camera, specify the following additional options as
required:
Camera
The camera associated with the Intivid DVR unit, selected from a
drop-down list after it has been connected.
PTZ [56]
If this checkbox is selected, the video source being configured has
Pan, Tilt and Zoom functionality and enables the View tab in the
Presets tab.
9. To confirm the specification, choose the OK button.
19.4.2 Video Source Presets
The Presets tab is used to configure presets for a video source.
The left hand side of the tab contains a list of presets, and the right hand side displays several
tabs that are used to configure the selected preset. The tabs available are: General, View (if the
source supports PTZ) and Alarm Points.
The tabs General and Alarm Points are available for all three of the supported camera types
(Axis IP Camera, Web / LAN Image and Intivid).
In addition to the General and Alarm Points tabs, a third tab View is only available for video
sources that support PTZ.
Presets
A preset is an alarm point and / or view that is associated with the selected video source, and is
used in the Alarm Viewer application. Three different types of preset exist:
1. Alarm Point Preset — an association of an alarm point with a video source.
Selecting this preset in the Alarm Viewer application causes the associated video
feed to be displayed in the Video Source area.
2. Preset — an definition of a PTZ setting for a video source. Selecting this preset in
the Alarm Viewer Application causes the video source to move to the PTZ position
specified. This option is only available for video sources that use PTZ.
3. Alarm Point and View Preset — an association of an alarm point and PTZ settings
with a video source. Selecting this preset in the Alarm Viewer Application will:
•
Cause the associated video feed to be displayed in the Video Source
area.
•
Cause the video source to move to the PTZ position specified by that
views.
Adding and Deleting Presets
Presets are added and deleted using the Add and Delete buttons located on the right hand side
of the Presets tab.
19.4.2.1 General Options
A description of the Presets facility is given in Video Source Presets.
To display general preset options:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or choose the New button.
[56]
Page 144
Only if camera has PTZ facilities.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. Choose the Configure button.
4. Select the Presets tab.
5. If necessary, select the General tab.
6. Specify the following options as required:
Name
The name of the preset, specified by data entry.
Description
The description of the preset, specified by data entry.
To confirm the specification:
1. Choose the OK button.
19.4.2.2 View Options
The View tab is only available if the video source being configured supports PTZ.
A description of the Presets facility is given in Video Source Presets.
The View tab is used to specify the pan, tilt and zoom settings of the preset. The horizontal
scroll bars control the camera’s panning. The vertical scroll bar is used to control the camera’s
tilting, and the slide bar located next to the vertical toolbar is used to set the camera’s zoom
level. Better control can be achieved by clicking or dragging the mouse on the video window,
and using the scroll wheel.
To display view information:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or choose the New button.
3. Choose the Configure button.
4. Select the Presets tab.
5. If necessary, select the View tab.
6. To set the PTZ preset to the camera’s current position, choose the Set button.
Page 145
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7. To return the camera to the default PTZ settings, choose the Reset button.
To confirm the specification:
1. Choose the OK button.
19.4.2.3 Alarm Points
A description of the Presets facility is given in Video Source Presets.
The Alarm Points tab is used to associate an alarm point with the selected preset.
In the Alarm Viewer, clicking on an alarm point that has been configured in this tab causes the
CCTV region to display video from the associated source, and pans / zooms / tilts to the preset
specified in the View tab (if available).
To display alarm points information:
1. Select the Video Sources module.
2. Select a video source in the List View or choose the New button.
3. Choose the Configure button.
4. Select the Presets tab.
5. If necessary, select the Alarm Points tab.
6. To add an alarm point to the list of preset alarm points, select an alarm point from the
drop-down list, then choose the Add button.
7. To delete an alarm point from the list of preset alarm points, select the preset alarm
point, then choose the Delete button.
To confirm the specification:
1. Choose the OK button.
Page 146
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
20. Reports
20.1 Report Facilities
The reports available are described in Reports Provided. When displayed, the report is
populated with the current data in the PAC SecureNet database. Custom reports can be created
using Crystal Reports and added to the system as described in Add a Custom Report.
Important
When selecting a report that requests search parameters, it is strongly recommended to
specify search criteria that does not generate an excessive amount of data that takes a
long time to process.
To display a report:
1. Select the Reports tab in the Explorer bar.
2. Select a report to display.
3. If a Report Search Parameters window is displayed, see Report Search Parameters.
The report can be moved about the screen by dragging and dropping the tab — see
Tear Off Controls.
The Report Status Bar
The Current Page No. control displays the current page number.
The Total Page No. control displays the total number of pages.
The Zoom Factor control displays the current magnification of the report.
To export a report:
1.
Click on the Export Report icon
.
2. See Export a Report.
To print a report:
1.
Click on the Print Report button
.
To display the report with different search criteria:
1.
Click on the Refresh icon
.
The Report Search Parameters window is displayed.
2. Select the search criteria and select Search.
Page 147
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To show the structure of the report:
1.
Click on the Toggle Group Tree icon
.
The group tree pane is displayed to the left of the report. This enables you to navigate
around the structure of the report.
To hide the structure of the report:
1. Click on the Toggle Group Tree icon again.
To navigate around the report:
1. Use the Arrow keys, Page Up, Page Down, Home and End, or:
Use the following icons in the Report toolbar:
The Go to First Page icon displays first page of the report.
The Go to Previous Page icon steps backwards through the report
pages.
The Go to Next Page icon steps forwards through the report pages.
The Go to Last Page icon displays the last page of the report.
To go to a specific page in the report:
1.
Click on the Go to Page icon
.
The Go to Page dialog box appears.
2. Enter a page number.
3. Choose the OK button to go to the specified page number, or choose the Cancel button
to cancel.
To change the zoom level of the report:
1.
Click on the Zoom icon
.
A drop down menu appears.
2. Choose the required zoom level, or choose the Customize command to specify a
custom zoom level.
To display a subsection of the report in its own page:
1. Point to the title of a subsection of the report, so that the mouse pointer becomes a
magnifying glass.
Page 148
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
2. Double click the mouse button.
The subsection is displayed in its own page. A button showing the title of the report
subsection is added to the toolbar. You can click on the Main Report button to go back
to the main report, or click on a report subsection button to display that subsection.
To close the current subsection of the report:
1.
Click on the Close Current View icon
.
The current subsection of the report is closed and its button is removed from the
toolbar.
To close the report:
1. Click on the
button.
20.2 Reports Provided
Note
Some reports require search parameters to be specified — see Report Search
Parameters.
The following reports are provided when applicable:
17-Week
Average —
Detail
A detailed break down of the time worked by a specified keyholder or
keyholders over a specified 17-week period and determines compliance to
the Working Time (Amendment) Regulations 2003 Statutory Instrument 2003
No. 1684. A warning is displayed if the average working time exceeds 48
hours or if the working time in any week exceeds 60 hours.
If entry and exit areas are not specified, the report calculates the difference
between the earliest and latest access events for each day.
17-Week
Average —
Summary
A summary of the time worked by a specified keyholder or keyholders over
a specified 17-week period and determines compliance to the Working Time
(Amendment) Regulations 2003 Statutory Instrument 2003 No. 1684. A
warning is displayed if the 48 hour weekly average is exceeded.
If entry and exit areas are not specified, the report calculates the difference
between the earliest and latest access events for each day.
2100/2200
Controllers
A list of specified door controllers and associated details, limits and doors.
PAC 512
Controllers
A list of specified access controllers and associated details, limits and doors.
PAC 500
Controllers I/O
A list of access controllers on specified PAC 500 channel(s) and details of
their inputs and outputs.
PAC 520 / PAC
530 Controllers
A list of input and output controllers on specified PAC 500 channel(s) and
details of their inputs and outputs.
Access Groups
A list of specified access groups and associated time profiles and areas.
Access History
A list of areas (and associated doors) accessed by a specified keyholder
between specified dates.
Note
This report indicates when a key has been presented to a door’s reader but will not
detect when a keyholder has tailgated into or out of an area or used a Request to Exit
switch.
Area
Authorisation
A list of specified areas and associated keyholders with their access groups
and time profiles.
Page 149
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Areas
A list of specified areas and associated alarm points.
Area Usage
A list of specified keyholders and their area usage.
Attendance
A list of specified keyholders and times they entered and left an area or
opened a door. The report calculates the difference between the earliest and
latest access events for each day.
Note
This report should be used for guidance only. It indicates when a key has been used to
enter and leave an area, but will not detect when a keyholder has tailgated into or out
of an area or used a Request to Exit switch, and does not take lunches or breaks into
account.
Categories
A list of keyholder categories and associated area usage.
Channels
A list of all communication channels and associated details and settings.
Channels (PAC
500)
A list of specified PAC 500 TCP/IP channels and associated details and
settings.
Controller
Barcode
A controller barcode table of probed controllers.
Controllers
A list of controllers and associated details.
Dead Keys
A list of keyholders who have not used their keys after a specified date.
Door Controller
Summary
A list of all probed access controllers arranged by channel with associated
channel protocol type and controller firmware version.
Doors
A list of all doors and associated details, configuration and access.
Event Alarm
History
A list of alarms generated between specified dates.
Events
A list of the events for specified criteria.
Excessive Key
Use
A list of keys that have been used more than a specified number of times
within a specified period.
Guest
Authorisation
A list of specified guests from other organisational units and associated
authorisation.
Holiday
Profiles
A list of all holiday profiles and associated holiday periods.
Key Expiry
A list of keyholders whose keys expired on or after a specified date.
Keyholder
Authorisation
A list of specified keyholders and associated authorisation.
Keyholder
Images
A list of Keyholder photos and signatures that satisfy a specified search
criteria.
Keyholders
A list of specified Keyholders and associated details, including colour of key
fob.
Keyholder List
A list of Keyholders that satisfy a specified search criteria.
Last Block or
Flat Access
A list of specified Blocks or Flats accessed by specified keyholders and the
time accessed on the present date.
Note
This report indicates when a key has been presented to a door’s reader but will not
detect when a keyholder has tailgated into or out of an area or used a Request to Exit
switch.
Modems
Page 150
A list of modems attached to the PC and associated details.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Operators
A list of all operators and associated details.
Offline
Controllers
(PAC 201)
A list of connected PAC 201 controllers and associated details.
Time & Mode
Profiles
A list of selected Time and Mode profiles and associated time periods.
20.3 Report Search Parameters
Some reports require search criteria to display relevant information — e.g. a list of keyholders.
When such a report is selected the Report Search Parameters window is displayed, e.g. only list
keyholders with the surname Smith.
Notes
•
When selecting a report that requests search parameters, it is strongly
recommended to specify search criteria that does not generate an excessive
amount of data that takes a long time to process.
•
If organisational units are licensed, you can specify the organisational unit(s) to
include in the search. The default is the current (active) organisational unit.
•
To get the best from the Attendance, 17 Week Average (Detailed) and 17 Week
Average (Summary) reports, follow this recommendation:
When specifying an entry and exit area, ensure that the keyholder accesses those
areas at appropriate times to ensure accurate data is generated. If entry and exit
areas are not specified, the report calculates the difference between the earliest
and latest area access times.
To specify report search parameters:
1. Select the Reports tab in the Explorer bar.
2. Select a report to display.
If report search parameters are required, a Report Search Parameters window is
displayed.
3. Select the search parameters:
To add a search parameter to the report search options, select a search parameter on
the left and click on the
button.
To add all search parameters to the report search options, click on the
button.
To remove all search parameters from the report search options, click on the
button.
To remove a search parameter from the report search options, select a search
parameter on the right and click on the
button.
Page 151
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Note
Mandatory search parameters cannot be removed.
4. Select each search parameter in turn and specify the required search criteria. You can
use wildcards * (used to substitute zero or more characters) and ? (used to substitute a
single character) in data entry fields. Some fields cannot be changed.
Some search parameters require you to enter a comparison operator. See Report
Parameters Comparison Operators for more information.
5. If organisational units are licensed, select the appropriate checkbox(es).
6. If you want to create a report that always uses the same search criteria, choose the
Save button and enter a name for the report.
7. Choose the Search button.
20.3.1 Report Parameters Comparison Operators
Many report parameters enable you to enter comparison operators to compare the field to a
value. Different comparison operators are available for different report parameters.
To select a comparison operator:
1. In the report’s parameters window, select the parameter you want to search on, and if
necessary add it to the report.
2. Click on the down arrow to the right of the box in the Compare column for that
parameter.
A drop down list of all available comparison operators for that parameter is shown.
3. Select the comparison operator you want to use.
4. If necessary, in the Value column, enter or select the value which you want to compare
against.
Basic Comparison Operators
The six basic comparison operators are given below.
=
Page 152
Is equal to. Usually, this comparison operator is listed as is; for date / time
parameters, it is listed as on.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
<>
Is not equal to. Usually, this comparison operator is listed as is not.
<
Is less than. For date / time parameters, this comparison operator is listed as
before.
<=
Is less than or equal to. For date / time parameters, this comparison operator
is listed as on or before.
>
Is greater than. For date / time parameters, this comparison operator is listed
as after.
>=
Is greater than or equal to. For date / time parameters, this comparison
operator is listed as on or after.
Date and Time Comparison Operators
For some date and time parameters, further comparison operators are available. A complete
list is given below; the comparison operators which are available varies from one parameter to
another.
Past Years
In the last n years before the current date and time.
Past Months
Since the current time on the current day of the month, n calendar months
previously. If that date does not exist, e.g. 31 February, it is knocked back to
a real date.
Past Weeks
In the last n×7 days, where a day is 24 hours before now.
Past Days
In the last n days, where a day is 24 hours before now.
Past Hours
In the last n hours before the current date and time.
Past Minutes
In the last n minutes before the current date and time.
Past Seconds
In the last n seconds before the current date and time.
Today
Since midnight last night.
Yesterday
Occurring yesterday, i.e. between midnight on the night before last and
midnight last night.
Since days ago
Occurring at or after midnight n days ago. (If n is 0, midnight last night.)
Before days
ago
Occurring before midnight n days ago. (If n is 0, midnight last night.)
On days ago
Occurring between midnight and midnight on the specified number of days
ago. (If n is 0, today.)
Since weeks
ago
On or after the Monday n weeks before the current week.
Before weeks
ago
Before the Monday n weeks before the current week.
This week
On or after the Monday of the current week.
Since months
ago
On of after the first of the month n months ago.
Before months
ago
Before the first of the month n months ago.
This month
On or after the first of the current month.
Since years
ago
On or after 1st January n years ago.
Before years
ago
Before 1 January n years ago.
This year
On or after 1 January this year.
Page 153
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Notes
Each of these special comparison operators works relative to the date and time when
you run the report, not the date and time when the report was first created.
The Past Days, Past Weeks, Past Months and Past Years comparison operators
work relative to the exact current date and time. So using Past Days with a value of 1
means “within the last 24 hours”.
For the other date / time parameters, days begin at midnight, weeks begin with Monday,
months are calendar months beginning on the first of the month, and years begin on 1st
January.
For all the Before … and Since … comparison operators, a value of 0 refers to the
current time period. So a comparison operator of Since days ago with a value of 0 is
the same as using Today.
20.4 Export a Report
To export a report:
1. Display a report as described in Report Facilities.
2.
Click on the
icon.
The Export window is displayed.
3. Select the following options as required:
Format
Page 154
The format to export to, selected from a drop-down list.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Destination
PAC SecureNet
The destination of the export (selected from a drop-down list):
•
Application: Exports the report to a temp file in
the specified format and then opens the file in the
appropriate application.
The file name of the report and the file name of the temp
file cannot be the same.
When exporting in Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
format, the application and the disk file are the same,
so the destination is not specified. The ODBC data
source must be set up through ODBC Administrator in
order for the program to export to a particular ODBC
database format.
When exporting in HTML format, a file path is
requested.
•
Disk File: Saves the report to the specified disk or
diskette.
•
Lotus cc:Mail (VIM): Exports the report to a mail
message.
The character-separated values (separator and
delimiter), mail number, date format and password are
requested.
•
Lotus Domino: Exports the report to the specified Lotus
Domino server.
Version 3.0 or later of the Lotus Domino client is
required and, at a minimum, depositor access. Export to
a Lotus Domino OS/2 client is not possible.
•
Microsoft Mail (MAPI): Exports the report to a mail
message.
The formatting options depending on the format
selected are requested.
Note
The report can be exported to Crystal Reports.
20.5 Add a Report to Favourites
You can add your favourite reports to the Reports › Favourites menu so that you can access
them quickly.
You can create a tree of folders and subfolders within the Favourites menu to help you organise
your favourite reports.
To add a report to your favourites:
1. Display the Reports tab.
2. Right click on the report that you want to add as a favourite, then choose Add to
favourites from the context menu, or:
Select the report that you want to add as a favourite, then choose the Reports › Add
'Report' to favourites command.
The report is added to your favourites.
Notes
To add the report to a subfolder, or change the location of the report within the
Favourites submenu, you need to use the Favourites Reports Manager window.
Page 155
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To display the Favourite Reports Manager window:
1. Choose Reports › Manage Favourites.
The Favourite Reports Manager window is displayed.
To create a folder in the Favourite Reports Manager window:
1. Click on the folder button to the right ( ), or:
Right click anywhere in the list of favourite reports, then choose the Create Folder
command from the context menu.
A new folder is created called New Folder.
To rename a folder in the Favourite Reports Manager window:
1. Click on the folder name, or:
Right click on the folder, then choose the Rename command from the context menu.
The folder name is highlighted.
2. Type a new name for the folder, then press Enter.
The folder is renamed.
Note
You cannot change the name of a report in the Favourites menu.
To change the order of reports and folders within a folder:
1. Click on the folder or report (not the report name) to select it.
2. Click on the up arrow button ( ) to move the selected item up, or the down arrow button
( ) to move the selected item down.
To move a report or folder by drag and drop:
1. Click on the folder or report (not the report name) and hold down the mouse button.
2. Drag the report or folder to the destination folder, or to a new position in the current
folder, then release the mouse button.
Tip
When you drag a folder or note to another folder, the destination folder is collapsed by
default. You can expand or collapse folders by clicking on the and icons, just like
the folders in the Explorer view.
Page 156
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To delete a report from favourites:
1. Display the Favourite Reports Manager window.
2. Select the report, then choose the Delete button, or:
Right click on the report, then choose the Remove Favourite command from the
context menu.
To close the Favourites Reports Manager:
1. Choose the Save button to confirm the deletion or the Discard Changes button to
cancel the deletion.
The changes you have made are shown in the Reports › Favourites submenu.
20.6 Add a Custom Report
A report can be created using Crystal Reports and can access the PAC SecureNet database to
display current data. The report files can be created and tested in the Custom folder or added
using Reports › Custom Report Manager.
For further information on creating reports, contact Technical Support.
To display the Custom Report Manager window:
1. Choose Reports › Custom Report Manager.
The Custom Report Manager window is displayed.
You can add a shared report or a private report. A shared report can be displayed by
other Windows users. A private report cannot be displayed by other Windows users but
can be displayed by different operators if using the same Windows account.
To add a custom report:
1. If necessary, select the Installed Custom Report tab.
Page 157
PAC SecureNet
2. Choose the appropriate Add button.
The Open Report File window is displayed.
3. Navigate to where the report is located and select the required report.
4. Choose the Open button.
To delete a custom report:
1. If necessary, select the Installed Custom Report tab.
2. Select the report to be deleted.
3. Choose the appropriate Delete button.
To delete a saved report:
1. If necessary, select the Saved Report Queue tab.
2. Select the report to be deleted.
3. Choose the Delete button.
Page 158
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To close the Custom Report Manager:
1. Choose the Save button to save your changes and close the Custom Report Manager,
or:
Choose the Discard changes button to close the Custom Report Manager without
saving any changes.
Note
If you created a custom report for a previous version of PAC SecureNet, you may need
to upgrade it before you can use it with this version.
When a report needs to be upgraded, the words requires upgrade appear next to its
name when you open the Custom Report Manager. For more information, see TB254
— Upgrading a Custom Report.
Page 159
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
21. Image Capture
21.1 Image Capture Introduction
Important
This feature is only available if it is included in your PAC SecureNet licence. To enable
this feature, see Upgrade License.
The Image Capture Utility is used to capture images from files, Video for Windows devices and
TWAIN devices, for use in the Signature and Photo image fields in the Keyholder property page.
To capture an image:
1. Select the Keyholders module.
2. Select a keyholder in the List View.
3. To capture a photo image, select the Details tab and choose the Capture button at the
bottom of the photo frame.
To capture a signature image, select the Personal Details tab and choose the Capture
button at the bottom of the signature frame.
See Using the Image Capture Utility for information on using the Image Capture Utility.
21.2 Using the Image Capture Utility
Image Capture Utility is divided into two panes: Capture Source and Preview Window.
Capture Source
This area is used to select an image file, or an item of hardware to be used to capture an image.
See Capture Source for more information.
Preview Window
This area displays the image that was captured / is being captured using the capture source,
allowing the image to be cropped before placing it into the keyholder record.
See Preview Window for more information.
21.3 Capture Source
Up to four tabs may be displayed in this area: File, TWAIN, CCTV and Video.
File
This tab is used to select an image file from a local or network location.
A Windows explorer style “tree” is displayed that is used to navigate to a folder containing image
files. Double click on a folder or choose the Browse to display the Open dialog box, showing
the contents of the folder. Double click on a picture or choose the Open button to select a
picture and return to the Image Capture utility.
Page 160
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
The selected image file is displayed in the Preview Window.
TWAIN
This tab displays a list of TWAIN compatible image capture devices, e.g. scanners and digital
cameras. Before selecting an image capture device ensure that it is correctly configured. (You
may need to refer to its documentation.)
Select the required TWAIN device and click the Acquire Image button — the video or scan is
displayed in a separate window. (Follow the instructions for your imaging device to capture the
desired image.) The captured image is displayed in the Preview Window.
CCTV
This tab is only visible if you have CCTV rights. When selected, this tab displays a list of devices
on the CCTV system. Before selecting a CCTV device, ensure that it is correctly configured —
you may need to refer to its documentation.
Select the required CCTV device to view its live image feed in the Preview Window.
Click the Freeze button to freeze the display in the Preview Window.
Video
This tab is only visible if Video for Windows compatible devices are found. When selected,
this tab displays a list of Video for Windows devices, for example webcams. Before
selecting a Video device, ensure that it is correctly configured — you may need to refer to its
documentation.
Select the required Video for Windows device to view its live image feed in the Preview Window.
Click the Freeze button to freeze the display in the Preview Window.
21.4 Preview Window
This area displays the image that was selected or captured from the Capture Source area, and
is used to place the image into the keyholder’s Photo or Signature field.
Images displayed in this area may first be cropped before being captured (placed) into the
keyholder record.
Note
Cropping an image preserves only the selected part of it — allowing background,
unnecessary detail, etc., to be removed.
A cropped image has the same aspect ratio as the area it is displayed in and is
displayed correctly. Uncropped images may not have the appropriate aspect ratio and
may therefore be displayed incorrectly.
To import an image uncropped:
1. Choose the OK button at the bottom of the Preview Window area to insert the image
into the keyholder record.
To crop an image:
1. Point to the approximate top left corner of the area that you want to crop, then click and
hold the mouse button.
2. Drag to the approximate bottom right corner of the area that you want to crop, then
release the mouse button.
The crop box appears in the Preview area. The shape of the crop box depends on the
type of image you are cropping:
•
Photo: Crop box ratio 3:4
•
Signature: Crop box ratio 3:1
3. If necessary, click and drag the crop box to move it or resize it. (You can only resize
the crop box proportionally, i.e. if you change the width of the crop box, the height is
changed automatically.)
Page 161
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
4. If you want to zoom in on the crop box so that it nearly fills the Preview area, tick the
Auto zoom check box. If you want to see the whole picture at all times, make sure this
check box is not ticked.
5. When you have selected an area, click the OK button at the bottom of the Preview
Window area to insert the image into the keyholder record.
Page 162
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
22. ID Card Designer
22.1 Card Designer Introduction
Important
This feature is only available if it is included in your PAC SecureNet licence. To enable
this feature, see Upgrade License.
The ID Card Designer is used to design ID cards. Each design for an ID card is associated with
a Keyholder Category — assigning a category associates a specific card design to a keyholder.
Displaying the Card Designer
To launch the Card Designer:
1. Choose the Tools › Card Designer command, or:
In the Explorer bar, click on the Shortcut tab, then click on Card Designer (
or:
If the Organisation Options window is displayed (Tools › Options), click on the
Categories tab, then choose the Show Card Designer button.
),
Interactive Map
See Card Designer Interactive Map to view an interactive map of the ID-Card Designer.
22.2 Card Designer Interactive Map
Click on a region below to find out more about it.
Page 163
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.3 Card Designer Menus
There are four menus available:
•
Design
•
Edit
•
View
•
Help
22.3.1 Design Menu
The Design menu contains the following commands:
Import
If the file to be imported was exported as a selected items, it is imported onto
the current card face. If the file to be imported was exported as a design, it
replaces the current ID-Card design.
Export
Two export options are displayed:
Selection: Exports the selected items or the selected card face to a file in
the specified location.
Design: Exports the entire ID-Card to the specified location.
Update
Updates (saves) the current ID-Card.
Exit
Exits the Card Designer without saving changes.
22.3.2 Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the following commands:
Cut
Cuts the item(s) selected on the Main View. This function is also available in
the Toolbar.
Copy
Copies the item(s) selected on the Main View. This function is also available
in the Toolbar.
Paste
Pastes the item(s) that has been cut or copied. This function is also available
in the Toolbar.
Delete
Deletes the item(s) selected This function is also available in the Toolbar.
Select All
Selects all items on the card face.
Card Face
Properties
Selecting this item causes the Properties Region to display the properties of
the selected card face.
Align to Grid
See Align to Grid.
Bring to Front
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face.
Send to Back
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face.
Group Items
Groups the selected items. See Grouping and Ungrouping for more
information.
Ungroup Items
Ungroups the selected group. See Grouping and Ungrouping for more
information.
Page 164
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
22.3.3 View Menu
The View menu contains the following commands:
Units
Selects the scale used by the Ruler. The scale can also be changed by the
Ruler Context Menu.
None — turns off the ruler, e.g. for “not to scale” diagrams
Inches
Millimetres
Centimetres
Metres
Zoom
Displays a submenu which allows you to change the card face zoom level.
Small Icons
This item toggles between small and large icons for all items in the Toolbars
and Add Items Region.
22.3.4 Help Menu
Choosing the Contents command displays the ID Card Designer helpfile.
22.4 Toolbar, Browser and Status Bar
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Card Designer Toolbar
Card Designer Browser
Card Designer Status Bar
Page 165
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.4.1 Card Designer Toolbar
The ID-Card designer toolbar contains the following items:
Page 166
Select
Enables Select mode, which is used to select single or multiple
items on the card face. See Card Face Region for more
information.
Zoom
Allows the user to zoom in and zoom out on the card face view
by using mouse buttons, keys or the mouse wheel. See Zoom
Function for more information.
Cut
Cut the selected item or card face. This function is also
available in the Edit Menu.
Copy
Copy the selected item or card face. This function is also
available in the Edit Menu.
Paste
Paste the item or card face which has been cut or copied. This
function is also available in the Edit Menu.
Delete
Delete the selected item or card face. This function is also
available in the Edit Menu.
Print
This prints the current design using the specified printer. See
Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card
Printer for information about double sided printing.
Preview
This displays a window containing a print preview of the
current design using the specified printer.
Zoom in
Increase the magnification of the card face. See Zoom
Function for more information.
Zoom out
Decrease the magnification of the card face. See Zoom
Function for more information.
Show Full Card
Face
Decrease the magnification so that the full card face is
displayed. This function is also available in the View Menu.
Bring to Front
Sends the selected item to the front of the card face.
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face for more
information.
Send to Back
Sends the selected item to the back of the card face.
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face for more
information.
Group
Groups the selected items. See Grouping and Ungrouping for
more information.
Ungroup Items
Ungroups the selected group. See Grouping and Ungrouping
for more information.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
22.4.2 Card Designer Browser
The Keyholder/Category Browser toolbar (pictured above) is used to:
•
Select an ID-Card design to edit, which is displayed in the Card Design region.
•
Select a keyholder associated with the selected category, which causes the card
design to display its data items populated with the keyholder’s relevant details.
22.4.3 Card Designer Status Bar
The status bar, located at the bottom of the ID Card Designer application, displays the following
information:
1. X and Y coordinates of the mouse pointer, in the selected units for the card face.
2. Item Size — the size in the specified units of the item selected on the card face.
3. Mode Selected — the icon displayed here reflects the item that has been selected
in the Add Area or Toolbar. For example it displays a picture of magnifying glass
and the word “Zoom” if zoom mode is selected, a shape icon and the word “Shape”
if shapes are selected, etc.
4. Operator Name — the name of the operator currently logged on.
5. Zoom Level — the current level of magnification.
22.5 Design Regions
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Add Items Region
Card Face Region
Properties Region
Buttons Region
Page 167
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.5.1 Add Items Region
This region contains the following items that are used to create designs on the selected card
face.
Shape
This is used to create shapes; the default is a square. Six other
shapes are available by changing the item’s Shape Properties.
Image
This is used to create frames which display the image file
specified in the Image Properties.
Line
This is used to create lines on the card face. The line’s
thickness is specified using the Line Properties.
Text
This is used to create a box which displays the text specified
by its Text Properties.
Photo
This item displays a keyholder photo (if one is present) when
a keyholder is selected in the Card Designer Browser. See
Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties to view its
properties.
Signature
This item displays a keyholder signature (if one is present)
when a keyholder is selected in the Card Designer Browser.
See Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties to
view its properties.
Text Data
These items display keyholder text data (e.g. title, first
name, last name, etc.) when a keyholder is selected in the
Card Designer Browser. See Text Item / Text Data Item
Properties to view their properties.
Creating Designs
See Drawing and Placing Items for more information on using any of the above items to create
designs.
ID-Card Design Overview
See Card Design Overview for more information.
22.5.2 Card Face Region
This region is where the ID-Card is designed by using items from the Add Items Region.
Selecting Card Faces
To select a card face click the front or back tab. The tabs are located above the current card
face.
Mouse Coordinates
The coordinates of the mouse pointer on the page are displayed in the Status Bar.
Page 168
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Card Face Properties
The selected card face has the following properties:
Name
Snap Grid Colour
Units
Holopatch
Background Colour
Smartcard
Background Image
Magstripe
Snap Grid
Orientation
Snap Grid Size
Rulers
You can change the units on the rulers for the selected card face using:
•
The View Menu, or:
•
The card face’s Units Property, or:
•
The ruler’s Context Menu.
Viewing Card Face Properties
To view the card face properties, select it by clicking on any empty area of the card face.
Editing Card Face Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
22.5.3 Properties Region
This region displays the properties of the selected item on the selected page.
The properties of all pages and items in the card design define their appearance and behaviour
on the card face. Changes to the properties of items in the card design are reflected on the card
face.
Click on an entry below to view more information on it.
Shape Properties
Multiple Item Properties
Image Properties
Group Properties
Line Properties
Card Face Properties
Text Properties
Editing Item Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
Update / Exit
These buttons located beneath the properties area respectively update (save) the ID-Card
design and exit the application. See Buttons Region for more information.
Page 169
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.5.4 Buttons Region
Update Button
Clicking this button saves any changes to the current design.
Exit Button
This button exits the ID-Card Designer. To ensure any changes have been made, click the
Update button first.
You are warned if you have not saved your changes when this button is pressed.
22.6 Card Design Overview
Drawing and Placing Items
See Drawing and Placing Items for more information on creating designs.
Editing ID-Card Designs
Aligning items to the Grid
See Align to Grid for information.
Context Menus
Context Menus are used to edit items.
Docking Items
See Docking Items for more information.
Grouping and ungrouping
Merge many items into one item, or breakdown a group into its constituent parts. See
Grouping and Ungrouping for more information.
Moving, resizing and deleting
See Move, Resize and Delete for more information.
Ordering items on a card face
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face for more information.
Rulers and Measurement
See Measurement for more information.
Select Mode
Select mode is used to edit ID-Card designs. See Select Mode for more information.
Viewing Properties
See Select Mode for more information.
Properties
See Editing Properties for more information on editing the properties of a card face or an item
on the card face.
Double Sided Printing
See Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer for more information on
printing double sided ID-cards.
22.6.1 Drawing and Placing Items
Items from the Add Items Region can be placed on the selected card face by dragging and
dropping, or selecting and clicking.
Dragging and Dropping
Any item from the Add Items Region can be placed on the selected card face by selecting the
item and dragging it to the required location on the page while holding down the mouse button.
Page 170
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Selecting and Clicking
Items can be placed on the selected card face by selecting it, and then clicking on the required
area to place it. How an item is placed is dependant upon whether it is a fixed shape item,
variable shape item or line.
After selecting an item the ID-Card designer stays in this mode until a different one is selected.
The mode is indicated in the Status Bar.
Fixed Shape Items
Fixed shape items (indicated above) are items that when placed have a predetermined size,
which cannot be changed. However, text items’ sizes can be adjusted by using the Font
Property.
To place a fixed shape item select it and click the required area on the card face to place it.
Variable Shape Items
Variable shape items (indicated above) are items whose rectangular size is determined by
clicking twice on the card face: the first click specifies the location of the item’s top left corner
the second click specifies the location of the bottom right corner.
Line
Lines can be placed in two ways: individually or many.
•
Individually: After selecting the line item, clicking on the card face defines the line’s
start point and releasing it defines its end point.
•
Many: Selecting the card face specifies a line’s start point and clicking a second
time specifies its end point, causing that line to be drawn, clicking a third time
specifies the end point of the next line — the end point of the previous line is start of
the current line.
To end drawing press the Esc key, click on the Select button in the toolbar or right click.
22.6.2 Editing Properties
The properties of all items and both ID-card faces in the ID-Card Designer define their
appearance and behaviour. Changes to the properties of anything within the ID-Card Design
Editor are instantly reflected on the card face.
Item Properties
To edit an item’s properties you must first be in Select Mode. Click the require item and the
Properties Region displays that items properties allowing them to be edited.
ID-Card Face Properties
To view and edit the properties of the selected ID-Card face ensure that all items on the face
are unselected.
Page 171
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.6.3 Grouping and Ungrouping
When the Group command is applied to two or more selected objects, they behave as if they
are a single item — clicking on a constituent item causes the group to be selected, and clicking
and dragging a single item causes all of them to move. Grouped items can be rotated or docked
as a single item.
To group items:
1. Enter Select Mode.
2. Select the required items.
3. Choose the Edit › Group command, click on the Group button in the toolbar or right
click on the selected items and choose the Group command.
To ungroup a group and return it to its constituent components:
1. Select the group.
2. Choose the Edit › Ungroup command, click on the Ungroup button in the toolbar or
right click on the selected items and choose the Ungroup command.
Resizing Groups
Groups cannot be resized.
22.6.4 Select Mode
Before you can move, resize, group / ungroup or delete any item, you must enter select mode.
To enter select mode:
1. Click on the Select button in the Toolbar, or:
Press the Esc key.
Note
The current mode of the ID-Card Designer is displayed in the Status Bar.
To select multiple items:
1. Hold the Shift key down and select the required items, or:
Click and hold on a blank part of the card face, drag a selection rectangle around the
items that you want to select, then release the mouse button.
To select all items on the card face:
1. Choose the Edit › Select All command, or:
Press Ctrl-A.
Note
Holding the Ctrl key and clicking a selected item toggles its selection status.
Properties
When an item or group is selected, its properties are displayed in the Properties Region.
22.6.5 Move, Resize and Delete
This page describes how to move, resize or delete single items, multiple items or groups, after
entering Select Mode.
To move a group or item(s):
1. Select the group or item.
2. Click on the selected group or item and hold down the mouse button.
3. Drag the selected group or item to a new location, then release the mouse button.
Page 172
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To resize an item:
1. Select the item.
The item is enclosed by a rectangular boundary box that has grab handles on each side
and / or corner.
Solid black grab handles (pictured above left) indicate that the item can be resized by
click and drag. Outlined grab handles in each corner (pictured above centre) indicate
the item cannot be resized by click and drag. Items with Aspect Lock Property set have
grab handles in the middle of each side (picture above right), and maintain their aspect
ratio when resized.
2. Click on one of the grab handles and hold down the mouse button.
3. Drag the grab handle to a new location, then release the mouse button.
Notes
Groups cannot be resized.
The size of a Text Item can only be adjusted with the Font Property.
To delete a group or item(s):
1. Select the group or item(s).
2. Choose the Edit › Delete command, or:
Right click on the selected group or item(s) and choose the Delete command, or:
Click on the Delete icon in the Toolbar, or:
Press the Delete key, or:
Drag the selected group or item(s) out of the card face, then release the mouse button.
22.6.6 Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a Single-Sided ID Card Printer
Printing from the ID Card Designer
The ID Card designer only prints cards appropriate to the selected category. All of the front
sides for the category are printed first, followed by all of the back sides.
To print double-sided ID cards on a single-sided ID Card printer:
1. Load the printer with a enough ID cards to complete the print job.
2. Begin the printing process: choose Design Menu › Print, select the required printer
type, and click OK.
The printing process begins. Shortly afterwards a message box appears, asking if want
to begin print the back sides of the ID Cards.
3. Wait until the printing process for the front sides has finished.
4. Take all of the cards that have been printed, and reinsert them into the ID card printer
hopper. (Consult the printer’s operation instructions to determine the correct loading
procedure.)
5. In the message box, choose the Ok to confirm that you want to start printing on the
back sides of the ID cards.
The ID card back side printing begins.
Page 173
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Batch Printing ID Cards from Keyholder Module
Batch printing is where two or more ID cards are printed in one session. This is done by
selecting more than one keyholder and then choosing the File › Print ID Card command.
The keyholders selected for batch printing may belong to different categories which require
arranging for printing:
•
All double-sided ID cards, in alphabetic order, all front sides for the category,
followed by all back sides.
•
All single-sided ID cards, in alphabetic order.
If many categories of card holder are printed, the front side of all the first category of doublesided ID cards are printed first, followed by the back side of the first category; this is repeated
for all double-sided categories, followed by single side categories.
To print double-sided ID cards on a single-sided ID Card printer:
1. Load the printer with a enough ID cards to complete the print job.
2. Select the required keyholder entries from the keyholder list view, and to print them:
Choose File › Print ID Card, select the required printer type, and click OK, or:
Right click any of the selected keyholder entries, choose Print ID Card, select the
required printer type, and choose OK.
3. Begin the printing process: choose Design Menu › Print, select the required printer
type, and click OK.
The printing process begins. Shortly afterwards a message box appears, asking if want
to begin print the back sides of the ID Cards.
4. Wait until the printing process for the front sides has finished.
5. Take all of the cards that have been printed, and reinsert them into the ID card printer
hopper. (Consult the printer’s operation instructions to determine the correct loading
procedure.)
6. In the message box, choose the Ok to confirm that you want to start printing on the
back sides of the ID cards.
The ID card back side printing begins.
After the first category has been printed, the next category begins printing and so on
until the final category has been completed.
22.7 Item Properties
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Shape Item Properties
Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties
Line Item Properties
Text Item / Text Data Item Properties
Multiple Item Properties
Group Item Properties
Page 174
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
22.7.1 Shape Item Properties
A shape selected on a page has the following properties:
Name
Shape
X
Fill Colour
Y
Border Colour
Height
Line Width
Width
Shadow
Aspect Lock
Density
Anchor
Shadow X
Angle
Shadow Y
Transparency
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
22.7.2 Image Item / Photo Item / Signature Item Properties
Image Item, Photo Item and Signature Item have the following common properties:
Name
Anchor
Data Field (photo and signature items only)
Angle
Transparency
X
Image (image item only)
Y
Shadow
Height
Density
Width
Shadow X
Aspect Lock
Shadow Y
Page 175
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
22.7.3 Line Item Properties
A line has the following properties:
Name
Colour
X
Line Width
Y
Shadow
Height
Density
Width
Shadow X
Anchor
Shadow Y
Transparency
Aligning to Axis
A line can be aligned to the closest axis (straightened) by choosing Align to Axis from the
Context Menu.
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
22.7.4 Text Item / Text Data Item Properties
A text item or text data item selected on a card face has the following properties:
Name
Colour
X
Multi-line
Y
Shadow
Anchor
Density
Angle
Shadow X
Transparency
Shadow Y
Colour (text item only)
Data Field (text data item only)
Font
Page 176
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
22.7.5 Multiple Item Properties
When multiple items are selected on the page, the Properties Region displays a set of
properties common to all of the selected items. When these common properties are edited, the
respective property for each item is changed as well.
The following properties are displayed when multiple items are selected:
Aspect Lock
Shadow
Anchor
Density
Angle
Shadow X
Transparency
Shadow Y
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
22.7.6 Group Item Properties
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command. A group
item has the following properties:
X
Transparency
Y
Shadow
Anchor
Density
Angle
Shadow Y
Aspect Lock
Shadow X
Creating / Ungrouping a Group
See Grouping and Ungrouping for more information.
Editing Group Properties
Any changes made to the properties of a group are applied to the relevant properties of its
constituent items.
See Editing Properties for more information.
Resizing a Group
Groups cannot be resized.
Page 177
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.8 Individual Properties
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Name Property
Units Property
Background Properties
Snap Grid Properties
Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties
Orientation
X, Y, Width and Height Properties
Aspect Lock Property
Anchor and Angle Properties
Transparency Property
Shape Properties
Text Properties
Line Properties
Image Property
Shadow Properties
Colour Properties
Data Field Property
22.8.1 Name Property
The name of the item. This can be edited. It is used if the item is to be linked to other items.
This property is only required when configuring the Action Property.
22.8.2 Units Property
Allows the user to select the units for the values displayed on the card face. See Measurement.
22.8.3 Background Properties
Background
Colour
Click the button on right hand side to display the colour picker that selects
the card face’s background colour.
Background
Image
Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This
allows you to navigate to, and select a graphic file, which is displayed on the
map’s selected side. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF,
TIF and WMF are supported.
To remove a background image:
1. Select the image property and press the Delete key.
The image is removed from the card face background or from the image item without
deleting it, i.e. leaving an empty frame.
22.8.4 Snap Grid Properties
Snap Grid
Page 178
There are three options associated with this property:
No snap grid: No grid / dots displayed. This option disables the “snap to”
when placing items.
Snap only: Items snap to an invisible grid. The size of the grid is determined
by the Snap Grid Size property — see below.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Grid: Displays a grid on the card face which items snap to. The size of the
grid is determined by the Snap Grid Size property — see below.
Snap Grid Size
Sets the scale used by the displayed grid / dots in the units specified in the
Units property.
Snap Grid
Colour
Sets the colour of the grid. Clicking on the button on the right side of the
display displays a colour selector.
Preventing Snap to Grid
To prevent items snapping to the grid when moving them, hold down the Shift key when moving
them.
22.8.5 Holopatch / Magstripe / Smart Card Properties
Holopatch
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:
Off: (default) Holopatch not displayed.
Show: Displays a square on the front of the Card Design, that indicates the
location of a standard holopatch. Items beneath it remain visible.
Punch Out: Displays a white square on the front of the Card Design. Items
beneath it are not visible and not printed.
Magstripe
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:
Off: (default) Magstripe not displayed.
Show: Displays a rectangle on the Card Design back, indicating the location
of a magstripe on a standard card. Items beneath it remain visible.
Punch Out: Displays a solid white rectangle on the Card Design back. Items
beneath it are not visible and not printed.
Smartcard
This property has the following values selected from a drop-down list:
Off: (default) Smartcard not displayed.
Show: Displays a square on the Card Design front, indicating the location of
a the chip on a standard smartcard. Items beneath it remain visible.
Punch Out: Displays a white square on the Card Design front. Items
beneath it are not visible and not printed.
22.8.6 Orientation
This property toggles the orientation of the selected face between landscape and portrait.
Note
In order to change the orientation of a card, items on the card design that would no
longer be visible are deleted after changing the orientation. If such a situation occurs, a
prompt to confirm the orientation change is displayed.
22.8.7 X, Y, Width and Height Properties
X
The distance, in the selected units, of the item’s origin from the left side of
the card face. The origin location is set using the item’s Anchor Property.
Y
The distance, in the selected units, of the item’s origin the item from the top
of the card face. The origin location is set using the item’s Anchor Property.
Width
The width of the object, in the selected units.
Height
The height of the object, in the selected units.
Page 179
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.8.8 Aspect Lock Property
The Aspect Lock Property determines how a shape changes when it is resized using the
mouse.
Aspect Lock
Off
You can resize the object’s width and height separately, i.e. they are not
resized in proportion to each other.
Aspect Lock
On
When you resize the object, the object’s width and height are resized in
proportion to each other.
22.8.9 Anchor and Angle Properties
Anchor
The Anchor Property controls where the origin of the selected item is
located. The origin is the point around which it rotates and scales, and
whose location determines the shape’s X and Y coordinate properties.
Top
left
Top
Top
right
Left
Centre
Right
Bottom
Bottom
right
Bottom
left
Page 180
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Angle
PAC SecureNet
Entering a value rotates the shape around its origin. A positive value rotates
the item clockwise, and a negative anticlockwise.
The image below shows examples of how the alignment properties affect
an item when it is rotated 45° clockwise. The red dot indicates the shape’s
origin.
Vertical alignment: centre
Horizontal alignment: centre
Vertical alignment: bottom
Horizontal alignment: right
Vertical alignment: centre
Horizontal alignment: left
22.8.10 Transparency Property
A value between 0 (opaque) and 100 (transparent).
22.8.11 Shape Properties
Shape
The type of shape the selected item is: Circle, Square, Triangle, Star,
Pentagon, Hexagon or Burst.
Fill Colour
Sets the colour of the selected item’s fill. Clicking on the button on the right
side of the display displays a colour selector.
Border Colour
Sets the colour of the selected item’s border. Clicking on the button on the
right side of the display displays a colour selector.
22.8.12 Text Properties
Text
Text entered here is displayed in the text item on the card face. The text item
can be resized using the Font property.
Font
This property controls the appearance of the text in the selected item.
Clicking the button on the right hand side displays the font selector, used to
select font type, font style, font size, font effect and scripting.
Multi-line
Setting this property to On allows a text box to be resized, whilst setting it to
Off prevents a text box from being resized.
Colour
Sets the colour of the text. Clicking on the button on the right side of the
display displays a colour selector.
22.8.13 Line Properties
Line Width
This property sets the line thickness of the selected line (for lines), or border
(for shapes).
The default value is 1. Setting this value to 0 turns the line off.
Colour
Sets the colour of the line or border. Clicking on the button on the right side
of the display displays a colour selector.
Page 181
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.8.14 Image Property
This property is used to choose the image file that an item displays.
If the image property is specified as a background image for a card face, it expands to fill the
card face, and cannot be resized.
If the image property is specified as an image for an image item, the image is sized to fit the
image frame, and may therefore appear distorted. An image can be adjusted by using the
image item’s Context Menu.
To choose an image:
1. Click the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This allows you to
navigate to, and select a graphic file, which is displayed within the boundary box of the
image item. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, TIF and WMF are
supported.
To remove an image:
1. Select the Image property and press the Delete key.
The image is removed from the card face background or from the image item without
deleting it, i.e. leaving an empty frame.
22.8.15 Shadow Properties
Shadow
Toggles shadow visibility.
Shadow X
The horizontal offset of a shadow. A positive value causes the shadow to be
displayed to the right of the item.
Shadow Y
The vertical offset of a shadow. A positive value causes the shadow to be
displayed below the item.
Shadow
Density
The darkness of the shadow: 0 makes it invisible, and a value of 100 makes
it black. By default this value is set to 20 (light gray).
22.8.16 Colour Properties
Colour
Property
Sets the colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side
of the display displays a colour selector.
Fill Colour
Property
Sets the fill colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right
side of the display displays a colour selector.
Page 182
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
22.8.17 Data Field Property
This property specifies the keyholder database field that populates the text data item or photo/
signature item when the ID-Card is printed or when a keyholder is selected from the Card
Designer Browser.
The text data fields available are:
•
Date of Birth
•
Email
•
Employee Number
•
First Name
•
Home Telephone
•
Initials
•
Last name
•
Mobile Telephone
•
Start Time Date
•
Title
•
Work Telephone
•
Keyholder Extra Information fields 1-5 — these values are only available if they
are defined in the Keyholder Extra Information tab of the Organisation Options
window, displayed using the Tools › Organisation Options command.
The photo / signature fields available are:
•
Photo
•
Signature
22.9 Context Menus
Context menus are displayed by right clicking on an item.
Click on a link below to view the Context Menu associated with an item.
Single Items
Line
Image
Multiple Items
Group
Ruler
Card Face
22.9.1 Card Face
The card face context menu contains the following commands:
Cut
Cuts the selected page.
Copy
Copies the selected page.
Paste
Pastes the copied or cut page — only displayed when a page has been cut
or copied.
Page 183
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Delete
Deletes the selected page.
Zoom in
See Zoom Function.
Zoom out
See Zoom Function.
Show Full Card
Face
This causes the card face view to fill the entire page.
Help
Displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected
item(s).
22.9.2 Ruler
The Ruler context menu allows you to specify the units used by the selected card face to be set.
It contains the following commands:
Inches
Millimetres
Centimetres
Metres
Selects the specified unit.
None
Turns off the ruler.
22.9.3 Multiple Items
In addition to the Context Menu commands listed for Single Items, the context menu contains:
Group
See Grouping and Ungrouping.
22.9.4 Group
In addition to the common menu contents, a context menu for a group item contains:
Ungroup
See Grouping and Ungrouping.
Test action
Not used.
22.9.5 Single Items
The context menu for a single item contains the following commands:
Cut
Cuts the selected item(s).
Copy
Copies the selected item(s).
Paste
Pastes the copied or cut item(s) — only displayed when an item has been
copied.
Delete
Deletes the selected item(s).
Test action
Not used.
Set action
Not used.
Align to Grid
See Align to Grid.
Bring to Front
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face.
Send to Back
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face.
Help
Displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected
item(s).
22.9.6 Image
In addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for an image
item with an image assigned contains:
Restore Size
Page 184
This function restores the image to its original size if it has been stretched or
shrunk.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Restore Aspect
PAC SecureNet
This function restores the image to its correct aspect ratio at its current size.
22.9.7 Line
In addition to the Context Menu items listed for Single Items, the context menu for a line
contains:
Align to axis
This moves the end point to make the line parallel with the horizontal or
vertical axis.
22.10 Common Items
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Align to Grid
Docking Items
Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face
Zoom Function
Measurement
Colour Selector
Font Selector
22.10.1 Align to Grid
Selecting this option, from the View Menu or a Context Menu, causes the selected item or items
to “jump” to the nearest grid line or dot.
A snap grid can be ignored by holding down the Shift key when placing an item.
The snap grid is controlled by the Snap Grid property of the selected card face.
22.10.2 Docking Items
By docking one item with another, many items can be “stuck” or docked together — this can be
used to move around groups of items on the card designer.
Items can be docked to the right and bottom side of an object’s boundary box. The position on
the side of the item at which the docking occurs is determined by the Anchor Property of the
item that is being docked.
The property set for the Vertical Alignment determines the position docking occurs on the right
side and Horizontal Alignment determines the position of the bottom side.
By default the Vertical Alignment is set to Top and Horizontal Alignment is set to Left.
Page 185
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Anchor Properties
Examples of the alignment properties are shown below. The yellow square is the item being
docked.
Top
Left
Centre
Centre
Bottom
Right
Docking Items
To dock items:
1. Move an item so that its top left corner comes into contact with the right side of another
item, or:
Move an item so that the top left corner comes into contact with the bottom side of
another item.
A small box appears when an item is successfully docked to another item. The position
of that box indicates what that item’s alignment property is set to. The alignment
examples above show the position of the small confirmation box.
Docking Text Data Items
Text data items may change in size when previewed — items that are docked to a text data item
moves as that text item changes in size.
Moving Docked Items
When an item is moved only the items that are docked to it moves with it, not those it is docked
to. When an item is clicked with the primary mouse button and moved its boundary box turns
blue.
For example, if three items are docked together and the middle item is moved, it (and the item
docked to it) moves away from the item on the left.
Page 186
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Undocking items
To undock a item:
1. Select the item.
2. Drag the item away from the item it was docked to, or:
Right click the item and choose Undock from the context menu — this command is only
displayed when the selected item is docked.
The selected item is undocked from the object that it was docked to.
Preventing Docking
To move an item next to another, but not have it dock hold down the Ctrl key whilst moving it.
22.10.3 Ordering Items / Groups on the Card Face
An item’s or group’s ordering reflects its position in relation to other items, i.e. whether it is on
top of or beneath another item.
Red circle moved from Back to Front
The order of an item can be changed using:
•
The Edit › Bring to Front and Edit › Send to Back commands.
•
The Bring to Front and Send to Back commands from the item’s Context Menu.
•
The Bring to Front and Send to Back icons in the Toolbar.
22.10.4 Zoom Function
The zoom function is used to increase or reduce the magnification of a card face — zooming in
to see details and zooming out for a broader view.
The level of magnification is displayed in the Status Bar.
To magnify or reduce the card face view:
1. Use one of the following:
The Zoom command in the View Menu, or:
The Zoom in and Zoom out Toolbar buttons, or:
The Zoom Toolbar button, or:
Your mouse’s mouse wheel (if present), or:
The + (plus) and - (minus) keys on the numeric keypad.
To view a full card face:
1. Click on the Show Full card face icon on the Toolbar, or:
Choose the View › Zoom › Show Full card face command — see View Menu for more
information, or:
Choose the Show Full card face command from the card face’s Context Menu.
Page 187
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
22.10.5 Measurement
The units of measurement used by the ID-Card Designer are: Inches, Millimetres, Centimetres,
and Metres.
These options can be set from the Ruler Context Menu, the View Menu, or by the Card Face
region’s Units property.
22.10.6 Colour Selector
The Color dialog box enables you to select a basic colour or define up to 16 custom colours.
22.10.7 Font Selector
The Font dialog box enables you to select a font face, style, and size; apply specify effects such
as Strikeout and Underline; and select the character set, e.g. Western.
Page 188
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23. Alarm Map Designer
23.1 Alarm Map Designer — Introduction
Important
This feature is only available if it is included in your PAC SecureNet licence. To enable
this feature, see Upgrade License.
You can use the Alarm Map Designer to design maps that are displayed in the Alarm Viewer.
You can place items such as doors, areas and controllers on the map; these are used in the
Alarm Viewer Application to indicate visually the location of alarm.
Typically, a map shows a schematic of the building(s) and has alarm points placed upon it in the
same location as their real world counterparts. A map can consist of many pages, which can
represent floors, different sites, etc.
To start Alarm Map Designer:
1. In PAC SecureNet, choose the Tools › Alarm Map Designer command, or:
Click on the Alarm Map Design icon (
) in the PAC SecureNet Toolbar.
Alarm Designer Interactive Map
See Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map to see an interactive map of the Alarm Map Designer.
Alarm Map Designer Layout
To find out more about a specific part of the Alarm Map Designer, click on one of the following:
Menu, Toolbar, General Tab, Page Tabs, Properties Region.
Making a Map
For more information on making maps, see Design Editor Region.
For guidance on image formats and sizes of maps, see Guidance on Image Formats and Sizes.
23.1.1 Guidance on Image Formats and Sizes
Owing to the variety of ways in which alarm maps can be designed and used, it would
be impractical to apply any limits on the format and size of images used. However, it is
recommended that care be taken to use the minimum amount of bitmap images possible. PAC
SecureNet imposes no limits on image formats and sizes but tries to limit the amount of bitmap
data stored by resampling any images used.
Ideally bitmap images should only be used to denote item locations such as those used for
doors and alarm points. Wherever possible, use of vector graphics is preferable in order to
obtain the best performance and scalable system since the data sizes required are minimal
when compared to using raster graphics.
An additional benefit of using vector graphics is that they looks good at almost any zoom factor
due to their efficient image rescaling when using the zoom in and out feature.
Where only bitmap images are available for a facility, the best approach is to import these into
and then trace around the areas using the vector graphics features available in the Alarm Map
Designer.
23.2 Alarm Map Designer Glossary
Add Area
The Add Area is located on the left hand side of the Alarm Map Designer application. It
contains a list of drawing objects that are used to create shapes, text labels etc on the
selected page, and a list of configured areas and their associated alarm inputs which can on
the page to build a map, for example, of an area.
Page 189
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Alarm Area
An area that is associated with a PAC 500 for alarm management. Alarm points, such as
doors or inputs, can be associated with alarm areas.
Alarm Point
Alarm points are items capable of generating alarms, for example, doors, inputs or
controllers.
Child Area
A child area is an area that is contained by a parent area.
Context Menu
A menu that is displayed when an item is clicked with the secondary mouse button.
Parent Area
A parent area is an area that contains one or more areas within it.
Select
To select an item you must first enter select mode, by clicking the select mode icon in the
toolbar, or pressing the Select button.
23.3 Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map
Click an area on the map below to find out more about it:
23.4 Alarm Map Designer Menus
There are four menus available:
Design Menu
Edit Menu
View Menu
Help Menu
Page 190
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.4.1 Design Menu
The Design menu contains the following commands:
New › New
Page
See Adding / Deleting / Copying Pages.
Import
See Import.
Export
See Export.
Update
Updates (saves) the current map. The map is stored within the database.
Exit
Exits the Map Design Editor without saving changes.
23.4.1.1 Export
Two export options are displayed:
Selection
Exports the selected items or the selected page to a file in the specified
location.
Design
Exports the entire map to the specified location.
23.4.1.2 Import
Imports the selected file, merging it with items present on the current design.
If the file to be imported was exported as selected items, it is imported onto the current page.
If pages are being imported, new pages are created for each page.
23.4.2 Edit Menu
The Edit Menu contains the following items:
Cut
Cuts the item(s) or page selected on the Main View. This function is also
available in the Toolbar.
Copy
Copies the item(s) or page selected on the Main View. This function is also
available in the Toolbar.
Paste
Pastes the item(s) or page that has been cut or copied. This function is also
available in the Toolbar.
Delete
Deletes the item(s) or page selected. This function is also available in the
Toolbar.
Select All
Selects all items on the page.
Page
Properties
Selecting this item causes the Properties Region to display the properties of
the selected page.
Set Page
Extent
Makes the page slightly bigger than the objects that define its maximum
width and height.
Align to Grid
See Align to Grid.
Bring to Front
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Page.
Send to Back
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Page.
Group Items
Groups the selected items. See Grouping and Ungrouping for more
information.
Ungroup Items
Ungroups the selected group. See Grouping and Ungrouping for more
information.
23.4.2.1 Align to Grid
Choosing this command, from the View menu or a Context menu, causes the selected item(s) to
“jump” to the nearest gridline or dot.
A snap grid can be ignored by holding down the Shift key when placing an item.
Page 191
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
The snap grid is controlled by the Snap Grid property of the selected page.
23.4.2.2 Ordering Items / Groups on the Page
An item’s or group’s ordering reflects its position in relation to other items, i.e. whether it is on
top of or beneath another item.
Red circle moved from Back to Front
The order of an item can be changed using:
•
The Edit › Bring to Front and Edit › Send to Back commands. See Edit Menu for
more information.
•
The Bring to Front and Send to Back commands from the item’s Context Menu.
•
The Bring to Front and Send to Back icons in the Toolbar.
23.4.3 View Menu
The View menu contains the following commands:
Units
Selects the scale used by the Ruler. The scale can also be changed by the
Ruler Context Menu.
None — turns off the ruler, e.g. for “not to scale” diagrams
Inches
Millimetres
Centimetres
Metres
Zoom
Displays a submenu which allows you to change the page Zoom level.
Animation
This item toggles the animation state of any animated icons or graphics on
the page.
Small Icons
This item toggles between small and large icon states any area and alarm
items states present on the page.
23.4.3.1 Zoom Function
The zoom function is used to increase or reduce the magnification of a page — zooming in to
see details and zooming out for a broader view.
The level of magnification is displayed in the Status Bar.
To magnify or reduce the page view:
1. Use one of the following:
The Zoom command in the View Menu, or:
The Zoom in and Zoom out Toolbar buttons, or:
The Zoom Toolbar button, or:
Your mouse’s mouse wheel (if present), or:
The + (plus) and - (minus) keys on the numeric keypad.
Page 192
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To view a full page:
1. Click on the Show Full Page icon on the Toolbar, or:
Choose the View › Zoom › Show Full Page command — see View Menu for more
information, or:
Choose the Show Full Page command from the card face’s Context Menu.
23.4.4 Help Menu
Choosing the Contents command displays the Alarm Map Designer helpfile.
23.5 Alarm Map Designer Toolbar
The toolbar contains the following items:
Select
Enables Select mode, which is used to select single or multiple
items on the page. See Select Mode for more information.
Zoom
Allows the user to zoom in and zoom out on the page view by
using mouse buttons, keys or the mouse wheel. See Zoom
Function for more information.
Cut
Cut the selected item or page. This function is also available in
the Edit Menu.
Copy
Copy the selected item or page. This function is also available
in the Edit Menu.
Paste
Paste the item or page which has been cut or copied. This
function is also available in the Edit Menu.
Delete
Delete the selected item or page. This function is also available
in the Edit Menu.
Zoom in
Increase the magnification of the page. See Zoom Function for
more information.
Zoom out
Decrease the magnification of the page. See Zoom Function
for more information.
Show Full Page
Decrease the magnification so that the full page is displayed.
This function is also available in the View Menu.
Bring to Front
Sends the selected item to the front of the page — see
Ordering Items / Groups on the Page.
Send to Back
Sends the selected item to the back of the page — see
Ordering Items / Groups on the Page.
Group
Groups the selected items. See Grouping and Ungrouping for
more information.
Ungroup Items
Ungroups the selected group. See Grouping and Ungrouping
for more information.
Page 193
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.6 Add Items Region
This area contains following tabs:
•
General Tab
•
Areas Tab
•
Inputs Tab
•
Outputs Tab
•
CCTV Tab (only if video source(s) are configured)
•
Alarm Points Tab
The contents of these tabs are used to create maps.
23.6.1 General Tab
This tab contains six items that are used to draw and create maps on the selected page.
Shape Item
This is used to create shapes on the page. Shapes supported
are: circle, square, triangle, star, pentagon, hexagon or a burst.
When drawing a shape, a circle is drawn by default; this can be
changed using the Shape Properties.
Image Item
This is used to create frames on the page which display an
image. The image file is specified in the Image Property.
Line Item
This is used to create lines on the page. The line thickness is
specified by the Line Properties.
Text Item
This is used to create a text box on the page. The text is
specified by the Text Properties.
View Item
This defines a rectangular region on the map. You can
associate other items with the view item. When you double
click on the associated item, or use the Test Action function,
the view item is displayed in the page view. See View Item
Properties to view its properties.
Button Item
A button is linked to another item or page in the Alarm Map
Designer. You can click on the button to display the item which
it is linked to. See Button Item Properties to view its properties.
See Further Information on the Add Items Region for further information on the Add Items
region.
23.6.2 Areas Tab
The Areas tab contains alarm areas that have been configured in PAC SecureNet.
Each area can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and
status of the area in the Alarm Viewer.
Alarm Areas
An alarm area is used to signal that at least one alarm point in
the area has not been cleared, i.e. not been restored and/or
acknowledged. See Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor for
more information.
See Alarm Area Properties to view alarm area properties.
See Further Information on the Add Items Region for further information on the Add Items
region.
Page 194
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.6.3 Inputs Tab
The Inputs tab contains inputs that have been configured in PAC SecureNet.
The inputs can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:
The default is inputs in all areas.
Each input can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and
status of the input in the Alarm Viewer.
Inputs
An input is an alarm point used to signal the occurrence of
an alarm. See Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor for more
information.
See Alarm Point / Output Properties to view alarm point
properties.
See Further Information on the Add Items Region for further information on the Add Items
region.
23.6.4 Outputs Tab
The Outputs tab contains outputs that have been configured in PAC SecureNet.
The outputs can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:
The default is outputs in all areas.
Each output can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location and
status of the output in the Alarm Viewer.
Outputs
An output is a relay used to activate a sounder or reset an
alarm sensor. Alternatively, an output can also be configured to
be set manually or when an area is armed. See Alarm Viewer
and Map Design Editor for more information.
See Alarm Point / Output Properties to view output properties.
See Further Information on the Add Items Region for further information on the Add Items
region.
Page 195
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.6.5 CCTV Tab
This tab is only displayed if a video source has been defined.
This CCTV tab contains a list of configured video sources, which are used to represent
cameras, or display the feed from a camera on the selected page.
Video Sources
Once it is placed upon the page this item has two modes of
behaviour that depend upon its Display Mode property.
See Video Source Properties to view video source properties.
See Further Information on the Add Items Region for further information on the Add Items
region.
23.6.6 Alarm Points Tab
The Alarm Points tab contains alarm items that have been configured in PAC SecureNet.
Alarm points are configured by specifying an alarm area in the Alarm Management tab of
servers, controllers, and doors.
The alarm points can be filtered by selected an area from the drop-down list:
The default is alarm points in all areas.
Each alarm point can be dragged and dropped on to a Design Editor page to show the location
and status of the alarm item in the Alarm Viewer.
Servers
Controllers
A server, controller, or door is an alarm point used to signal the
occurrence of an alarm. See Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor
for more information.
See Alarm Point / Output Properties to view alarm point properties.
Doors
See Further Information on the Add Items Region for further information on the Add Items
region.
23.6.7 Further Information on the Add Items Region
Changing Add Items Views
The Add Items region (except for the General and Areas tabs) can be filtered by selecting an
area from a drop-down list in the Add Items box.
In addition, right clicking on the region gives the following options:
Show all items
Shows all items — not applicable to the General tab.
Show items
not on current
page
Shows only the items not on the current page — not applicable to the
General tab.
Large icons
Toggles between large and small icons.
Page 196
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Drawing and Creating Maps
See Drawing and Placing Items for more information on using any of the above items to draw
and create maps.
Map Design Overview
See Design Editor Region.
23.7 Design Editor Region
Adding / Deleting Map Pages
See Adding / Deleting / Copying Pages for more information.
Drawing and Placing Items
See Drawing and Placing Items for more information on drawing and creating maps.
Editing Map Designs
Aligning items to the Grid
See Align to Grid for information.
Context Menus
Context menus are used to edit items. See Context Menus for more information.
Grouping and ungrouping
Merge many items into one item, or breakdown a group into its constituent parts. See
Grouping and Ungrouping for more information.
Moving, resizing and deleting
See Move / Resize / Delete Items for more information.
Ordering items on a page
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Page for more information.
Rulers and Measurement
See Measurement for more information.
Select Mode
Select mode is used to edit map designs. See Select Mode for more information.
Viewing Properties
See Select Mode for more information.
Properties
See Editing Properties for more information on editing the properties of a page or an item on the
page.
Map Making Hints
See Map Making Hints to view hints on making maps.
Page 197
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.7.1 Map Making and Editing
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Map Making Hints
Adding / Deleting / Copying Pages
Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor
Editing Properties
Page Tabs
Grouping and Ungrouping
Select Mode
Move / Resize / Delete Items
Drawing and Placing Items
Measurement
23.7.1.1 Map Making Hints
Text or Picture Button
You can use a Text Item or an image item on your map as a “button”. Pressing the button
zooms to another part of the map, or another page.
To do this:
1. Add a text or bitmap item to the page.
2. Adjust its properties to a suitable appearance, then in the View property put the name of
a page, alarm area or preset view object.
3. See Action and Set Action.
Icon Size
Alarm points and alarm areas have icons associated with them. You can use the View › Small
Icons command to toggle the size of the icons between large (32 pixels) or small (16 pixels).
See View Menu for more information.
Action
In the Alarm Viewer application the operator can select an active alarm, an alarm area or
alarm point, and all of the Alarm Viewer application panels highlight the selected item. When
an alarm occurs the map must show the alarm to the operator immediately. This means that
the map view must be able to jump to any alarm point or area automatically and display it to the
user. This “zoom-to” behaviour can be set up and tested in the map editor.
To jump to an object, double click on it, or right click and choose Test Action from the
Context Menu.
When you jump to an object it tries to fill the screen with the item specified in the view property.
This can be the name of a page, a view, or an alarm area. If the item is rotated the view also
rotates so the item appears “right way up”.
Normally the view for an alarm area is the area itself. This behaviour can be changed by altering
the Action property of the alarm area, or by adding a view with the same name.
Normally the view for an alarm point is the parent area, so using the Action Property function
on the alarm point fills the screen with its parent area, even if that area has a different view
specified. However, if the alarm point is outside the rectangle specified for the alarm area it may
not be visible, and you need to specify the name of a different page, view or area in the view
property of the alarm point.
View items can be added to the map, but they must have a name specified before they can be
used. View items are not visible in the alarm viewer, but in the map designer you see an icon
and name.
Page 198
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
If a view has the same name as an alarm area the view is chosen by objects that specify that
name in their view property.
There may be alarm areas and views with the same name on different pages. If there is a
view or area available on the current page with the specified name, then that one is chosen.
Otherwise all pages are searched and the Action may change to a different page.
Overriding the Area with a View
The icon for an alarm area can be placed in any of the 9 anchor positions by adjusting the
Anchor property, but you can place the icon somewhere else if you need to.
To do this:
1. Add a view item to specify the rectangle of the alarm area.
2. Give that view the same name as the area.
3. Move the area rectangle so the icon appears in the desired location. Now the icon is
where you want it, but zooming to the area or any of its alarm points fills the screen with
the rectangle specified by the view instead of the area.
23.7.1.2 Adding / Deleting / Copying Pages
To add a blank page to the current design:
1. Choose the Design › New › New Page command.
After a page is added, a new tab is added to the Page Tabs area.
To delete a page:
1. Click the appropriate tab to select the page.
2. Choose the Edit › Delete command, or:
Click on the Delete icon in the Toolbar.
To copy an existing page:
1. Select the required page tab and choose the Edit › Copy command, or:
Select the required page tab and click on the Copy icon in the Toolbar, or:
Right click on the required page tab and choose the Copy command.
2. Choose the Edit › Paste command, or:
Click on the Paste icon in the Toolbar, or:
Right click on the Page Tabs area and choose the Paste command.
23.7.1.3 Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor
The Alarm Viewer is used in the management of alarms — if maps are present it displays
them in a viewer. If an alarm point goes into alarm, the appearance of that alarm point on the
map changes to indicate that it has gone into alarm, and the map viewer zooms to the area
associated with that alarm point, so that it fills the map view.
Alarm Point Appearance
The appearance of an alarm point is modified by the Alarm Viewer to indicate the state of that
alarm point, i.e. whether it has been disarmed, armed, etc.
An alarm point’s Alarm Status property can be used to view how an alarm point appears in a
different states in the Alarm Viewer.
Associated Areas
When an operator configures alarm points he or she associates them with an alarm area.
This feature can be used in the Map Design Editor: double clicking an alarm point, or choosing
the Test Action command from the item’s Context Menu, causes the page to jump to that
associated area so that it fills the page view.
Page 199
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Action
Zoom to can be configured for any item in the Map Design Editor. See Action and Set Action for
more information.
23.7.1.4 Editing Properties
The properties of pages and items in the Map Design Editor define their appearance and
behaviour on the page and in the Alarm Viewer application. Changes to the properties of
anything within the Map Design Editor are instantly reflected on the page.
To edit the properties of an item on the page:
1. Select the required item.
The Properties Region displays that item’s properties, enabling you to edit them.
To view and edit the properties of the selected page:
1. Choose the View › Page Properties command.
23.7.1.5 Page Tabs
The page area is used to design maps. You can place items from the Add Items and Alarm
Points areas here and they are shown in the Alarm Viewer.
Additional pages can be added using the New Page command, located in the Design menu.
The page name, displayed in the tab, is entered in the page’s Name property.
To view the page properties:
1. Click on any empty area of the page to select it, or:
Choose the Edit › Page Properties command.
To change the units used in the Rulers:
1. Choose the View › Units command — see View Menu, or:
Right click on the Ruler and choose a unit from the context menu, or:
Set the Units property in the Page Properties.
Selecting Pages
Additional pages are selected using the page tabs, which are located above the page area.
Page Coordinates
The coordinates of the mouse pointer on the page are displayed in the Status Bar.
Page 200
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Page Properties
The page has the following properties:
Name
Units
Tooltip
Background Colour
X
Background Image
Y
Snap Grid
Width
Snap Grid Size
Height
Snap Grid Colour
Resolution
Editing Page Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
23.7.1.6 Grouping and Ungrouping
When the Group command is applied to two or more selected objects, they behave as if they
are a single item — clicking on a constituent item causes the group to be selected, and clicking
and dragging a single item causes all of them to move.
To group items:
1. Enter Select Mode.
2. Select the required items.
3. Choose the Edit › Group command, or:
Click on the Group icon in the Toolbar, or:
Right click on the group and choose the Group command.
To ungroup a group:
1. Select the group.
2. Choose the Edit › Ungroup command, or:
Click on the Ungroup icon in the Toolbar, or:
Right click on the group and choose the Ungroup command.
Resizing Groups
Groups cannot be resized.
23.7.1.7 Select Mode
Before you can move, resize, group / ungroup or delete any item, you must enter Select mode.
To enter select mode:
1. Click on the Select icon in the Toolbar, or:
Press the Esc key.
Page 201
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To select multiple items:
1. Hold the Shift key down and click on each of the required items in turn, or:
Point to a blank area of the map, hold down the mouse button, drag a rectangle around
the items you want to select, then release the mouse button.
To unselected a selected item:
1. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the selected item.
To select all items on the page:
1. Choose the Edit › Select All command.
Press Ctrl-A.
Notes
The current mode of the Map Design Editor is displayed in the Status Bar.
When an item or group is selected, its properties are displayed in the
Properties Region.
23.7.1.8 Move / Resize / Delete Items
This page describes how to move, resize, or delete selected items, multiple items or groups.
To move a group or item(s):
1. Select the group or item.
2. Click on the selected group or item and hold down the mouse button.
3. Drag the selected group or item to a new location, then release the mouse button.
To resize an item:
1. Select the item.
The item is enclosed by a rectangular boundary box that has grab handles on each side
and / or corner.
Solid black grab handles (pictured above left) indicate that the item can be resized by
click and drag. Outlined grab handles in each corner (pictured above centre) indicate
the item cannot be resized by click and drag. Items with Aspect Lock Property set have
grab handles in the middle of each side (picture above right), and maintain their aspect
ratio when resized.
2. Click on one of the grab handles and hold down the mouse button.
3. Drag the grab handle to a new location, then release the mouse button.
Notes
Groups cannot be resized.
The size of a Text Item can only be adjusted with the Font Property.
Page 202
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To delete a group or item(s):
1. Select the group or item(s).
2. Choose the Edit › Delete command, or:
Right click on the selected group or item(s) and choose the Delete command, or:
Click on the Delete icon in the Toolbar, or:
Press the Delete key, or:
Drag the selected group or item(s) out of the Editor region, then release the mouse
button.
23.7.1.9 Drawing and Placing Items
You can place items from the General Tab, Alarm Points Tab and CCTV Tab on the selected
page using two different methods: dragging and dropping or selecting and placing.
How you select and place an item is dependant upon whether it is a fixed shape item, variable
shape item or line.
•
Fixed shape items have a predetermined size, which you cannot change.
However, you can adjust the size of Text items using the Font Property.
•
Variable shape items are rectangular items whose size you can specify.
•
Lines can be selected and placed in two ways: individually or many.
To add an item to the page by dragging and dropping:
1. Click on any item in the Add Items Region Tabs and hold down the mouse button.
2. Drag the item to the required region on the page, then release the mouse button.
To place a fixed shape item by select and click:
1. Select the item.
2. Click on the page to place it.
To place a variable shape item by select and click:
1. Select the item.
2. Click on the page to locate the top left corner of the item.
3. Click again on the page to locate the bottom right corner of the item.
To place an individual line by select and click:
1. Select the Line item.
2. Click on the page and hold the mouse button to define the start point of the line.
Page 203
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Drag to the required end point of the line, then release the mouse button.
To place many lines by select and click:
1. Select the Line item.
2. Click on the page to define the start of the first line.
3. Click on the page to locate the end of the line.
The line is drawn and a new line is started.
4. Repeat 3 for each line you want to draw.
5. When you have finished drawing lines, press Esc or click on the Select icon in the
Toolbar.
23.7.1.10 Measurement
The units of measurement used by the Map Design Editor are: Inches, Millimetres, Centimetres,
and Metres.
These options can be set from the Ruler Context Menu, the View Menu, or by the Units
Page Property.
23.7.2 Context Menus
Context menus are menus that are displayed when you right click on an item.
Click on a link below to view the context menu associated with an item.
Single Items
Line
Image
Multiple Items
Group
Ruler
Page
23.7.2.1 Single Items
The context menu for single items contains the following commands:
Cut
Cuts the selected item(s).
Copy
Copies the selected item(s).
Paste
Pastes the copied or cut item(s) — only displayed when a item has been
copied.
Delete
Deletes the selected item(s).
Test Action
Tests an item’s Action property. See Action and Set Action.
Set Action
A submenu that contains items present in the design that can be linked to
the selected item. See Action and Set Action.
Align to Grid
See Align to Grid.
Bring to Front
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Page.
Send to Back
See Ordering Items / Groups on the Page.
Help
Displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected
item(s).
Page 204
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.7.2.2 Line
In addition to the context menu commands listed for Single Items, the context menu for a line
contains:
Align to axis
This moves the end point to make the line parallel with the horizontal or
vertical axis.
23.7.2.3 Image
In addition to the context menu commands listed for Single Items, the context menu for an
image item with an image assigned contains:
Restore Size
This command restores the image to its original size if it has been stretched
or shrunk.
Restore Aspect
This command restores the image to its correct aspect ratio at its current
size.
23.7.2.4 Multiple Items
In addition to the context menu commands listed for Single Items, the context menu for multiple
items contains:
Group
See Grouping and Ungrouping.
23.7.2.5 Group
In addition to the context menu commands listed for Single Items, the context menu for a group
item contains:
Ungroup
See Grouping and Ungrouping.
23.7.2.6 Ruler
The context menu for the Ruler contains the following commands:
Inches
Sets the units of measure to inches.
Millimetres
Sets the units of measure to millimetres.
Centimetres
Sets the units of measure to centimetres.
Metres
Sets the units of measure to metres.
None
Turns off the ruler, e.g. for “not to scale” diagrams.
23.7.2.7 Page
The context menu for a page contains the following items:
Cut
Cuts the selected page.
Copy
Copies the selected page.
Paste
Pastes the copied or cut page — only displayed when a page has been cut
or copied.
Delete
Deletes the selected page.
Zoom in
See Zoom Function.
Zoom out
See Zoom Function.
Show Full Page
Causes the page view to show the entire page.
Help
Displays the help page (from this help file) associated with the selected
item(s).
Page 205
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.8 Properties Region
This area displays the properties of the item selected on the page, and also for the page itself.
The properties of all pages and items in the Map Design Editors define their appearance and
behaviour on the page and in the Alarm Viewer Application. Changes to the properties of
anything within the Map Design Editor are instantly reflected on the page.
Click on an entry below to view more information on it.
Shape Item Properties
View Item Properties
Image Item Properties
Group Item Properties
Line Item Properties
Alarm Area Properties
Text Item Properties
Alarm Point / Output Properties
Multiple Item Properties
Page Tabs
Editing an Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
Update / Cancel
These buttons, located beneath the properties area, respectively update (save) the map design
and exit the application.
23.8.1 Item Properties
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Shape Item Properties
Image Item Properties
Line Item Properties
Text Item Properties
View Item Properties
Button Item Properties
Alarm Area Properties
Alarm Point / Output Properties
Video Source Properties
Multiple Item Properties
Group Item Properties
Page 206
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.8.1.1 Shape Item Properties
A shape selected on a page has the following properties:
Name
Shape
X
Border Colour
Y
Fill Colour
Width
Line Width
Height
Shadow
Aspect Lock
Density
Anchor
Shadow X
Angle
Shadow Y
Transparency
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
23.8.1.2 Image Item Properties
An image item has the following properties:
Name
Angle
X
Image
Y
Transparency
Width
Shadow
Height
Density
Aspect Lock
Shadow X
Anchor
Shadow Y
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
Page 207
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.8.1.3 Line Item Properties
A line has the following properties:
Name
Colour
X
Line Width
Y
Shadow
Width
Density
Height
Shadow X
Anchor
Shadow Y
Transparency
Aligning to Axis
A line can be aligned to the closest axis (straightened) by selecting Align to Axis from the
Context Menu.
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
23.8.1.4 Text Item Properties
A text item selected on a page has the following properties:
Name
Font
X
Multi-line
Y
Colour
Anchor
Shadow
Angle
Density
Transparency
Shadow X
Text
Shadow Y
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
Page 208
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.8.1.5 View Item Properties
A view item is used in conjunction with Set Action to link an alarm point to an area on the map,
so that when you double click on the alarm point, the linked view is displayed.
A view item has the following properties:
Name
Angle
X
Anchor
Y
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
23.8.1.6 Button Item Properties
A button item is used in conjunction with Set Action to link a button to an area on the map, so
that when you double click on the button, the linked view is displayed.
A button item selected on a page has the following properties:
Name
Colour
Tooltip
Image
Action
Common Icon
X
Shadow
Y
Density
Anchor
Shadow X
Angle
Shadow Y
Font
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
Page 209
PAC SecureNet
23.8.1.7 Alarm Area Properties
An alarm area has the following properties:
Name
Font
Action
Colour
X
Shadow
Y
Density
Width
Shadow X
Height
Shadow Y
Anchor
Angle
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
23.8.1.8 Alarm Point / Output Properties
An alarm point/output has the following properties:
Name
Colour
Action
Shadow
X
Density
Y
Shadow X
Anchor
Shadow Y
Angle
Font
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
Page 210
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.8.1.9 Video Source Properties
A video source item selected on a page has the following properties:
Name
Font
X
Colour
Y
Shadow
Anchor
Density
Angle
Shadow X
Display Mode
Shadow Y
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
23.8.1.10 Multiple Item Properties
When multiple items are selected on the page, the Properties Region displays a set of
properties common to all of the selected items. When these common properties are edited, the
respective property for each item is changed as well.
The following properties are displayed when multiple items are selected:
Anchor
Shadow
Angle
Density
Aspect Lock
Shadow X
Transparency
Shadow Y
Editing the Item’s Properties
See Editing Properties for more information.
Page 211
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.8.1.11 Group Item Properties
A group item is two or more items that have been grouped using the group command command.
A group item has the following properties:
Name
Transparency
X
Shadow
Y
Density
Anchor
Shadow X
Angle
Shadow Y
Aspect Lock
Creating a Group
See Grouping and Ungrouping for more information.
Ungrouping a Group
See Grouping and Ungrouping for more information.
Editing Group Properties
Any changes made to the properties of a group are applied to the relevant properties of its
constituent items.
See Editing Properties for more information on editing groups.
Resizing a Group
Groups cannot be resized.
Page 212
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.8.2 Individual Properties
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Name, Tooltip and Action Properties
X, Y, Height and Width Properties
Resolution and Units Properties
Background Properties
Aspect Lock Property
Anchor and Angle Properties
Display Mode
Transparency Property
Text Property
Font Property
Multi-line Property
Fill Colour and Colour Property
Line Width Property
Image Property
Shadow Properties
Shape Properties
Snap Grid Properties
Common Icon Property
23.8.2.1 Name, Tooltip and Action Properties
Name
The name of the item. This is not an essential property, unless the item
selected is a view which you intend to link through other items, and is only
required when configuring the Action Property.
Tooltip
This is only applicable to page and button items. Text entered for a page is
displayed when the mouse is held over the page tab in the Alarm Viewer.
Text entered for a button is displayed when the mouse is held over the
button in the Alarm Viewer.
Action
See Action and Set Action.
23.8.2.2 Action and Set Action
Action is a property that allows one item to be linked to another. Double clicking on the item
displays the linked item, e.g. display Page 2.
To set an item’s Action property:
1. Right click on the item and choose the Set Action command, then select the target
item. The name of the target item is automatically entered into the selected item’s
Action property, or:
In the item’s Action property, enter the name of the target item (defined in the target
item’s Name property).
To test an item’s Action property:
1. Right click on the item and choose the Test Action command, or:
Double click on the item.
If it is correctly configured the item to which it is linked is displayed in the page area.
Page 213
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.8.2.3 X, Y, Height and Width Properties
X
The distance, in the selected units, of the item’s origin from the left side of
the page. The origin location is set using the item’s Anchor property.
Y
The distance, in the selected units, of the item’s origin the item from the top
of the page. The origin location is set using the item’s Anchor property.
Width
The width of the object, in the selected units.
Height
The height of the object, in the selected units.
23.8.2.4 Resolution and Units Properties
Resolution
Controls how detailed an object can be drawn on a page. The higher the
value, the more detailed a feature can be and the more you can zoom in.
This value, represents the number of pixels per selected unit within the page.
Specifically affects bitmap images, causing them to be resampled so that
their resolution is not higher than the resolution of the page.
Also affects text objects and lines whose size is specified in pixels.
Units
Allows the user to select the units that the page is displaying values in. See
Measurement.
23.8.2.5 Background Properties
Background
Colour
Click on the button on right hand side to display the colour selector — this
enables you to select the page’s background colour.
Background
Image
Click on the button on right hand side to display the Open File dialog. This
allows you to navigate to and select a graphic file, which is displayed on the
map’s selected side. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF,
TIF and WMF are supported.
To remove the image, select its property again and press the Delete key.
23.8.2.6 Aspect Lock Property
The Aspect Lock Property determines how a shape changes when it is resized using the
mouse.
Aspect Lock
Off
You can resize the object’s width and height separately, i.e. they are not
resized in proportion to each other.
Aspect Lock
On
When you resize the object, the object’s width and height are resized in
proportion to each other.
Page 214
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.8.2.7 Anchor and Angle Properties
Anchor
The Anchor Property controls where the selected shape’s origin is located.
The origin is the point which it rotates and scales around, and whose
location determines the shape’s X and Y coordinate properties. For View and
Alarm Area items, this property determines the location of their icons within
their boundary frame.
Top
left
Top
Top
right
Left
Centre
Right
Bottom
Bottom
right
Bottom
left
Angle
Entering a value rotates the shape around its origin. A positive value rotates
the item clockwise, and a negative anticlockwise.
The image below shows examples of how the alignment properties affect
an item when it is rotated 45° clockwise. The red dot indicates the shape’s
origin.
Vertical alignment: centre
Horizontal alignment: centre
Vertical alignment: bottom
Horizontal alignment: right
Vertical alignment: centre
Horizontal alignment: left
23.8.2.8 Display Mode
This property toggles the selected video source’s behaviour on the page.
Setting the value to Icon changes the video source item to a camera icon.
Setting the value to Image changes the video source item to a rectangular, live video feed from
that video source, which can then be resized as required.
23.8.2.9 Transparency Property
A value between 0 (opaque) and 100 (transparent).
23.8.2.10 Text Property
Text entered here is displayed in the text item on the page.
Page 215
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.8.2.11 Font Property
This property controls the appearance of the text in the selected item.
Clicking the button on the right hand side displays the font selector — this enables you to select
font type, font style, font size, font effect and character set.
23.8.2.12 Multi-line Property
This property allows a text item to wrap round on more than one line. For example, when this
property is specified as On, a long piece of text can be adjusted by altering its width.
23.8.2.13 Fill Colour and Colour Property
Colour
Sets the colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right side
of the display displays the colour selector.
Fill Colour
Sets the fill colour of the selected item. Clicking on the button on the right
side of the display displays the colour selector.
23.8.2.14 Line Width Property
This property sets the line thickness of the selected line (for lines), or boundary (for shapes).
The default value is 1. Setting this value to 0 turns the line off.
23.8.2.15 Image Property
This property is used to choose the image file that an item displays.
If the image property is specified as a background image for a page, it expands to fill the page,
and cannot be resized.
If the image property is specified as an image for an image item, the image is sized to fit the
image frame, and may therefore appear distorted. An image can be adjusted by using the
image item’s Context Menu.
To add an image to a page or image item:
1. Select the page or item.
2. Click on the button to the right hand side of the Image property.
The Open File dialog box appears.
3. Locate and select a graphic file. The file formats BMP, GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, TIFF,
TIF and WMF are supported.
The image is displayed within the boundary box of the image item.
To remove an image:
1. Select the page or item.
2. Select the Image property.
3. Press the Delete key.
The image is deleted from the page background or from the image item without deleting
it, i.e. leaving an empty frame.
23.8.2.16 Shadow Properties
Shadow
Toggles shadow visibility.
Shadow X
The horizontal offset of a shadow. A positive value causes the shadow to be
displayed to the right of the item.
Shadow Y
The vertical offset of a shadow. A positive value causes the shadow to be
displayed below the item.
Shadow
Density
The darkness of the shadow: 0 makes it invisible, and a value of 100 makes
it black. By default this value is set to 20 (light gray).
Page 216
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
23.8.2.17 Shape Properties
Shape
The type of shape the selected item is: Circle, Square, Triangle, Star,
Pentagon, Hexagon or Burst.
Fill Colour
Sets the colour of the selected item’s fill. Clicking on the button on the right
side of the display displays the colour selector.
Border Colour
Sets the colour of the selected item’s border. Clicking on the button on the
right side of the display displays the colour selector.
23.8.2.18 Snap Grid Properties
Snap Grid
There are three options associated with this property:
No snap grid: No grid / dots displayed. This option disables the “snap to”
when placing items.
Grid: Displays a grid on the page.
Dots: Displays dots on the page.
Snap Grid Size
Sets the scale used by the displayed grid / dots in the units specified in the
Units Properties.
Snap Grid
Colour
Sets the colour of the grid. Clicking on the button on the right side of the
display displays the colour selector.
23.8.2.19 Common Icon Property
Selecting this property displays an pull-down menu of additional icons: selecting one changes
the selected button’s appearance.
23.9 Status Bar
The status bar, located at the bottom of the Alarm Map Designer application, displays the
following information:
1. X and Y coordinates of the mouse pointer, in the selected units for the page.
2. Mode Selected: The icon displayed here reflects the item that has been selected
in the Add Area or Toolbar. For example, it displays a picture of magnifying glass
and the word “zoom” if zoom mode is selected, a shape icon and the word “shape”
if shapes are selected, etc.
3. Operator Name: The name of the operator currently logged on.
4. Zoom Level: The current level of magnification.
23.10 Common Items
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Colour Selector
Font Selector
Page 217
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
23.10.1 Colour Selector
The Color dialog box enables you to select a basic colour or define up to 16 custom colours.
23.10.2 Font Selector
The Font dialog box enables you to select a font face, style, and size; apply specify effects such
as Strikeout and Underline; and select the character set, e.g. Western.
Page 218
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24. Alarm Viewer
24.1 Alarm Viewer — Introduction
Important
This feature is only available if it is included in your PAC SecureNet licence. To enable
this feature, see Upgrade License.
The Alarm Viewer application is used to monitor and manage alarms that occur on your PAC
SecureNet administered access control system.
Alarms occur when Alarm Points are triggered. Alarm points are items capable of generating
alarm events, and take the form of inputs, doors, controllers or 500s.
When an alarm occurs the Alarm Viewer will:
•
Sound an alarm, if defined.
•
Highlight the Alarm Point or its associated Alarm Area in the tab selected in the
Alarm / Areas Board.
•
Display information about it in the active alarm’s window.
•
Highlight its location in the Map Region, if maps are present.
Alarm Viewer Components
Three components are always present:
•
An Alarm / Event Region that includes three tabs: Active Alarms, Event Log Viewer
and Alarm History.
•
The Areas Board.
•
The Alarm Board.
Two other optional components are:
•
The Map Region.
•
The CCTV Region.
Interactive Map
See Interactive Map to view an interactive map of the Alarm Viewer.
24.2 Alarm Viewer Glossary
Alarm Areas
An area that is associated with a PAC 500 for alarm management. Alarm points, such as
doors or inputs, can be associated with alarm areas.
Alarm Point
An alarm point is a input, door, controller or a PAC 500 that has been associated with an
area, and is capable of generating alarm events.
Alarm Sensor Resets
An alarm sensor reset is a relay that is used to reset the condition of inputs associated with
an area.
Area Sounders
An area sounders is a relay that is activated when the area it is associated with goes into
alarm. Area sounders are connected to devices that signal when an alarm has occurred, for
example an alarm bell.
Page 219
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Child area
A child area is an area that is contained by a parent area.
Disarm Privilege
A disarm privilege is assigned to an access group. When that access group is applied to a
keyholder, it gives the keyholder the ability to disarm any armed area associated with that
access group.
Parent Area
A parent area is an area that contains one or more areas within it.
24.3 Interactive Map
Click on a region of the map for further information.
The tab order and / or their regions can be moved about the screen by dragging and dropping
the tabs — see Tear Off Controls. See Example of Regions Moved About the Screen for an
example.
24.4 Alarm Viewer Menus
A different menu is displayed in each Alarm Viewer region:
Page 220
•
File Menu
•
View Menu
•
Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu
•
Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu
•
Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu
•
Alarm Board Menu
•
Areas Menu
•
Map Menu
•
CCTV Menu
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24.4.1 File Menu
Close
Closes the Alarm Viewer.
PC Sounder
Mutes the PC sounder. See Silence Commands for more information.
Acknowledge
All
Displays the Acknowledge Alarm window. See for more information.
Silence All
Displays the Silence All window. See for more information.
24.4.2 View Menu
Refresh
Refreshes the Alarm Viewer.
Show Text
on Toolbar
Buttons
Toggles the appearance of descriptive text on all toolbar buttons in the
Alarm Viewer.
Muster Report
(Only if a muster event to action has been specified.) Displays the Muster
Report.
Windows
Has several commands:
Restore Panes: Displays all tabs and restores undocked windows back to
their default position.
Show all tear off tips: Enables tips to be displayed when attempting to use
the tear off facility.
Don’t show tear off tips: Disables the tear off tip.
Enable / Disable Tearoff: Toggles the tear off facility. If disabled, any
undocked windows can be moved but not docked.
Tech Support Mode: Toggles between default windows settings and
customised windows settings.
A list of windows that can be brought to the front when selected.
Visual
Notification
Selecting this item displays the Visual Notification window.
24.4.2.1 Visual Notification
Visual notification is designed to display an image of the person who is entering a particularly
sensitive area. When a key is presented to a reader that has been specified for visual
notification, an image of the person is displayed and the operator can ensure that the person
attempting to enter the area is the valid keyholder.
Note
The door giving access to the area must have an area assigned in its Alarm
Management tab.
To specify a reader for visual notification:
1. Display the Alarm Viewer.
Page 221
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Choose View › Visual Notification.
The Visual Notification window is displayed.
3. Select the readers that require visual notification.
4. Click on
to close the window.
To verify the identity of the keyholder:
1. Wait for a keyholder to present a key to a reader.
The Visual Verification window is displayed.
2. If the person is not recognised, take the appropriate action, e.g. notify security.
3. Click on
to close the window.
24.4.3 Active Alarms / Event Log / Alarm History Menu
The Active Alarms menu is displayed when the Active Alarms tab is selected.
The Event Log menu is displayed when the Event Log Viewer tab is selected.
The Active History menu is displayed when the Alarm History tab is selected.
These three menus contain the same commands.
Start Automatic
Updates
Starts automatic updating of the list.
Pause
Automatic
Updates
Stops automatic updating of the list.
Acknowledge
Alarm
Acknowledges the selected event / alarm — not applicable to the
Alarm History list.
Show details
for item
Displays details of the appropriate item.
24.4.4 Alarm Board Menu
The Alarm Boards menu is used to select small or large icons.
If an item in the Alarms Boards tab is selected, different options are displayed depending on the
type of item selected.
Page 222
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24.4.5 Areas Menu
The Areas menu is used to select small or large icons.
If an area in the Areas tab is selected, area options are displayed.
24.4.6 Map Menu
The Map menu is displayed if one or more maps exist.
Small Icons /
Large Icons
Toggles the icon sizes on the map viewer.
Zoom In
Enlarges the selected map.
Zoom Out
Shrinks the select map.
100%
Shows the full map.
Zoom to fit
Zooms to the selected item on the map.
24.4.7 CCTV Menu
The CCTV menu is displayed if one or more video sources exist.
Select
Selects a video source.
Enable
Enables a video source to be viewed in the CCTV region.
Expand name
/ Normal
Operation
Expands the selected video source or redisplays the normal view.
Show Names
Toggles the display of the video source name(s) in the CCTV region.
Connect
Connects the video source(s) in the CCTV region.
Save Image
Saves the selected video source image in the My Pictures folder with an
automatically-generated name that includes the camera name and date and
time.
Save Image As
Saves the selected video source image in a specified folder with a specified
name.
Save Image as
Incident Report
Displays the Incident Report Details window which enables you to save the
image with a HTML file containing the image details and a comment. See
Incident Report Details for more information.
24.4.7.1 Incident Report Details
The Incident Report Details window enables you to save the image with a HTML file containing
the image details.
The HTML file includes the Incident Date, Frame Time, Site Name, Camera Name and
Comments.
To save a CCTV image of an incident:
1. Display the Alarm Viewer.
Page 223
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Choose the CCTV › Save Image as Incident Report command.
The Incident Report Details window is displayed.
3. If required, click on the ... button to specify the location where the image file and HTML
file will be saved.
4. If required, specify a name for the image file and HTML file. The default names include
the date and time.
5. If required, enter a comment.
6. If you want to display the HTML file immediately, select the Show Incident Report in
browser after creation check box.
7. Choose the OK button.
After a CCTV image has been saved, the Incident Report Saved Successfully window is
displayed.
To navigate to where the image is stored:
1. Choose the Browse button.
To display the image file:
1. Choose the Open button.
To send the image files via e-mail:
1. Choose the Send button.
The CCTV window is displayed.
2. Enter the recipient details.
3. Choose the Send button.
Page 224
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24.4.8 Context Menu
To display the Alarms context menu:
1. Right click on the selected alarm.
This menu contains the same options as the Alarm Viewer Toolbar, plus:
Show Details of
selected alarm
Shows the details of the selected alarm.
24.5 Alarm Viewer Toolbars
The Alarm Viewer’s main toolbar is located beneath the menu bar.
There are also separate toolbars for each of the following tabs. These toolbars are displayed at
the top of their tab, beneath the tab name.
•
The Active Alarms toolbar.
•
The Event Log Viewer toolbar.
•
The Alarm History toolbar.
•
The CCTV Region toolbar.
24.5.1 Alarm Viewer Toolbar
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
Refresh
This button refreshes the Alarm Viewer application.
PC Sounder
See Silence Commands for more information.
Silence all
See for more information.
Acknowledge all
See for more information.
All Organisations A list of organisational units that are available for filtering. The
default is all organisational units.
24.5.2 Active Alarm Toolbar
The Active Alarms Toolbar is displayed when the Active Alarms tab is clicked. It is displayed
above the icon list.
The Active Alarms Toolbar contains the following icons:
The Play icon refreshes the active alarm list automatically when a new alarm
occurs.
The Pause icon prevents the active alarm list being updated when a new alarm
occurs.
The Acknowledge Alarm icon acknowledges the selected alarm. See
Acknowledge Commands for more information.
Page 225
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
24.5.3 Event Log Viewer Toolbar
The event log viewer has the following toolbar:
The Play icon refreshes the event log automatically when a new event occurs.
The Pause icon prevents the event log being updated when a new event occurs.
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either controller or
PC time dependent on the event source time zone.
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.
The Filter icon displays up to four tabs that allow filter criteria to be specified:
•
Highlight: Select the highlight colour for the filter — only displayed
if specifying a filter. Each filter can be allocated a colour to use in
the Event Log to highlight events. See Highlighting Events for more
information.
•
Category: Select the required categories.
•
Identity: Enter user defined criteria. See Filtering Events with User
Defined Criteria for more information.
•
Time: Select a date and time range for the filter criteria and a CCTV
only checkbox to display only events related to alarms points linked to
a CCTV video source.
Up to four buttons are also displayed:
•
Clone: Copies the currently specified filter criteria to a new event log
tab. See Cloning the Events Log Viewer for more information.
•
Clear: Clears filter criteria that has been applied. (If this button is
greyed out, no events are being filtered out.)
•
Apply: Applies the specified filter criteria.
•
Cancel: Cancels filter criteria that has not been applied.
The Report icon displays the Event Log report that provides print facilities.
The Dock/Undock icon docks or undocks the event log — see Tear Off Controls.
Page 226
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24.5.4 Alarm History Toolbar
The alarm history has the following toolbar:
The Resume updates icon causes the event list to resume displaying events.
The Pause updates icon causes the event list to stop showing new events.
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either controller or
PC time dependent on the event source time zone.
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.
24.5.5 CCTV Region Toolbar
The CCTV region has the following toolbar:
Expand selected
feed
See Expanding Video Sources for more information.
Show all feeds
Shows all enabled video sources.
Select feed
A drop down menu containing a list of all enabled video
sources. Selecting a video source from this list causes it to be
selected (outlined in a red rectangle) in the CCTV board.
Save feed
snapshot
Saves a still image from the selected video source. The image
is saved to the My Pictures folder with an automatically
generated name, consisting of the camera name, the date and
time the still image was saved.
Presets list
Displays a drop down menu containing a list of presets
associated with the selected video source. Selecting a preset
causes the video source to behave according to the conditions
of the preset.
Zoom
Displays a drop down menu containing the following
commands:
Zoom In: Sets the selected video source to zoom in by a large
amount.
Nudge In: Sets the selected video source to zoom in by a
small amount.
Nudge Out: Sets the selected video source to zoom out by a
small amount.
Zoom Out: Sets the selected video source to zoom out by a
large amount.
Zooming can also be controlled using the
mouse and keyboard.
Pan left
See Panning, Tilting and Enlarging for more information.
Tilt up
Tilt down
Pan right
Page 227
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
24.6 Alarm / Event Region
This area contains three tabs:
Active alarms
Clicking this displays the Active Alarms Board.
Event Log
Viewer
Clicking this displays the Event Log Viewer.
Alarm History
Clicking this displays the Alarm History.
24.6.1 Active Alarms
This board is used to display alarm information and manage alarms when they occur.
When the Active Alarms Board is selected, the Active Alarms Toolbar is displayed.
Alarm Information
The Active Alarms tab displays the following types of alarms:
Current
The alarm is currently active and has not been restored or acknowledged.
Restored
The condition that caused the alarm has been cleared, e.g. a door left open
has been closed, but the alarm has not been acknowledged.
Acknowledged
The alarm has been acknowledged, but has not been restored.
Active Alarm Headings
Active alarms are displayed in a list with the following headings:
Time
The date and time when the alarm occurred.
Priority
The priority of the alarm. This is a value between 1 and 99, and it is set in
the Alarm Management tab of the selected Area’s property page in PAC
SecureNet.
Source
The source of the alarm, e.g. a door or input.
Alarm
The type of alarm.
Status
The status of the current alarm.
To add or remove headings:
1. Right click on the headings and check / clear the items as required.
Viewing Associated Active Alarm Information
To view associated alarm information:
1. Double click the active alarm point.
The selected Alarm Board / Areas tab highlights all of items associated with the
selected active alarm.
The Map Region (if displayed) zooms to and highlights the alarm point that is causing
the active alarm.
If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist, with presets
associating them with the active alarm, those feeds are displayed.
24.6.2 Managing Alarms
Alarms are managed using the commands available in the Active Alarms tab. Commands can
be issued to alarms in three different ways:
Page 228
•
The Active Alarms toolbar.
•
The Active Alarms menu.
•
The context menu.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24.6.3 Acknowledge Commands
Acknowledge
The Acknowledge command is used by an Alarm Viewer Operator to record information about
an alarm or alarms that are displayed in the Active Alarms board.
To acknowledge an Alarm:
1. Choose the File › Acknowledge command.
2. Select a predefined response from the Response menu. A response is a pre-defined
phrase that has some relation to the alarm being acknowledged, e.g. “false alarm”, or
“door forced”.
3. If required, enter additional information about the alarm(s) being acknowledged in the
Comment box.
To create alarm responses:
1. In PAC SecureNet, choose the Tools › Options command.
2. In the Organisation Options window, select Alarm Responses.
3. Create or edit alarm responses as required.
Acknowledge All
This command records the same response and optional comment for all occurring alarms.
To acknowledge all recurring alarms:
1. Choose the File › Acknowledge All command, or:
Click on the Acknowledge All button in the Alarm Viewer toolbar.
Acknowledge Selected Command
This command records a response and optional comment for the alarm(s) selected in the
Active Alarms tab.
To acknowledge all selected alarms:
1. Click on the Acknowledge Selected button in the Active Alarms toolbar, or:
Right click on the selected alarms and choose the Acknowledge Selected command.
24.6.4 Silence Commands
Silence
The Silence command silences the PC sound; it has no affect on the alarms.
To silence the PC speaker:
1. Choose the File › Silence command, or:
Click on the Silence icon in the Alarm Viewer toolbar.
Silence All
The Silence All command silences the PC sounder and deactivates all of the area sounders
associated with the areas in alarm.
To silence the PC speaker and the area sounders:
1. Choose the File › Silence All command, or:
Click on the Silence All icon in the Alarm Viewer toolbar.
Page 229
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
24.6.5 Event Log Viewer
This tab displays an Event Log. The information displayed here is identical to the
Event Log in PAC SecureNet, except that different filters can be set.
When the Event Log Viewer tab is selected, the Event Log Viewer toolbar is displayed.
Event Information List
All events are displayed in a list view, which contains the following headings by default:
Date and Time
The date and time the event occurred.
Category
The category of the event.
Originator
The name of the keyholder that caused the event or the type of event from
an hardware item.
Source
The name of the operator or hardware item that is affected by the event.
Description
A description of the event.
To add or remove headings from the Event Log viewer:
1. Right click on the headings.
2. Check or clear the headings as required.
Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information
Notes
Double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer causes the tab selected in the Alarm /
Areas board to highlight items associated with it.
If a map is present, double clicking on an entry in the Event Log Viewer highlights its
location on the Map Region.
Right click an event item to view additional information about it.
24.6.6 Alarm History
This tab displays a list of recent alarm events that have occurred within the selected time range.
This time range is specified in the Number of hours to show box in the bottom right hand
corner of this tab, and is limited to a maximum range of 24 hours. To view alarm information
older than this use the Alarm History report, located in PAC SecureNet’s report tab.
When the Alarm History is selected the Alarm History toolbar is displayed.
Alarm History Column Headings
The following information is displayed:
Date and Time
The date and time at which the alarm was acknowledged.
Originator
The type of alarm from a hardware item.
Alarm Point
The name of the Alarm Point that triggered the alarm.
Description
This field contains the comments entered when an alarm is acknowledged,
or a description of the alarm if it hasn’t been acknowledged.
To add or remove headings from the Alarm History:
1. Right click on the headings.
2. Check or clear the headings as required.
Page 230
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Viewing Additional Active Alarm Information
Notes
Double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer causes the tab selected in the Alarm /
Areas board to highlight items associated with it.
If a map is present, double clicking an entry in the Event Log Viewer highlights its
location on the Map Region.
Right click an event item to view additional information about it.
24.7 Alarm / Areas Board Tab Area
This area contains two tabs:
Alarm Board
Clicking this displays the Alarm Board.
Areas
Clicking this displays the Areas Board.
24.7.1 Areas Board
This board is used to:
•
Issue commands to areas. See Issuing Commands to Areas for more information.
•
Display area status — the appearance of an icon indicates the area’s current state.
See Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States for more information.
•
View additional information — see below.
Notes
When the Areas tab is selected the Areas Toolbar is displayed. See Issuing Commands
to Areas.
When the Alarm Board is selected the menu area displays a menu called Areas. See to
view its commands.
This icon is the default PAC SecureNet icon for Alarm Areas. The appearance of
this icon changes to indicate its current state. See Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States
for more information.
To view associated alarm area information:
1. Double click the required area.
The selected Alarm / Event Information tab highlights all of the events associated with
the selected area.
The Map Region (if displayed) zooms to and highlights the selected area.
If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist, with presets
associating them with the selected area, those feeds are displayed.
To view additional alarm area information:
1. Hold the mouse pointer over an Alarm Area.
A yellow tool tip box appears which contains the area name and a description of the
Alarm Points which that Alarm Area possesses.
Page 231
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
24.7.2 Issuing Commands to Areas
You can issue commands to selected areas in the Areas Board in three different ways:
•
Alarm Board toolbar: The Alarm Area toolbar is displayed when the Areas tab is
clicked. It is displayed above the icon list.
•
Areas menu: The Areas menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu bar in the
top left side of the application.
•
Context menu: The context menu is displayed by right clicking on an area.
Areas Commands
The commands that can be issued to areas from any of the methods listed above are:
Arm
Selecting this command displays the Arm Areas window. This window
contains a list of all alarm areas, with the areas selected on the alarm board.
The areas that were selected when this command was performed are
selected in the list of alarm areas that the window contains.
Arming an area causes all of the doors associated with that area to become
bolted or locked. This prevents keyholders without a disarm privilege access
to that area.
Also, arming an area may be a prerequisite for it reporting one or more
alarms. When areas are configured in PAC SecureNet, the events that can
cause it to go into alarm can be set to always cause an alarm, i.e. regardless
of whether it is armed or disarmed; or only when armed, i.e. the area must
be armed for that event to cause an alarm.
An Alarm Area can be armed immediately, or after a specified delay in
minutes and seconds.
Example
A parent area contains several children; arming the parent causes its
children to become armed as well.
Disarm
This action is only enabled if an armed area is selected.
Disarming an area causes all of the doors associated with it to become
unbolted or unlocked, allowing keyholders with appropriate privilege access
to it.
Silence
See Silence Commands for more information.
Omit
Omitting an area prevents it from being armed when its parent area is
armed. An omit can be either permanent or for the next arm only — this
choice is given in the Omit Alarm Points from Arm window that is displayed
when this option is selected.
Example
A parent area contains several children, and one of the children requires
maintenance work — if that child is omitted it does not become armed if its
parent is armed, but all other children are armed.
Reinstate
This option causes any area that has been omitted to become active again.
Example
An omitted child area that has been reinstated becomes armed when its
parent is armed.
Refresh Area
This option causes an area’s Alarm Sensor Resets to reset any of its inputs
that are in alarm to a reset state.
Page 232
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Views
This option toggles Alarm Point icon size between large and small.
24.7.3 Alarm Board
This board is used to:
•
Issue commands to alarm inputs. See Issuing Commands to Alarm Points for more
information.
•
Display area status — the appearance of an icon indicates the area’s current state.
See Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States for more information.
•
Viewing additional information — see below.
When the Alarm Board tab is selected the Alarm Board Toolbar is displayed. See Issuing
Commands to Alarm Points.
Notes
The different types of icons displayed on the Alarm Viewer are listed below. Their
appearance changes to indicate their state.
PAC 500 servers.
PAC 500 series controllers.
Doors.
24-hour alarm inputs.
Controlled alarm inputs.
Information only inputs (only appears in Map Region).
Outputs (only appears in Map Region).
See Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States for more information.
To view associated alarm point information:
1. Double click the required alarm point.
The selected Alarm / Event Information tab highlights all of the events associated with
the selected alarm point.
The Map Region (if displayed) zooms to and highlights the selected alarm point.
If the CCTV Region is present, and one or more CCTV feeds exist with presets
associating them with the selected alarm point, those feeds are displayed.
To view additional alarm point information:
1. Hold the mouse pointer over an Alarm Point.
A yellow tool tip box appears which contains:
Name
The name of the Alarm Point.
Page 233
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Type
The type of Alarm Point.
Area
The name of the Alarm Area the Alarm Point is associated with.
Mode
The mode assigned to the Alarm Point in its configuration page in
PAC SecureNet.
Status
The status of the Alarm Point.
24.7.4 Issuing Commands to Alarm Points
There are two types of commands that can be issued to alarm points:
Door only commands
Commands that can only be issued to doors.
General commands
These are commands that can be issued to all types of alarm points — doors, controllers
and inputs.
General commands
You can issue general commands to any selected alarm point(s) in three different ways: from
the Alarm Board toolbar, from the Alarm Board menu, or from the context menu.
Door only commands
You can issue door only commands to the selected doors in two different ways: from the Alarm
Board menu, or from the context menu.
Toolbar
The Alarm Board toolbar is displayed when the Alarm Board tab is clicked. It is displayed
above the icon list.
Alarm Board Menu
The Alarm Board menu is displayed in the Alarm Viewer menu list in the top left side of the
application.
Context Menu
You can display the Context Menu by right clicking on an alarm point.
Alarm Input Commands
Omit
Omitting an alarm point prevents it from being armed when its parent area
is armed. An omit can be either permanent or for the next arm only — this
choice is given in the Omit Alarm Points from Arm window that is displayed
when this option is selected.
Alarming an area with one or more alarm input omitted causes it to be
partially armed.
Reinstate
This option causes any alarm point that has been omitted to become active
again.
Views
This option toggles Alarm Point icon size between large and small.
Page 234
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24.7.5 Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States
The table below shows the different states of alarm areas and alarm points.
Area
(Default
icon)
Server
Controller Door
24-Hour
Alarm
Controlled
Alarm
input
Disarmed
Armed
Partially Armed
In Alarm
Acknowledged
Restored
Omitted Once
Omitted
Permanently
Acknowledged
and Silenced
In Alarm and
Silenced
Restored and
Silenced
Two additional icons, the 24-hour information
map region of the Alarm Viewer.
The output icon changes depending on its state:
and output
icons only appear in the
indicates output is on.
indicates output is off.
Acknowledged
This state occurs when an alarm or alarms have been acknowledged.
Page 235
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Silenced
This state occurs when the Silence All command is executed.
An area can be silenced in any three of its alarm states: Acknowledged, In
Alarm and Restored.
Restored
This state occurs when the cause of an alarm is removed, e.g. a forced door
has been closed, but the alarm hasn’t been acknowledged.
Omitted
This state occurs when one or more Alarm Points or Alarm Inputs have been
omitted. See for more information on omitting Alarm Points, or for more
information on omitting Alarm Inputs.
Partially Armed
This state occurs when an Alarm Area is armed, and one or more of the
constituents (Alarm Points or Alarm Areas) have been omitted.
24.7.6 Selecting Items on the Alarm Board and the Areas Board
To select an individual item:
1. Click on it.
To select multiple items:
1. To select consecutive items, click the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then click
the last item, or:
To select nonconsecutive files or folders, press and hold the Ctrl key, then click on
each item, or:
Click and hold the mouse button, drag the selection rectangle around the items that you
want to select, then release the mouse button.
24.8 Map Region
The Map region is only displayed if a map design is present. Map designs are created using the
PAC SecureNet Alarm Map Designer Application.
Multi-Page Maps
If the map has multiple pages, tabs allowing you to select them are displayed at the top of the
viewer.
Viewing Alarms
When an alarm has occurred, the Alarm Point which has caused it is zoomed to on the map.
Viewing the Map
The following commands can performed on the selected map by using the Map Menu or by right
clicking a part of it:
Small Icons /
Large Icons
Toggles the icon sizes on the map viewer.
Zoom In
Enlarges the selected map.
Zoom Out
Shrinks the select map.
100%
Shows the full map.
Zoom to fit
Zooms to the selected item on the map.
Issuing Commands to Areas, Alarm Points and Outputs
You can issue commands to the areas, alarm points and outputs assigned to the map by right
clicking on one and using the context menu.
An area’s context menu contains the same commands as those offered in the Areas Board.
An alarm point’s context menu contains the same commands as those offered in the
Alarm Board.
An output’s context menu contains the following commands: Turn output on, Turn output off,
Show details of output, and Small icons.
Page 236
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
24.9 CCTV Region
The CCTV region is displayed if one or more video sources are present. Video sources are
configured using the PAC SecureNet Video Source module.
When the CCTV region is present, a CCTV menu is displayed in the main menu, a CCTV
Region Toolbar is displayed in the CCTV Region, and pictures from the video sources that have
been selected using the Select icon on the CCTV Region Toolbar are displayed.
Commands can be issued to video sources by using:
•
The CCTV Region Toolbar.
•
The CCTV Menu.
•
The context menu — right clicking in this region displays the same options as the
CCTV menu (except Select).
•
Additional controls shown when video sources are expanded.
24.9.1 Expanding Video Sources
Double clicking or expanding a video source (using the CCTV menu, context menu or
Toolbar command) in the picture area causes that feed to enlarge to the size of the CCTV
Board.
When a video source is expanded, additional features are made available, provided the
selected video source supports them. The controls available are PTZ (pan, tilt and zoom) and
Archiving.
24.9.2 Panning, Tilting and Enlarging
To pan or tilt the video feed:
1. Click on a point in the expanded video feed. The camera pans and tilts so that the point
where you clicked is centred in the video feed, or:
Click and hold the mouse button so that the mouse pointer turns into a yellow blob, then
drag the mouse pointer in the direction that you want to pan or tilt. Return the pointer to
its initial position or release the mouse button to stop, or:
Use the horizontal scroll bar to pan and the vertical scroll bar to tilt, or:
Use the Pan / Tilt buttons in the CCTV toolbar, or:
Use the Arrow keys.
To zoom (enlarge) the video feed:
1. Scroll the mouse wheel forwards to zoom in and scroll it backwards to zoom out, or:
Drag the zoom slider to the right of the vertical scroll bar up or down, or:
Use the Zoom buttons in the CCTV toolbar, or:
Press + to zoom in and - to zoom out.
Page 237
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
24.9.3 CCTV Archive Tools
Double clicking or expanding a video source in the CCTV Region displays archiving tools. This
is a feature available to video sources that support archiving.
•
The Event control represents a short clip of archived video with a defined start point
and end point.
When you select an event or an alarm, the Event control is set to show a clip from 5
seconds before the event to 15 seconds after.
•
The Tape Counter control shows the date and time of the archive recording
currently being shown.
•
The Play Speed controls shows the playback speed selected for viewing
recordings.
To enable the archiving tools:
1. Clear the Live check box in the bottom right hand corner of the window so that the
check box is empty.
To find a point in the selected clip:
1. Click on the Left Arrow button to the left of the Event controls to rewind to the start of
the selected clip, or:
Click on the Right Arrow button to the right of the Event controls to go to the end of the
selected clip, or:
Drag the track bar in the centre to move rapidly to any point in the selected clip.
To play a clip, rewind, or fast forward:
1. Click on one of the playback buttons to the right of the Play Speed box. Pressing fast
forward or rewind again increases the speed.
Alternatively, enter a number in the Play Speed box — Speed 0 is paused, speed 1 is
normal real time playback. Larger values are fast forward. Negative values are reverse.
Alternatively, slide the track bar to the right of the Play Speed box to the left or right.
Page 238
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To play past the end of the selected clip:
1. Move to the end of the selected clip.
2. Press the Play button.
To move to any position in the video archive:
1. Enter a date, hour, minute and second in the Tape Counter.
To set the start or end of a video clip:
1. Use the Tape Counter controls to select a time.
2.
Click on the Clip Start button
clip, or the Clip End button
clip.
to the left of the Event controls to set the start of the
to the right of the Event controls to set the end of the
24.10 If an Alarm Occurs
When an alarm occurs...
When an alarm occurs the Alarm Viewer performs the following actions:
•
An entry appears in the Active Alarms tab, displaying information about the alarm.
•
The appearance of the Alarm Input and Alarm Area changes to indicate an alarm is
occurring.
•
If an alarm sound has been defined, it sounds on your PC. The alarm sound is
defined in the Alarms Response option of the Organisation Options window
(Tools › Options in PAC SecureNet).
What to do if an alarm occurs....
If an alarm occurs, you have the following options:
Silence all alarms: Turn off the PAC SecureNet alarm sound and stop any alarm sounders.
View Alarm Point information: To view more information about the Alarm Point generating the
alarm, select it in the Active Alarms List and use the Show Details command.
View Alarm Map information: Assuming that an alarm map has been created:
•
Double clicking an entry in the Active Alarms list displays the Alarm Map and
highlights the item that is generating the alarm.
•
Double clicking the Alarm Area that is currently in alarm zooms to that area on the
Alarm Map.
Acknowledge alarms: Alarms can be acknowledged in two ways:
•
If many alarms have occurred they can be acknowledged with one comment using
the Acknowledge All command.
•
Individual comments can be recorded for the alarm selected in the Active Alarms
List by using the Acknowledge command.
Restore an alarm: To restore an alarm, its cause must be removed, e.g. a door left open must
be closed.
How to stop (clear) an alarm
An alarm is stopped (cleared) when it has been restored and acknowledged.
Acknowledged
The operator has noticed the alarm and acknowledged it via the menus, toolbar or context
menu.
Page 239
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Restored
The cause of the alarm has been removed, e.g. a door left open has been closed.
What to do after an alarm...
To reset an alarm:
1. Select any Alarm Areas that have associated Alarm Points with the Requires Reset
option set and choose the Reset Alarm command.
Page 240
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
25. Event Facilities
25.1 Event Log
Note
If simple alarm monitoring is being used, i.e. alarm management is not licensed, see
Alarm Events and System Alarms.
To display the event log:
1. Choose Tools › Event Log from the Menu bar or choose Tools › Event Log from the
Explorer bar and the event log is displayed.
Notes
The event log viewer can display no more than 100 events. By default, you will see
the 100 most recent events; if you apply a filter to the event log viewer, you will see no
more than 100 events that fit the filter criteria.
The event log can be moved about the screen by dragging and dropping the tab — see
Tear Off Controls.
Event Log Toolbar
The Play icon refreshes the event log automatically when a new event
occurs.
The Pause icon prevents the event log being updated when a new event
occurs.
The Controller Time icon displays the data and time based on either
controller or PC time dependent on the event source time zone.
The Universal Time icon displays the data and time based on UT time.
Page 241
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
The Filter icon displays up to four tabs that allow filter criteria to be specified:
•
Highlight: Select the highlight colour for the filter — only
displayed if specifying a filter. Each filter can be allocated
a colour to use in the Event Log to highlight events. See
Highlighting Events for more information.
•
Category: Select the required categories.
•
Identity: Enter user defined criteria. See Filtering Events with
User Defined Criteria for more information.
•
Time: Select a date and time range for the filter criteria and a
CCTV only checkbox to display only events related to alarms
points linked to a CCTV video source.
Up to four buttons are also displayed:
•
Clone: Copies the currently specified filter criteria to a new
event log tab. See Cloning the Events Log Viewer for more
information.
•
Clear: Clears filter criteria that has been applied. (If this button is
greyed out, no events are being filtered out.)
•
Apply: Applies the specified filter criteria.
•
Cancel: Cancels filter criteria that has not been applied.
The Show as a Report icon displays the Event Log report that provides print
facilities.
The Refresh icon updates the event log.
The Dock / Undock icon docks or undocks the event log — see Tear Off
Controls.
Available Column Headings
Vid
An icon is displayed if the event has an associated video clip.
Controller
Time /
Universal Time
The date and time the event occurred based on the controller time or on the
UT time depending on the icon selected on the toolbar.
Category
The category of the event — i.e. alarm, system, authorised, denied comms,
audit, or restored.
Originator
The name of the keyholder that caused the event or the type of event from
an hardware item. If the keyholder has an associated key colour, the colour
of the key is also shown.
Source
The name of the operator or hardware item that is affected by the event.
Description
A description of the event.
Organisation
The organisational unit where the event occurred.
To select which columns to display:
1. Right click on the column heading.
2. Select which columns to display from the drop-down menu.
To display information on items associated with the event:
1. Right click on the event and choose Show Details for item or Navigate to item from
the shortcut menu.
Page 242
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To display information on an audit event:
1. Right click on the event and choose Show Audit Details from the shortcut menu.
To create a keyholder when an unknown keyholder event occurs:
1. Right click on the event and choose the Copy keycode command.
2. Select the Keyholder module and choose the New button.
3. Select the Keyholder Keys tab and choose the Add New Key button.
4. Right click on the Key Code field, choose the Paste command and the copied key code
is entered in to the field.
5. Select each tab in turn and enter appropriate information for the new keyholder.
6. Choose the Add button.
To forgive an anti-passback violation by a keyholder:
1. Right click on the event and choose the Anti-Passback Forgive command.
To close the event log:
1. Click on the
icon on the tab.
25.1.1 Highlighting Events
To allocate a colour to an events filter:
1. Display the Event Log.
2.
If the Filter bar is not already displayed, click on the
Filter icon.
3. Select a filter or choose the Add button.
4. Enter the filter name and (if required) a description.
5. Choose the Colour button and select a colour for the event filter, e.g. red for alarms.
6. Specify a filter by selecting the appropriate tab(s) and specifying the filter criteria, e.g.
select the Category tab and deselect all event types except the Alarms check box.
Page 243
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
7. Choose Apply to display the results.
In this example alarms are shown in red and denied access events in yellow.
To move an entry in the list:
1. Select the event filter.
2. Select the up or down button next to the Colour button.
Note
The position in the list determines the colour used if an event satisfies more than one
search criteria.
To delete an entry from the list:
1. Select the event filter.
2. Choose the Delete button.
To save a set of event filters:
1. Select Rules.
2. Enter the file name and (if required) a description.
3. Choose the Save button.
To load a set of event filters:
1. Select Rules.
2. Choose the Load button.
To specify the main filter:
1. Select Filter.
2. Specify a filter by selecting the appropriate tab(s) and specifying the filter criteria.
3. Choose the Apply button.
Page 244
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Note
The main filter may filter out highlighted events.
25.1.2 Filtering Events with User Defined Criteria
To enter user defined criteria:
1. Open the First Item drop-down list and select the type of item which you want to filter,
or select (Any) to filter all types of items.
2. If the type of item is not (Any), do one of the following:
Enter a search term in the text box to the right. You can enter a wildcard character * to
match any text. For example, if the type of item is Controller and you enter the search
term 512*, all events in which the controller name starts with “512” are found.
Alternatively, click on the
icon and select the name of an item. All events
containing that item are found.
Alternatively, if the type of item is Keyholder, click on the
icon to display the
Advanced Keyholder Search window — see Advanced Keyholder Search.
3. If you want to specify a second filter criterion, select and if both criteria should be true,
or select or if either criterion can be true.
4. Use the Second Item drop-down list and text boxes to specify a second criterion.
5. Choose the Apply button.
Note
When you apply a filter to the event log viewer, you will see no more than 100 events
that fit the filter criteria.
25.1.3 Cloning the Events Log Viewer
You can clone the events log viewer. This creates a copy of the events log viewer in a new tab
with the criteria that are currently specified.
To clone the events log viewer:
1. Display the events log viewer — see Event Log for more information.
2. If necessary, make changes to the filter criteria — see Filtering Events with User
Defined Criteria for more information.
Page 245
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Choose the Clone button.
Notes
•
The cloned event log viewer is shown as another tab alongside the original event
log viewer. The cloned event log viewer is given the title Event Log. The original is
renamed Event log n, where n is the total number of event log tabs.
•
All cloned event log viewers are displayed as separate items in the View ›
Windows submenu.
•
The cloned event log viewer tabs can be moved to different locations using normal
tear off control behaviour. If you close and re-open the Alarm Viewer, all event log
viewer tabs will re-open in the same locations. If you reset tear off controls, or select
Tech Support mode, all event log viewer tabs return to their original locations.
•
You can close any of the cloned event log viewer tabs when you no longer need
them, including the original event log viewer. If you close all the event log viewers,
you can create a new one using the View › Event Log Viewer command.
25.2 Alarm Events and System Alarms
If you are using simple alarm monitoring, i.e. alarm management is not licensed or selected
alarms are not assigned to an area, the events to be classed as alarms can be specified by
customisation and be monitored by the System Alarms window.
The window is displayed if alarm events or system alarms are detected at login and when a new
alarm is generated.
The window can also be displayed by choosing Tools › System Alarms — see Menus.
To acknowledge the alarm(s), choose the Clear All button.
To update the alarm list, choose the Refresh button.
To prevent the window being displayed other than at login, select the Do not pop up this
dialog again (until next login) check box.
To close the window, choose the Close button.
25.3 Alarm Alerts
Alarm Alert Popups
If Alarm Alert popups are enabled, alarms are displayed in the bottom right corner of the
screen, even when PAC SecureNet is not running.
Page 246
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To enable Alarm Alert popups:
1. Choose File › Activate Alarm Alerts — see Menus.
Changes will not take effect until you log out of Microsoft Windows and log in again.
To close an Alarm Alert popup:
1.
Click on the
icon.
To disable Alarm Alert popups:
1. Choose File › Activate Alarm Alerts — see Menus, or:
Right click on the Alarm Alerts icon and choose Activate Alarms Alerts, so that the
command is deselected.
Changes will not take effect until you log out of Microsoft Windows and log in again.
Alarm Alert Icons
When an alarm occurs, an Alarm Alerts icon appears in the Windows taskbar. The icon’s
appearance depends on the area / alarm state:
Disarmed Area
Armed Area
Partially Armed Area
In Alarm
Acknowledged Alarm
Restored Alarm
Server Connection Lost
To perform Alarm Alert tasks:
1. Right click the Alarm Alert icon.
The following commands are available:
Show User
Interface
Displays the Logon window.
Run Alarm
Viewer
Displays the Logon window.
Option ›
Popups for
access events
Enables or disables No popup for access events, Popup access
denied only, or Popup any access events.
Option ›
Popups for
alarm events
Enables or disables All alarms in one popup, One popup per
alarm area, or Popup for each alarm point.
Option ›
Activate Alarm
Alerts
Enables or disables the Alarm Alert popups.
Exit
Exits PAC SecureNet and disables Alarm Alert popups.
Page 247
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
25.4 Event Archive
To prevent the event log growing too big, old events must be deleted or archived, i.e. saved to a
file. To specify archiving / deleting options, see Event Archiving.
Notes
•
Event archiving / deleting can be performed manually or automatically.
•
If you archive old events, two files are created for each archiving operation. The file
EKdate.CSV contains archived events; the file AUDdate.CSV contains the archived
audit trail. All archive files are in CSV (Comma-Separated Value) text file format.
•
Only one archiving / deleting operation can be performed each day. Archiving /
deleting can only be performed if the minimum number of events is available.
•
Automatic archiving / deleting is not possible until events are older than the
specified age.
•
Automatic archiving / deleting is performed at 18:00 every day, as long as the
minimum number of events are available, the events are older than the specified
age, and manual archiving / deleting has not been performed that day.
•
When manual archiving / deleting is selected, you must specify the maximum
number of events that the event log can contain. When the event log reaches this
maximum number, an Event log archive due window is displayed.
To archive or delete old events manually:
1. Do one of the following:
Choose Tools › Event Archiving from the Menu bar or Explorer bar, or:
Choose the Yes button in the Event log archive due window.
The Event Archiving window is displayed.
2. If you specified that old events should be archived, enter a location for the archive file in
the Archive Destination box, or use the Browse button to select a location.
3. Select the From oldest event up to and including events on this day option and
specify a date, or:
Select the Percentage of events to archive option and specify the percentage.
4. If you want to see a summary of what will be archived or deleted, choose the Preview
button.
5. When you are ready, choose the Start button.
Page 248
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
To view the event archive history:
1. Select the Archive History tab.
The following information is displayed for each archived file:
Archive Date
The date the archive was made.
Events File
The file name of archived events.
Audit File
The file name of archived audit trail data.
Earliest Event
The time and date of the earliest event in the archive file.
Latest Event
The time and date of the latest event in the archive file.
Discarded
Whether events have been discarded instead of archived.
Reloaded
Whether archived events have been restored.
Location
The physical location of the archive media.
Comment
The comment entered by the operator when events were archived.
To edit the archive file information:
1. Choose the Edit button.
The Archive File Status window is displayed.
2. If the archive file is present, select Present. Select Lost if the archive file has been lost
or deleted.
3. If necessary, enter the correct location of the archive file in the Location box, or use the
Browse to locate the archive file.
4. Create or edit the comment as required.
5. Choose the OK button.
Page 249
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To display the event archive statistics:
1. Select the Event Statistics tab.
The following information is displayed:
Total events
The number of events not archived.
Earliest event
timestamp
The earliest event not archived.
Latest event
timestamp
The latest event not archived.
Total days of
events
The number of days not archived.
Events logged
per day (last 7
days)
The average number of events logged per day over the last seven
days.
25.5 Event Archive Restore
The Events report is used to restore archived events. See Reports.
To restore an archived event file:
1. Run the Events report and specify a range of dates.
If these dates require an archived event file, the Event Archive Restoral window is
displayed.
2. Tick the check box next to each file that you want to restore.
3. If you want to restore a file from a different location, select the file, then click on Specify
an alternative directory for 'file'… and select a different location.
4. Choose the Restore button.
The files are restored and the results of the Events report are displayed.
Page 250
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Note
If a file is not found, an error message is displayed which then redisplays the Event
Archive Restoral window. You can remove the missing file from the list and use the
Restore to restore the other files.
25.6 Event to Action
Important
This feature is only available if it is included in your PAC SecureNet licence. To enable
this feature, see Upgrade License.
The Event to Action facility enables system actions to be activated based on an event occurring
within the system. Each set of actions for a specified event is called and each scenario can
specify one or more actions linked to a specific event.
•
To specify a scenario, see Event to Action Details.
•
To add each event and its associated action in the scenario, see Event to Action
Configuration.
•
To configure muster and evacuation, see Muster and Evacuation.
•
To configure alarm auto-acknowledgement, see Automatic Alarm Management.
Note
The Event to Action facility for 1100/2100/2200 Series Door Controllers is implemented
via the Output Activation tab of the Controller Outputs page.
25.6.1 Event to Action Details
To specify a scenario:
1. Choose the Tools › Event to Action Configuration command or choose Event to
Action Configuration in the Shortcut tab.
The Event to Action Configuration window is displayed.
2. If necessary, select the organisational unit.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Choose the New button.
5. Specify the following options:
Name
The name of the scenario, specified by data entry.
Description
A description of the scenario, specified by data entry.
Page 251
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Time Profile
The time profile during which the scenario is active, selected from a
drop-down list.
Notes
Public time profiles from other org units are shown with their org unit prefix, or the full
org unit name if it has no prefix.
You can see public time profiles from all org units, even those you have no privilege for.
If you selected a legacy Org Unit, only public daily time profiles are listed.
6. Choose the Add button — it changes to Update.
Now add the event and associated actions.
25.6.2 Event to Action Configuration
To specify the event and add its associated actions in the scenario:
1. Specify the scenario as described in Event to Action Details.
2. Select the Configuration tab.
3. Specify the following options:
Type
The type of item that may generate the event, selected from a dropdown list.
Name
The name of the item that may generate the event, selected from a
drop-down list.
When
Condition
The event that triggers the action, selected from a drop-down list.
To add an event:
1. Choose the Add button.
2. Specify the following options:
Page 252
Perform
The action to take if the event occurs, selected from a drop-down
list.
Target
The output to turn on or off if the event occurs, selected from a dropdown list. Not used if the action is to send an e-mail or remote IP
event.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Action Settings
PAC SecureNet
This can be either of the following:
•
The recipient and subject of an e-mail. Specified by
selecting the field, then clicking on the
button to
display the Configure Send Email window.
•
The target address, target port and message of an
remote IP event link event. Specified by selecting the
field, then clicking on the
button to display the
Remote IP Event Link Configuration window.
Not used if the action is to turn an output on or off.
To delete an event:
1. Select the event.
2. Choose the Delete button.
To test an event:
1. Select the event.
2. Choose the Test button.
To confirm any changes to the scenario:
1. Choose the Add / Update button.
To cancel any changes to the scenario:
1. Choose the Cancel button.
To delete a scenario:
1. Select the scenario.
2. Choose the Delete button.
Important
If licensed for remote event-to-action, inputs detected by one PAC 500 can be selected
to trigger actions on a different PAC 500.
If licensed for remote IP event link, events detected by a PAC 500 can trigger a TCP
message to a remote server.
These remote actions are intentionally distinguished from normal (local) actions
because they require the PC to be switched on, require the target PAC 500 or server
as well as the source PAC 500 to be working, and they take longer to activate because
the events have to get back to the event manager before any action can be taken.
Because of this, remote actions can have a timeout set in the System Settings window.
If the initiating event does not reach the event manager within this timeout, the event
manager does not perform the action. Instead it sends a message to the log. The
timeout could be reached after a communications failure and recovery, or if a huge
amounts of events are being handled.
25.6.3 Configure Send Email
To configure an email that is sent if a specified event occurs:
1. Display the Event to Action Configuration window as described in Event to Action
Details.
2. Select Send e-mail in the Perform field.
Page 253
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3.
Click on the
icon in the Action Settings field.
The Configure Send Email window is displayed.
4. Specify the following options:
Keyholder
The name of the keyholder to whom the email is to be sent, selected
from a drop-down list. The keyholder must have an email address
specified, and the email address must be in SMTP format, e.g.
[email protected].
Subject
The subject of the email, specified by data entry.
Send cause of
action
An indication that the cause of the action should be included in the
email, specified by check box.
Message
The message to be included in the email, specified by data entry.
To confirm any changes:
1. Choose the OK button.
To cancel any changes:
1. Choose the Cancel button.
25.6.4 Configure Remote IP Event Link
To configure a remote IP event link event:
1. Display the Event to Action Configuration window as described in Event to Action
Configuration.
2. Select Remote IP Event Link in the Perform field.
3.
Click on the
icon in the Action Settings field.
The Remote IP Event Link Configuration window is displayed.
4. Specify the following options:
Page 254
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Target Address
The server name of the TCP packet will be sent to, specified by data
entry.
Target Port
The port the TCP packet will be sent to, specified by data entry.
Message
The message to send, specified by data entry.
Termination
Character(s)
An optional sequence of termination characters, specified by data
entry. These characters are entered as hex codes because they are
not typically printable characters.
To confirm any changes:
1. Choose the OK button.
To cancel any changes:
1. Choose the Cancel button.
To reset the default settings:
1. Choose the Default button. The defaults are specified on the
Organisational Unit Details window, which can be displayed by choosing Tools ›
Options.
Important
The remote IP event link events are distinguished from normal (local) actions because
they require the local PC and target server to be switched on as well as the source
PAC 500 to be working. Because of this, remote actions can have a timeout set in the
System Settings window. If the TCP message does not reach the server within the
timeout, the event manager does not perform the action. Instead it sends a message to
the log. The timeout could be reached after a communications failure and recovery or a
huge amounts of events are being handled.
25.6.5 Automatic Alarm Management
Automatic Alarm Management — Introduction
Using Event to Action, it is possible to configure area / alarm management to operate
automatically in response to external triggers. This includes:
•
Arming areas
•
Disarming areas
•
Bolting areas
•
Bolting doors, etc.
This allows an operator to manage the security system without using PAC SecureNet at all.
This is useful in cases when it is not practical or desirable for security guards to have access to
SecureNet.
Alarm Auto-Acknowledgement
Once an alarm is triggered on an alarm point, SecureNet will not allow that alarm point to be rearmed until the alarm has been acknowledged.
In these circumstances, you can use Event to Action to acknowledge alarms in response to a
predefined trigger. For example, you could configure a PIN reader to grant access to a door,
which would result in acknowledging all alarms for the specified area.
To configure alarm auto-acknowledgement:
1. Specify a scenario as described in Event to Action Details.
2. Select the Configuration tab.
3. Specify the following options:
Page 255
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Type
The type of item that may generate the event, selected from a dropdown list.
Name
The name of the item that may generate the event, selected from a
drop-down list.
When
Condition
The event that triggers the action, selected from a drop-down list.
4. Choose the Add button.
5. Click in the Perform box and choose Acknowledge Remote Area Alarms.
6. Click in the Target box and choose the area to acknowledge on the local or remote
PAC 500.
7. Choose the OK button.
Note
Acknowledging a parent area will result in the acknowledgement of all child areas.
Order of Actions
Event to Action allows multiple actions to be performed in response to a single trigger. The
system attempts to process the actions in order, but remote actions take longer to carry out than
local actions.
For example, consider the following two actions:
1. Acknowledge remote area “AREA1”
2. Arm area “AREA1”
The second action will be processed locally before the first action can be run. This will result in
the area failing to arm.
There are a number of solutions that may apply. For example, make the second action trigger a
momentary relay, then arm the area when the relay is reset.
25.7 Muster and Evacuation
Important
This feature is only available if it is included in your PAC SecureNet licence. To enable
this feature, see Upgrade License.
Page 256
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
The Muster and Evacuation facility works through the Event to Action facility, which enables
a system action to be activated based on an event occurring within the system. Each set of
actions for a specified event is called a scenario and each scenario can specify one or more
actions linked to a specific event.
•
To specify an alarm point for muster, see Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster.
•
To specify a scenario, see Specifying a Scenario for Muster.
•
To add each event and its associated action in the scenario, see Adding the Muster
Event and Action.
25.7.1 Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster
In order to configure a muster alarm, several conditions must be fulfilled.
•
The digital input must be an alarm point.
•
The Input Mode must be a 24-Hour Alarm.
•
The alarm must be assigned to an area.
To set an alarm point as the digital input:
1. Select the Navigator tab followed by the Door option.
2. Select the door to which the Muster event is to be connected.
3. Select the Access tab.
The appropriate SIG frame shows the Reader selected in the Muster Configuration
process and the name of the Muster event.
Note
Once a Muster has been configured the SIG details are not editable within this screen.
To ensure that the Input Mode is a 24-Hour Alarm:
1. Select the Navigator tab followed by the Hardware option.
2. Select the controller through which the Muster event is configured.
3. Select the reader through which the Muster event is to be configured.
4. Select the Inputs tab, then select the relay through which the Muster event is to be
configured.
Page 257
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
5. Select the Input Configuration tab.
Note
This must be completed before the Muster configuration can be created, otherwise the
muster configuration fails and an error message appears.
To ensure that the alarm is assigned to an area:
1. Select the Navigator tab followed by the Hardware option.
In the tree list view of the Connected Controllers a list of the Muster controllers is
displayed along with the associated doors.
2. Select a Muster Controller to display its properties.
The properties frame displays tabs for Controller Details, Doors, Inputs, Outputs and
Alarm Management. Within the Inputs tab are the Input Configuration and Alarm
Properties tabs.
3. Select the Alarm Properties tab and the Alarm Area box in order to assign the alarm to
an area for display with the Alarm Viewer.
Note
If the area is disassociated from the alarm an error message appears.
Page 258
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
25.7.2 Specifying a Scenario for Muster
To specify a scenario:
1. Choose the Tools › Event to Action Configuration command or choose Event to
Action Configuration in the Shortcut tab.
The Event to Action Configuration window is displayed.
2. If necessary, select the organisational unit.
3. If necessary, select the Details tab.
4. Choose the New button.
5. Specify the following options within the Details tab:
Name
The name of the scenario, specified by data entry.
Description
A description of the scenario, specified by data entry.
Time Profile
You cannot set a time profile for a muster scenario. If you attempt to
save a muster scenario with a time profile set, an error message is
shown.
6. Choose the Add button — it changes to Update.
Now add the event and associated actions.
25.7.3 Adding the Muster Event and Action
To add an event and specify the muster action:
1. In the Event to Action Configuration window, select the Configuration tab.
2. Specify the following options:
Type
The source of the input signal (specified by drop-down menu list)
must be a Controller Input.
Name
The name of the signal provider (specified by drop-down menu)
When condition
A description of times in which the scenario is active (selected from
a drop-down list), e.g. when Input normal, Input tamper cleared, etc.
Page 259
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Choose the Add button.
A new entry is created with Perform, Target and Action settings fields.
4. Specify the following options:
Perform
Enter Muster for this option.
Target
Not applicable for Muster configuration.
Action Settings
This box remains empty, except for an
expand button. Click on
this button to display the Muster Configuration window.
25.7.4 Configuring the Muster Action
Once the expand button inside the Action Settings box has been selected, a new Muster
Configuration window opens and the following options are available: General, Server Printers
and Readers.
To set the General options:
1. Select the General tab.
2. Specify the following options:
Page 260
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Muster Name
PAC SecureNet
A Muster name must be added.
The OK button remains grey until a name has been entered.
All alarms must be assigned to an area.
Alarm reset
If checked, the muster does not stop until the alarm generated by
requires
the muster start has been acknowledged and cleared.
acknowledgementIf not checked, then once the digital input (24 hour alarm point which
triggered the event to action) has returned to its normal state, the
muster stops.
To set the Server Printer:
1. Select the Server Printers tab.
2. If necessary, open the drop-down list and select a printer, then choose the Add button
to add it to the list.
3. In the main list box, select the printer to be used for generating the Muster report.
This can be any printer configured on the PC on which the PAC SecureNet server is
installed.
Page 261
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
4. Select the General tab again.
Because you have selected a printer, further options are available in the Report
Printing Setup section.
5. Specify the following options in the Report Printing Setup section:
Repeat Delay
Select the time, in minutes, to specify the report printing frequency.
Repeat Count
Select the number of times the Muster report is required to be
printed.
To set the Readers options:
1. Select the Readers tab.
The list of available readers is displayed for selection.
2. Select one or more reader(s) to be used for Mustering.
Note
Any readers selected for mustering are not available for normal access use.
3. Once the Muster configuration has been completed, choose the OK button to accept
the changes, or choose the Cancel button at any time to abandon the changes.
Page 262
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Note
Only one Muster Configuration is available per Organisational Unit.
If an attempt is made to add a second Muster Configuration, the following error
message appears.
Choose OK to acknowledge and close this window.
25.7.5 Adding Further Events and Actions
The name of the Muster Configuration created now appears in the Action Settings tab of the
Event to Action window.
You can now add more actions to perform or delete an action. Test is not available when
configuring a Muster.
To add a scenario:
1. Select the scenario.
2. Choose the Add button.
To delete an event:
1. Select the event.
2. Choose the Delete button.
To confirm any changes to the scenario:
1. Choose the Add/Update button.
To cancel any changes to the scenario:
1. Choose the Cancel button.
To delete a scenario:
1. Choose the Delete button.
Page 263
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To close the Event to Action Configuration window:
1. Choose the OK.
25.7.6 Muster Operation
After a Muster alarm is raised:
•
Muster mode is entered — the event log shows an alarm raised.
•
Alarm viewer maximises to show the area where the alarm has been raised.
•
The Muster report window opens.
•
The Initial Muster report optionally prints.
•
The Muster report on screen refreshes each time a token is presented to any reader
and/or every minute if no token is presented.
•
Muster mode remains active until the associated activating alarm is cleared, i.e. the
alarm is acknowledged and the alarm state is returned to normal.
Notes
•
The Alarm viewer only displays if it is already running or if the option to
automatically open in the event of an alarm being raised has been selected in the
currently logged on operator’s options.
•
The Muster report window only opens if the Alarm viewer opens.
•
If the Alarm viewer is closed then the Muster report window is also closed.
•
If the Muster report window is closed it can be re-opened from within the Alarm
viewer, View › Muster Report.
Each time a token is presented to a Muster reader, the Event log will show two events:
•
A Token has been presented to the Muster reader.
•
The Keyholder has been mustered, i.e. the keyholder’s name now appears on the
Muster report, and the Muster screen and report are refreshed.
If a token is used within the area when no muster alarm is in process, the report screen
refreshes, showing the last known location of all keyholders.
Page 264
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
26. Other Facilities
26.1 Modems
To configure a modem:
1. Select the Hardware module in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the channel the modem is connected to.
3.
Choose Hardware › Modems from the Menu bar, or click on the
toolbar.
The Modems window is displayed.
icon in the
4. Select a modem from the list of available modems.
5. Specify the following options as required:
Use this
modem
The modem is enabled for use, specified by check box.
Name
The name of the modem, specified by data entry.
Dialback
number
The telephone number for dialback to the PC, specified by data
entry and enabled by check box.
Current
Number
The current telephone number of the modem (automatically
entered).
To dialup / hangup a modem:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the dialup channel and choose Hardware › Dial Up, Show Call Progress or
Hang Up from the Menu bar, or:
Right click on the dialup channel and choose the Dial Now, Show Call Progress or
Hang Up command.
The Dialup Connection window is displayed.
Page 265
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
3. Choose Dial Now to dialup the modem, or Hang Up to hang up the connection, or
Close to close the window.
Resetting the Dialup Password
If a Failed authentication for dialup channel message is obtained, you may need to
reset the dialup password.
26.2 Modem Initialization String
Note
This applies to PAC 512 / 202 controllers only.
If additional parameters are required in the modem initialisation string (see the manufacturer’s
modem documentation), you can specify the additional parameters before taking the controller
to its remote location and connecting the modem.
You should connect the controller on a direct line and probe it. You can then specify the
additional parameters. After specification, you can move the controller to its remote location,
connect it to its modem and probe it again.
To specify additional parameters for the modem initialization string:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Right click on the controller and choose Set Modem Initialisation String, or select the
controller and choose Hardware › Set Modem Initialisation String from the Menu bar.
The Modem Initialisation String window is displayed.
3. Select the Additional Parameters checkbox and enter any additional parameters
required for the modem.
26.3 Database Backup
To backup the database:
1. Choose Tools › Backup Database from the Menu bar or from the Explorer bar.
The Backup window is displayed.
2. Enter a name for the backup file in the Type a name for the backup file text box.
3. If you want to back up the event log, make sure the Backup Events Table check box is
ticked.
Page 266
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
4. The location where the backup will be stored is shown in the lower half of the dialog
box. If you want to set a different backup location, choose the Options button to display
the Organisation Options dialog box — see System Settings.
5. Choose the Backup button.
To backup the database from the Command Prompt:
1. Start a Command Prompt window.
2. Enter the following command:
"C:\Program Files\PAC SecureNet\Bin\Bin.NET\PACUI.exe" /BACKUP
Where C:\Program Files is the location where you installed PAC SecureNet.
Notes
•
This command cannot be performed on a client PC.
•
You can create a scheduled Windows Task to provide an automated, regular
backup. See Scheduling Regular Backups.
To restore the backup, see Restore Database.
26.3.1 Scheduling Regular Backups
A Windows Scheduling Task can be created to provide an automated regular backup.
Notes
•
Further information on running Task Scheduler is given in the Microsoft Windows
help file.
•
This command can only be used on the server PC.
To schedule a regular backup:
1. Choose Start › Settings › Control Panel › Scheduler Tasks.
The Scheduled Tasks window is displayed.
2. Select Add Schedule Tasks.
The Schedule Task Wizard window is displayed.
3. Choose the Next button and use the Browse facility to locate the PACUI.exe file in the
Bin\Bin.Net folder of the PAC SecureNet installation.
4. Double click on the PACUI.exe file and specify the task name and when the task is to
be performed.
5. Choose Next and enter the user name of the computer (in domainname\username
format), then enter a password and confirmation.
6. Choose Next and select the Open advanced properties for this task when I click
Finish check box.
7. Choose Finish and add a space followed by the word /BACKUP to the Run command,
e.g.:
"C:\Program Files\PAC SecureNet\Bin\Bin.NET\PACUI.exe" /BACKUP
8. Choose OK and backup files are created as scheduled. The backup file format name is
EKA_yearmonthday_hourminute.ekb (e.g. EKA_20080927_1200.ekb) and they are
located in the default folder.
26.4 Import
Note
Database import can only be performed by an Operating System Administrator.
Page 267
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To import a database:
1. Choose File › Import from the Menu bar.
The File Import window is displayed.
2. Select the type of import file from the list and use the Browse facility to select the file to
import.
3. Choose the Import button.
Notes
To import a database from an Easikey 99/1000, you should extract the database from
the controller using the Easikey Manager Upload / Upgrade Kit (part no. 21408).
After an import a database download is required on all channels.
When importing an Easikey Manager database, the following are not imported:
Page 268
•
Dialup schedule
•
Flat extra information
•
Staff access
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
26.5 Licensing
Your PAC SecureNet licence determines the limits on the features which are available to you,
e.g. the number of doors or keyholders you can have on your system.
Important
If you attempt to break these limits, e.g. by adding more keyholders than you are
licensed for, a warning message is displayed.
You have two options:
•
Make sure your system stays within your current licence limits, or:
•
Upgrade your licence — see Upgrade License for more information.
26.5.1 Upgrade License
You can obtain a new licence key to use more facilities, e.g. more keyholders and doors.
You must contact your license provider to obtain a new license key. They require your system
fingerprint number and your current license key. These are displayed on the License Keys
window.
Important
Make a note of the license key. If you upgrade and re-install PAC SecureNet, you must
re-enter the license key.
Page 269
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To copy your system fingerprint number:
1. Choose Tools › Upgrade License from the Menu bar.
The License Keys window is displayed.
2. In the Fingerprint section, choose the Copy button.
To upgrade the software license:
1. Choose the New License button and a new window is displayed.
2. Enter your new product license key provided by the license provider.
3. Choose the OK button.
4. Repeat for any feature pack licenses.
To delete a license key:
1. Select a license key.
2. Choose the Delete button.
To print the software license details:
1. Choose the Print button.
To close the window:
1. Choose the Close button.
26.6 Configure Peripherals
You can connect an administration reader (desktop reader) to a controller via PC interface kit.
This administration reader can be used to assign keys to keyholders.
The Admin Reader tab configures the COM port that the administration reader is connected.
The Encoder tab specifies additional information required if an MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card
Writer is being used as an administration reader.
To configure the administration reader:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Choose Tools › Configure Peripherals.
The Configure Peripherals window is displayed.
Page 270
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
3. If necessary, select the Admin Reader tab.
4. Select the channel that has the administration reader connected.
5. Select the Click to test check box, present a key to the reader, and the key’s code
should be displayed.
If the token number does not appear, check:
•
The administration kit is connected to the correct port on the PC.
•
The administration kit is powered up.
•
The administration kit is correctly wired to the desktop reader,
administration computer and controller — if one is connected via the
administration kit.
•
If a 1100/2100/2200 master controller has been configured on the
administration kit channel, the administration kit cannot be configured if
the master controller is not connected or communicating. If this occurs,
deselect the Online check box on the master controller Details tab.
To specify additional information for an MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:
1. Select the Encoder tab.
2. Select the PC communications port that has the administration reader attached.
Important
Ensure that the encoder is not connected to a COM port that has been configured for
something else.
3. Select the coercivity (High or Low).
4. Select the density at which information is written to the card (range 75 to 210 bits per
inch).
Page 271
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Important
Consult the reader manufacturer’s documentation for correct settings.
To close a window:
1. Choose the Close button.
To encode a magnetic stripe card:
1. See Encode Keycode.
26.7 Manage Controller Firmware
You can add updated firmware for the PAC 500 series to the PAC SecureNet database, and
then download it to the servers and controllers.
To add the controller firmware:
1. Copy the firmware file to the Firmware Images folder.
2. Choose Tools › Manage Controller Firmware from the Menu bar.
The Manage Controller Firmware window is displayed.
3. If servers and controllers have been specified, select the appropriate tab.
4. To delete a firmware version that has already been added, choose the Delete button.
5. Choose the Add button.
The Controller Firmware Files window is displayed.
6. Navigate to the Firmware Images folder.
7. Select the required firmware file and choose Open or double click on the file.
The Manage Controller Firmware window is then updated with the following information:
Firmware
Version
Page 272
The firmware that has been added.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Firmware Type
The type of firmware added. Different types may provide different
features.
Min Board Rev
The minimum revision number of the printed circuit board required
for a download to the controller.
Max Board Rev
The maximum revision number of the printed circuit board required
for a download to the controller.
Support
Hardware
The type of controllers supported by this firmware.
8. Choose the Close button.
To download the added firmware to a server or controller:
1. Select the Hardware module.
2. Select a server or controller in the List View.
3. Click on the Tasks button and choose Firmware download from the drop-down menu
or choose Hardware › Firmware download from the Menu bar.
The Manage Firmware window is displayed.
4. If necessary, select the firmware version.
5. Choose the Download button.
6. Repeat for each controller.
Resetting the Server Password
If an Authorisation failed (password reset may be required) message is obtained, you may
need to reset the server password.
26.8 Change Password
To change a password:
1. Choose Tools › Change Password from the Menu bar.
The Change Password window is displayed.
2. Enter the old password.
3. Enter the new password (at least 6 characters) and confirm password.
4. Choose OK.
Page 273
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
26.9 Reset Password
A password is used to establish communication between the PC and a server / controller. If
the PC or a server / controller is changed, the password needs to be reset at the PC and the
server / controller.
This procedure may be required if:
•
A Failed authentication for offline channel message is obtained.
•
A Failed authentication for dialup channel message is obtained.
•
An Authorisation failed (password reset may be required) message is obtained.
To reset the password:
1. Select Hardware in the Explorer bar.
2. Select the channel, dialup channel, or PAC 500 TCP/IP channel.
3. Choose Hardware › Reset Password from the Menu bar, or:
Right click on the selected channel and choose the Reset Password command.
The Reset Password warning is displayed.
4. Choose OK.
The Reset Password window is displayed.
5. Power down the controller or server.
6. Press and hold the One-Touch™ button for approximately 7 seconds whilst restoring
the power.
The LED goes out when the password has been reset and then resumes normal
flashing.
7. When the LED flashes at its normal rate, release the One-Touch™ button.
8. Choose OK to close the window.
Page 274
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
26.10 Edit Privilege Templates
The Operator Privilege Templates window enables you to edit the predefined
operator privilege templates, or create your own.
To display the Operator Privilege Templates window:
1. Choose the Tools › Operator Privilege Templates command.
The Operator Privilege Templates window is displayed.
To create a new template:
1. Choose the New button.
The new template is created with the name New Template.
To create a copy of an existing template:
1. Select the template in the Templates list.
2. Choose the Copy button.
The new template is created — it has the same name as the original template with
(Copy) appended.
To edit an existing template:
1. Select the template in the Templates list.
To modify the selected privilege template:
1. In the Name box, enter a name for the template.
2. In the Description box, enter a description for the template.
3. In the Privilege level box, enter the privilege level for the template.
4. To specify the parts of the system that this template gives access to:
i.
Select the Navigation tab.
ii.
Tick the View check box(es) to specify the functions that operators with this
template can view.
iii. Tick the Create check box(es) to specify the functions that operators with this
template can create.
iv. Tick the Update check box(es) to specify the functions that operators with this
template can update.
Page 275
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
v.
Tick the Delete check box(es) to specify the functions that operators with this
template can delete.
5. To specify the tools that this template gives access to:
i.
Select the Tools tab.
ii.
Tick the View check box(es) to specify the tools that operators with this template
can view.
iii. Tick the Update check box(es) to specify the tools that operators with this template
can update.
6. To specify the actions that an operator with this template can perform:
i.
Select the Actions tab.
ii.
Tick the Allow check box(es) to specify the actions that operators with this template
can perform.
To change the order of templates:
1. In the Templates list, select a template to move.
2. Click on the (
) button to move the template up, or:
Click on the ( ) button to move the template down.
This will alter the order of templates in the Template drop-down list on the Operator
Privileges tab.
To delete a privilege template:
1. In the Templates list, select the template.
2. Choose the Delete button.
The template is deleted from the Templates list — you are not asked for confirmation.
To save the templates:
1. Choose the Apply button to apply the changes without closing the window, or:
Choose the OK button to apply the changes and close the Operator Privilege
Templates window, or:
Choose the Cancel button to close the Operator Privilege Templates window without
applying any changes.
Notes
Page 276
•
The Installer, Guest Administrator and No Privileges templates are reserved
system templates. You cannot edit or delete these templates.
•
Only licensed functions are shown in the templates. If you later acquire a licence
for a function, custom privilege templates will not have access to that function by
default.
•
If you tick Update, Create or Delete, then View is ticked automatically. If you untick
View, then Update, Create and Delete are automatically unticked too.
•
Some actions require an associated navigation function to be enabled. For
example, channel dialup requires access to the hardware page in SecureNet. It is
up to you to build logically consistent privilege templates.
•
If a privilege template grants access to a single navigation function, operators who
are allocated that template will automatically navigate to that function when they log
in.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
26.11 Search for a Keyholder
To find a keyholder by Key Seek:
1.
Click on the
icon, or press F3, or choose Tools › Key Seek from the Menu bar.
The Find a Keyholder by Key window is displayed.
2. Select the type of reader.
3. Present the key to the administration reader, or enter the key number.
4. Choose the Find button. All organisational units are searched.
Note
For more options, there are two additional methods of searching for a keyholder:
•
The Search Bar — only available in the Keyholder module.
•
The Advanced Keyholder Search window.
26.11.1 The Search Bar
For a more powerful search than Key Seek, you can find a keyholder using the Search Bar. This
is only available in the Keyholder module.
To find a keyholder using the Search Bar:
1. Select the Keyholder module.
2.
Click on the
icon, or press Ctrl-F, or choose Tools › Search Bar.
The Search bar is displayed.
3. Enter search criteria, e.g. last name, or:
If searching for a key code, select the Key Code check box and card format. Then
present the key to the administration reader or enter the key code.
Note
The Key Code check box must be deselected before adding keys.
4. Choose the Search button.
All keyholders matching the search are listed.
To perform a new search:
1. Choose the Reset button.
2. Enter new search criteria.
3. Choose the Search button.
Page 277
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To select a keyholder:
1. Select the required keyholder.
The keyholder is displayed in the Keyholder Property Page. An icon next to the field
indicates that the field is being used in the search.
To close the Search bar:
1. Choose the Cancel button.
Note
To search other organisational units, click on the Search Organisations link to display
the Advanced Keyholder Search window. See Advanced Keyholder Search for more
information.
26.11.2 Advanced Keyholder Search
For a more powerful search than Key Seek or the Search Bar, you can use the Advanced
Keyholder Search dialog box. This is enables you to search across organisational units.
To find a keyholder using Advanced Keyholder Search:
1. Do one of the following:
Choose the Tools › Advanced Keyholder Search command, or press Ctrl-F; or:
In the Search Bar, click on the Search Organisations link; or:
If you are specifying a keyholder as a filter in the Event Log or the Alarm Viewer Event
Log region, click on the
icon; or:
If you are specifying a keyholder as an operator, click on the
icon, or click on the
icon and choose the ... option.
The Advanced Keyholder Search window is displayed.
2. Enter the organisational unit to search, or select Any to search all organisational units.
3. Enter search criteria, e.g. last name, or:
If searching for a key code, select the Key Code check box and card format. Then
present the key to the administration reader or enter the key code.
Page 278
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
4. Choose the Search button.
All keyholders matching the search are listed.
To perform a new search:
1. Choose the Reset button.
2. Enter new search criteria.
3. Choose the Search button.
To select a keyholder:
1. Select the required keyholder and choose the Select button.
If you were searching from the Keyholder module, the keyholder is displayed in the
Keyholder Property Page. An icon next to the field indicates that the field is being used
in the search.
If you were specifying a keyholder as an operator, the selected keyholder is entered in
the Keyholder Name box on the Operator property page.
If you were filtering events in the Event Log or the Alarm Viewer, the selected keyholder
is entered in the filter criteria.
To close the window:
1. Choose the Close button.
26.12 Encode Keycode
To encode a magnetic stripe card using an MSR206 Magnetic Stripe Card Writer:
1. Select a keyholder and choose Keyholders › Encode Keycode in the Menu bar, or
choose Tasks › Encode Keycode on the Keyholder Details tab, or right click on a
keyholder and choose Encode Keycode.
The Encode Keycode window is displayed, showing a list of keycodes available for
encoding.
Page 279
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
2. Select a keycode and swipe the card and the card is encoded. (You can cancel the
encoding by choosing the Cancel button.)
3. You can select another keycode and swipe another card, or close the window.
To print and encode a magnetic stripe card using an Eltron P420 Card Printer:
1. See Printing and Encoding Magnetic Stripe Cards using an Eltron P420 Card Printer.
26.12.1 Printing and Encoding Magnetic Stripe Cards using an Eltron P420
Card Printer
This section describes how to print and encode magnetic stripe cards using a P420 Card Printer
and should be used in conjunction with the P420 manufacturer’s documentation supplied by the
Zebra Technologies Corporation.
To set up the P420:
1. Connect the P420 to a parallel port of the PC.
2. Insert the P420 CD and install the Windows Driver.
3. Choose Start › Settings › Printers and Faxes and the card printer should be listed.
Page 280
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
4. Right click on the Eltron P420 Card Printer and choose the Properties command to
display the Eltron P420 Card Printer Properties window.
5. Select the Device Settings tab and set With magnetic encoder to Yes.
Important
If encoding is not required, select No.
Page 281
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
6. Select the Magnetic encoder settings and then the Properties button to display the
Encoder Settings window.
7. Choose the Restore Defaults button to enable macro processing, then set start of data
to ${ and end of data to }$.
Page 282
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
8. Choose the Advanced settings button to display the Advanced Settings window.
9. Specify the following settings:
HiCo/LoCo
High or Low (depends on card type)
Encoder
position
Normal
Encoder type
ISO
Track
Track 2
Mode
ISO2
Density
75bpi (or 210bpi if your reader supports it)
10. Choose the Apply button to redisplay the Encoder settings window.
11. Choose Close on the Encoder settings window to redisplay the Device Settings tab.
Page 283
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To test the P420:
1. Select Tools and then choose the Properties button to display the Printer Tools
window.
2. Select the Track 2 check box and enter a dummy code in the data entry field.
3. Insert a card into the card input hopper on the P420 — the magnetic stripe must be on
the underside of the card and towards the back of the P420.
4. Choose the Encode button and the printer should print the card. If the test is
successful, the card is ejected into the card output hopper. If test is unsuccessful, the
card is ejected into the rejected card box.
To print and encode a card:
1. Choose Tools › Card Designer and design a magnetic stripe card for a category (e.g.
Staff) using the ID Card Designer.
Page 284
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
2. Select the Keyholder module and add a keyholder with a key that has a magnetic stripe
card format and the keycode you require for that card. The keyholder must have the
same category (e.g. Staff) as the designed card.
3. Choose Tools › Options › Access Options and specify the magnetic stripe position
and length.
4. Select the Keyholder Details tab and print the keyholder card using the P420.
The card is printed and encoded with the specified keycode. Batch printing can be
performed by selecting a number of keyholders (all must have magnetic stripe cards)
and loading the appropriate number of cards in the printer.
Important
If only printing the back of cards, encoding will not be performed.
When printing and encoding cards for a keyholder that has multiple keycodes assigned,
only the first keycode in the list is encoded. All others are ignored.
It not recommended to print and encode from the ID Card Designer because the
orientation may be incorrect.
26.13 Audit Trail
The Audit Trail module gives the ability to track changes made to the administration system.
A search can be specified to determine what changes an operator had made to items (e.g.
keyholders) over a specified time period.
To display an audit trail report:
1. Choose Tools › Audit Trail or select Audit Trail in the Explorer bar.
The Audit Trail Parameters window is displayed.
2. Select a Start Date and End Date for the search.
3. Select all operators or select an Operator from the drop-down list.
4. Select all items or select an Item from the drop-down list.
5. Choose the OK button.
The Audit Report window is displayed.
Page 285
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Notes
•
You can display different pages of the report by choosing the Next and Previous
buttons.
•
You can refresh the report by choosing the Refresh button.
•
If required, you can print the report by choosing the Print button.
•
You can specify a new search by choosing the Parameters button.
•
You can export the report to Crystal Reports by choosing the Export button.
26.14 Configure Organisations
Important
This feature is only available if it is included in your PAC SecureNet licence. To enable
this feature, see Upgrade License.
Multiple org units allow a customer’s database to be split into logical units for the purposes of
administration. All data from any of the org units is maintained within one database.
Multiple org units are activated by means of additional licensing options. The licenses procured
control the number of permitted org units.
Upon the introduction of a new license, a new module is added to the system called Guest. This
allows access to be granted to keyholders from other org units. These keyholders can be added
to the local org unit access groups in order to gain access to the local org unit.
Keyholder name, title and org unit details are shown on the property page (read only), but no
other details are accessible.
An operator can be assigned privilege rights to multiple org units. The system then allows the
operator to login to any of his privileged org units. The operator can have different operator
templates for each org unit, from No Privilege with no access rights to Installer with full
privileges.
A keyholder in an area that is not in his own org unit may require keyholder forgive, e.g. an
anti-passback lock-out. As a guest, his keyholder record does not appear in the keyholder list at
the org unit site, therefore the forgive operation is available on the Guest module. The operator
can simply select the event and hit Forgive. This can also be done from the event log viewer.
Keyholder Search is available via a search bar within the Guest option.
Key Seek also searches guests to the local org unit.
The operator sees all entries for all privileged org units when using Alarm Viewer. Maps are tied
to particular org units and do not contain items from separate org units. However, multiple maps
are visible simultaneously without the need to log into each org unit individually.
The alarm/area status panes are partitioned to display their entries by org unit.
The event log viewer shows events for the current org unit as well as any system events not
associated with any particular org unit.
The event log contains a new column for org unit name.
Page 286
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
26.14.1 Multiple Org Units Details
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Upgrading your Licence to Activate Org Units
Logging into an Org Unit
Configuring Org Units
Guests
Operators
Reports
Alarm Viewer
Database Backup, Archive and Restore
26.14.1.1 Upgrading your Licence to Activate Org Units
To upgrade a license:
1. Choose Tools › Upgrade License and insert the new code provided.
2. Restart PAC SecureNet.
Notes
•
The Login screen has a new box for Organisation. See Logging into an Org Unit
for more information.
•
The Tools menu now includes the new Configure Organisations command. See
Configuring Org Units for more information.
•
A new module called Guests appears in the Navigator explorer tree. See Guests
for more information.
26.14.1.2 Logging into an Org Unit
When multiple org units are licensed, an Organisation drop-down list appears in the Login
screen.
To select the org unit to log into:
1. Open the drop-down list and select the required org unit.
Notes
The org unit that you selected on your last login is selected by default.
You can use the Options button to hide or reveal the Server name and Organisation
boxes.
26.14.1.3 Configuring Org Units
When multiple org units are licensed, the Tools menu includes a Configure Organisations
command.
This command enables you to configure current org units, add new org units or delete existing
org units according to the limits of your license.
Page 287
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
To configure org units:
1. Choose the Tools › Configure Organisations command.
The Configure Organisations window is displayed.
To add / edit an org unit:
1. If you want to add a new org unit, choose the Add New button, or:
If you want to edit an existing org unit, select the org unit to be edited.
A data entry window is displayed.
2. Specify the following options:
Name
The name of the org unit.
Description
A description of the org unit.
Prefix
A prefix that is added to items to indicate their org unit.
Location
The location of the org unit.
Timezone
The timezone of the org unit’s location.
3. Choose the OK or Apply button.
To delete an org unit:
1. Select the org unit to be deleted.
2. Choose the Delete button.
Non-empty org units cannot be deleted and there must always be one org unit in the
system.
Page 288
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
26.14.1.4 Guests
This option allows keyholders from one org unit to have access to other org units. Access to the
currently-selected org unit is controlled by assigning appropriate access groups to guests.
To display the guest list view:
1. Select the org unit that you want the guest to have access to.
2. Select the Guest module.
3. Enter search criteria to find the guest keyholder.
4. When found, select the guest keyholder.
5. Select the Access tab.
6. Select the access groups for the guest.
26.14.1.5 Operators
It is possible to allocate different administration privileges to operators within the different org
units.
To specify operators and allocate privileges:
1. Select the Operator module.
2. Select an operator or create a new operator.
3. Select the Privileges tab.
4. Select the appropriate Privilege Template for each org unit.
5. Choose the Add or Update button.
Page 289
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
26.14.1.6 Reports
You can only produce reports for the org unit which you are currently logged into.
Some reports may need org unit as one of the report parameters.
26.14.1.7 Alarm Viewer
Alarm Viewer allows a simultaneous view of multiple org units to which an operator has privilege
rights. Every org unit for which the operator has access privileges is incorporated into the alarm
viewer display.
Multiple maps and multiple pages of video sources are available. It is possible to amend the
view to show only one selected org unit, however, in the event of an alarm occurring, the alarm
viewer automatically defaults to show the appropriate map for the org unit area concerned.
26.14.1.8 Database Backup, Archive and Restore
All operators have database back-up privileges. However, if a back-up is initiated, the entire
database for all org units is backed up, not merely the org unit which the operator is currently
logged into.
If an operator carries out a database archive restore, the entire database is restored to the
earlier state, not merely the database for the org unit the operator is currently logged into.
26.14.2 Multiple Org Units Configuration
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
User Interface
Database Download
26.14.2.1 User Interface
Entities from foreign org units are prefixed by the org unit name or prefix.
26.14.2.2 Database Download
Controller downloads include keys from foreign org units with the potential for access. This
means any guest who is allocated an access group has his keys downloaded to the controllers
for that org unit, regardless of whether access is actually required.
26.14.3 Multiple Org Units Configure Actions
Click on the links below for more information on the following topics:
Configuring Org Units
Login
Operator Property Page
Event Log Viewer
Guests
Hardware
Alarm Viewer
Miscellaneous
Page 290
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
26.14.3.1 Configuring Org Units
•
When adding a new org unit, the properties are copied from the current org unit,
e.g. custom labels, extra info, token formats, alarm settings.
•
When adding a new org unit, the current operator and installer are given full
privileges.
•
It is possible to delete an org unit which has an empty database, but not the current
org unit. It is not possible to delete an org unit with any data saved into it.
•
It is possible to change org unit details such as name, description, prefix and
location.
•
Duplicate and blank org unit names are not allowed.
•
Operator privilege is respected. It is not possible to view or delete org units for
which the operator has no privilege. It is not possible to add an org unit unless the
operator has ‘Add’ privileges in the current org unit.
•
Discard (Cancel) gives the appropriate warning if details have been changed and
unsaved.
26.14.3.2 Login
•
When an operator with no privilege to an org unit tries to log into the system, an
appropriate error is displayed and the operator is blocked.
•
Guards log into guard view for each appropriate org unit, i.e. Event Log Viewer or
Alarm Viewer, showing the appropriate data for the logged in org unit.
•
The User Interface remembers the last record accessed for each individual org unit.
•
When the server is unavailable, or the user types an invalid server name, the
system remains responsive and displays a warning triangle next to the server
name. The org unit list becomes unavailable. An error is displayed when the user
attempts to login.
•
When multiple org units are licensed, the login and logout events include a dropdown list of the available org unit names.
•
Session timeouts do not appear in the event log, but are displayed to the user.
26.14.3.3 Operator Property Page
•
Copy operator copies template privileges for all org units.
•
When an operator changes the privileges of his own account in the current org unit,
PAC SecureNet closes so that the operator must login again. The operator may
change privileges in other org units without logging out.
26.14.3.4 Event Log Viewer
•
Events for the current org unit are displayed, plus any system events which are not
associated with any org unit.
•
Simple alarms are reported for the current org unit only.
•
Show details and Navigate To functionality works for all entity types.
•
The Navigate To function takes the user to either the keyholder page for
keyholders in the current org unit, or the guests’ page for keyholders in other org
units.
•
The Show Details function shows either the keyholder page for keyholders in the
current org unit, or the guests’ page for keyholders in other org units.
Page 291
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
26.14.3.5 Guests
•
The operator can assign local access groups to Guest records provided he has
Keyholder privilege in the local org unit.
•
Keyholders who have access to other org units can be deleted.
•
The guests’ list supports multiple select and multiple updating, like keyholders.
•
Search results count appears in the status bar.
•
Key seek navigates to the guests’ page, if the required key is held by a guest, but
only if the operator has privilege to view keyholders in the other org unit.
•
If key seek criteria matches an entry in 2 org units, the local org unit is always
favoured.
26.14.3.6 Hardware
•
Guest keys are downloaded to controller.
•
When probing for 500s or IP controllers, if the IP address is in use by hardware
in another org unit, PAC SecureNet warns you, rather than allowing multiple
assignment.
•
When checking that a dialup channel has a unique phone number, the system
checks channels in all org units.
•
Modems are available to all org units and can be used by channels on different org
units.
26.14.3.7 Alarm Viewer
•
Alarm points are qualified by org unit prefix or name, when there are multiple org
units.
•
Events / Alarms list shows records for all org units which the operator is privileged
to see. There is a column showing org unit name.
•
Video sources are shown for all org units which the operator is privileged to see.
•
Alarms in any of the displayed org units are handled appropriately and can be
acknowledged.
•
Alarms not assigned to any of the displayed org units are not shown.
26.14.3.8 Miscellaneous
Page 292
•
Reports are org unit aware, i.e. data from other org units is not exposed to
unprivileged operators.
•
Data imports into the current org unit only.
•
Duplicate names for entities are allowed if the entities are in different org units.
•
Restoring a database restores all data, not just the current org unit data.
•
Event To Action is limited to entities in the current org unit only.
•
Licensing limits apply to the total number of entities across all org units.
•
SWB hardware can only be added to any org unit which does not have weekly time
profiles.
•
The current org unit name appears on the status bar of the application.
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
26.15 Tear Off Controls
When tear off controls are enabled, you can undock an Event Log, a Report or an Alarm
Viewer region from its default position. You can then display the undocked tab in its own
window or dock it in a new location. This enables you to rearrange the tabs as you require. See
Example of Regions Moved About the Screen for an example.
To enable tear off controls:
1. Choose View › Windows › Enable Tear Off.
To undock a tab:
1. Drag the tab and drop it at the required position, or:
Click on the
icon, or:
In the Event Log, click on the Undock icon in the toolbar.
A tear off confirmation window is displayed, if you have not disabled it.
Notes
An undocked tab window has the standard Windows Minimise, Maximise, and Restore
buttons.
You can also resize an undocked tab window by dragging the edges of the window in
the usual way.
To move an undocked tab:
1. Drag the tab and drop it at the required undocked location; or:
Drag the undocked tab window’s title bar and drag it at the required location.
A tear off confirmation window is displayed, if you have not disabled it.
Tip
If you move an undocked tab by dragging the tab you may accidentally dock the tab in
a new location. To move the tab without docking it, drag the undocked tab window’s title
bar, or hold down the Ctrl or Shift key as you drag the tab.
To dock an undocked tab:
1. Drag the tab and drop it at the required docked position, or:
Click on the
icon, or:
In the Event Log, click on the Dock icon in the toolbar.
A tear off confirmation window is displayed, if you have not disabled it.
To close a tab — not applicable to all tabs:
1. Click on the
icon, if the tab has one.
A tear off confirmation window is displayed, if you have not disabled it.
To display all tabs and restore them to their default locations:
1. Choose the View › Windows › Restore Panes command to restore the tabs
permanently, or:
Choose the View › Windows › Restore Panes command to restore the tabs
temporarily — choose this command again to return to your customised tab layout.
To disable tear off controls:
1. Choose the View › Windows › Disable Tear Off command.
Page 293
PAC SecureNet
Helpfile Ver 3.4
26.15.1 Example of Regions Moved About the Screen
26.15.2 Tear Off Confirmation Window
A tear off confirmation window is displayed when attempting to dock or undock a window.
To disable the facility, select the Do not show this message again check box.
To confirm, choose the OK button.
To cancel, choose the Cancel button.
To display help information, choose the Help button.
To enable this facility, choose View › Windows › Show all tear off tips.
Page 294
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
27. Error Messages
If the error message does not give sufficient information to correct the error, please use our
knowledge database: http://www.stanleysecurityproducts.co.uk/support/.
Page 295
PAC SecureNet
This page left blank intentionally.
Page 296
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Index
0–9
1100/2100/2200 Series, Installation, 6
4-State Door Inputs, 137
A
Access Control Overview, 10
Access Group Advanced Settings, 96
Access Group Details, 95
Access Group Information, 96
Access Group Property Page, 95
Access Groups, 95
Access Groups List View, 95
Access Groups, Example, 20
Access Types, 10
Acknowledge Commands, 229
Action Property, Alarm Map Designer, 213
Action and Set Action, Alarm Map Designer,
213
Active Alarm Toolbar, 225
Active Alarms Board, 228
Active Alarms Menu, Alarm Viewer, 222
Add / Delete / Copy Pages, Alarm Map
Designer , 199
Add / Delete / Update a Area, 94
Add / Update / Delete Channels, 109
Add / Update / Delete a Controller, 122
Add / Update / Delete a Door, 141
Add / Update / Delete a Holiday Profile, 86
Add / Update / Delete a Keyholder, 68
Add / Update / Delete a Lift, 130
Add / Update / Delete a Time or Mode Profile,
83
Add / Update / Delete a Video Source, 142
Add / Update / Delete an Access Group, 97
Add / Update / Delete an Operator, 75
Add Items Region, Alarm Map Designer, 194
Add Items Region, ID Card Designer, 168
Advanced Keyholder Search, 278
Alarm / Areas Board Tab Area, 231
Alarm / Event Region, 228
Alarm Alerts, 246
Alarm Area / Alarm Point Icon States, 235
Alarm Area Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
210
Alarm Board, 233
Alarm Board Menu, Alarm Viewer, 222
Alarm Events and System Alarms, 246
Alarm History, 230
Alarm History Menu, Alarm Viewer, 222
Alarm History Toolbar, 227
Alarm Management, 228
Alarm Management, Auto-Acknowledgement,
255
Alarm Map Designer, 189
Alarm Map Designer Glossary, 189
Alarm Map Designer Interactive Map, 190
Alarm Map Designer Menus, 190
Alarm Map Designer Toolbar, 193
Alarm Point Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
210
Alarm Points Tab, Alarm Map Designer, 196
Alarm Responses, 50
Alarm Viewer, 219
Alarm Viewer Glossary, 219
Alarm Viewer Menus, 220
Alarm Viewer Toolbar, 225
Alarm Viewer Toolbars, 225
Alarm Viewer and Map Design Editor, 199
Alarms, 54
Alarms, Auto-Acknowledgement, 255
Align to Grid, Alarm Map Designer, 191
Align to Grid, ID Card Designer, 185
Anchor and Angle Properties, Alarm Map
Designer, 215
Anchor and Angle Properties, ID Card
Designer, 180
Area Alarm Definitions, 89
Area Alarm Management, 89
Area Alarm Points, 90
Area Appearance, 88
Area Details, 87
Area List View, 87
Area Management, 92
Area Mode Profile Options, 81
Area Outputs, 91
Area Property Page, 87
Areas, 87
Areas Board, 231
Areas Menu, Alarm Viewer, 223
Areas Tab, Alarm Map Designer, 194
Areas, Example, 16
Aspect Lock Property, Alarm Map Designer,
214
Aspect Lock Property, ID Card Designer, 180
Audit Trail, 285
B
Background Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
214
Background Properties, ID Card Designer,
178
Battery, Health and Safety, v
Border Colour Property, Alarm Map Designer,
217
Breadcrumb Trail, 2
Page 297
PAC SecureNet
Button Item Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
Alarm Map Designer, 209
Buttons Region, 170
C
CCTV Archive Tools, 238
CCTV Menu, 223
CCTV Region, 237
CCTV Region Toolbar, 227
CCTV Tab, Alarm Map Designer, 196
Cabling, iv
Capture Source, 160
Card Design Overview, 170
Card Designer Browser, 167
Card Designer Interactive Map, 163
Card Designer Introduction, 163
Card Designer Menus, 164
Card Designer Status Bar, 167
Card Designer Toolbar, 166
Card Face Context Menu, ID Card Designer,
183
Card Face Region, 168
Card Format, Org Unit Options, 43
Categories, Org Unit Options, 52
Change Password, 273
Channel Alarm Management, 104
Channel Areas, 103
Channel Details, 101
Channel Dialback, 107
Channel Dialup, 106
Channel Layout, 108
Channel PAC 500, 103
Channel Property Page, 101
Channel Settings, 105
Channel and Protocol Types, 6
Colour Properties, ID Card Designer, 182
Colour Property, Alarm Map Designer, 216
Colour Selector, 188
Colour Selector, 218
Common Icon Property, Alarm Map Designer,
217
Comparison Operators, 152
Configure Device IP Addresses, 22
Configure Org Units, 286
Configure Peripherals, 270
Configure Remote IP Event Link, 254
Configure Send Email, 253
Configuring Video Sources, 143
Contact, iii
Context Menu, Alarm Map Designer, 204
Context Menu, Alarms, 225
Context Menu, ID Card Designer, 183
Controller 2100/2200, 112
Controller Alarm Management, 121
Controller Details, 110
Page 298
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Controller Doors, 114
Controller Inputs, 114
Controller Outputs, 118
Controller PAC 202/512, 112
Controller Property Page, 109
Controller, Example, 17
Copyright, ii
Custom Labels, Org Unit Options, 52
Custom Reports, Adding, 157
Customisation, Org Units, 42
D
Daily Time Profile, 77
Data Field Property, ID Card Designer, 183
Database Backup, 266
Debounce Time Examples, 117
Design Editor Region, Alarm Map Designer,
197
Design Menu, Alarm Map Designer, 191
Design Menu, ID Card Designer, 164
Design Regions, 167
Dialup Channel Commands, 32
Direct Channel Commands, 32
Display Mode Property, Alarm Map Designer,
215
Displaying Help Information, 1
Docking Items, ID Card Designer, 185
Door Access, 133
Door Alarm Management, 139
Door Auxiliary IO, 138
Door Configuration, 135
Door Configuration Modes, 138
Door Details, 131
Door List View, 131
Door Mode Profiles, 81
Door Property Page, 131
Door Security Level, 140
Doors, 131
Doors, Example, 19
Download Database to the Controllers using
the PC, 125
Download Database to the Controllers using
the PDA, 126
Download Database, Example, 21
Drawing and Placing Items, Alarm Map
Designer, 203
Drawing and Placing Items, ID Card
Designer, 170
E
ESD Precautions, iv
Edit Menu, Alarm Map Designer, 191
Edit Menu, ID Card Designer, 164
Edit Menu, PAC SecureNet, 30
Editing Properties, Alarm Map Designer, 200
Editing Properties, ID Card Designer, 171
Helpfile Ver 3.4
PAC SecureNet
Encode Keycode, 279
Enlarging, CCTV, 237
Error Messages, 295
Event Archive, 248
Event Archive Restore, 250
Event Facilities, 241
Event Log, 241
Event Log Menu, Alarm Viewer, 222
Event Log Viewer, 230
Event Log Viewer Toolbar, 226
Event to Action, 251
Event to Action Configuration, 252
Event to Action Details, 251
Event to Action, Muster, 259
Event to Action, Muster, 263
Example of Regions Moved About the
Screen, 294
Examples of start and length, 47
Expanding Video Sources, 237
Explorer Bar, 38
Export a Map, 191
Hardware Configuration using PAC 500
Channel, 14
Hardware Installation, 6
Hardware List View, 99
Hardware Menu, PAC SecureNet, 31
Hardware Module, 99
Hardware Specifications, 3
Health and Safety, iv
Height Property, Alarm Map Designer, 214
Height Property, ID Card Designer, 179
Help, 23
Help Menu, Alarm Map Designer, 193
Help Menu, ID Card Designer, 165
Help Menu, PAC SecureNet, 35
Highlighting Events, 243
Holiday Profile List View, 85
Holiday Profile Property Page, 85
Holiday Profiles, 85
Holiday Profiles, Example, 17
Holiday Time Profile, 81
Holopatch Property, ID Card Designer, 179
F
File Menu, Alarm Viewer, 221
File Menu, PAC SecureNet, 30
File and Printer Sharing, 8
Fill Colour Property, Alarm Map Designer,
216
Fill Colour Property, Alarm Map Designer,
217
Filtering Events with User Defined Criteria,
245
Font Property, Alarm Map Designer, 216
Font Selector, 188
Font Selector, 218
Further Information on the Add Items Region,
196
I
ID Card Designer, 163
If an Alarm Occurs, 239
Image Capture, 160
Image Capture Introduction, 160
Image Context Menu, Alarm Map Designer,
205
Image Context Menu, ID Card Designer, 184
Image Item Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
207
Image Item Properties, ID Card Designer, 175
Image Property, Alarm Map Designer, 216
Image Property, ID Card Designer, 182
Import, 191
Incident Report Details, 223
Individual Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
213
Individual Properties, ID Card Designer, 178
Input Modes, 117
Input Templates, 118
Input Types, 117
Inputs Tab, Alarm Map Designer, 195
Installation, 8
Interactive Map, 220
Introduction to Help File, 1
Introduction, Alarm Map Designer, 189
Introduction, Alarm Viewer, 219
Introduction, PAC SecureNet, 7
Issuing Commands to Alarm Points, 234
Issuing Commands to Areas, 232
Item Properties, Alarm Map Designer, 206
Item Properties, ID Card Designer, 174
G
General Tab, Alarm Map Designer, 194
Group Context Menu, Alarm Map Designer,
205
Group Context Menu, ID Card Designer, 184
Group Item Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
212
Group Item Properties, ID Card Designer, 177
Grouping and Ungrouping, Alarm Map
Designer, 201
Grouping and Ungrouping, ID Card Designer,
172
Guests, 69
Guidance on Image Formats and Sizes, 189
H
Hardware Configuration using Offline
Channel, 15
Page 299
PAC SecureNet
K
Key Seek, 277
Keyholder Access Groups, 61
Keyholder Area Usage, 67
Keyholder Details, 57
Keyholder Events, 66
Keyholder Extra Details, 53
Keyholder Extra Information, 66
Keyholder Guest Access, 63
Keyholder Keys, 60
Keyholder List View, 57
Keyholder Notes, 65
Keyholder Personal Access, 64
Keyholder Personal Details, 59
Keyholder Property Page, 57
Keyholders, 57
Keyholders Menu, PAC SecureNet, 31
Keyholders, Example, 20
L
Licence, 269
Licence, Upgrading, 269
Licence, Upgrading, to activate Org Units, ,
287
Lift Access, 129
Lift Destinations, 128
Lift Details, 127
Lift Property Page, 127
Line Context Menu, Alarm Map Designer, 205
Line Context Menu, ID Card Designer, 185
Line Item Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
208
Line Item Properties, ID Card Designer, 176
Line Properties, ID Card Designer, 181
Line Width Property, Alarm Map Designer,
216
List View, 38
Logging On, 25
Login, 26
Logoff, 41
M
Magnetic Stripe, 45
Magstripe Property, ID Card Designer, 179
Manage Controller Firmware, 272
Managing Alarms, 228
Managing Alarms, Auto-Acknowledgement,
255
Map Making Hints, 198
Map Making and Editing, 198
Map Menu, Alarm Viewer, 223
Map Region, 236
Measurement, Alarm Map Designer, 204
Measurement, ID Card Designer, 188
Menus, 29
Page 300
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Modem Initialization String, 266
Modems, 265
More Information on Logical and Physical
Controllers, 100
Move / Resize / Delete Items, 202
Move, Resize and Delete, 172
Multi-line Property, Alarm Map Designer, 216
Multiple Item Properties, Alarm Map
Designer, 211
Multiple Item Properties, ID Card Designer,
177
Multiple Items Context Menu, Alarm Map
Designer, 205
Multiple Items Context Menu, ID Card
Designer, 184
Multiple Org Units Details, 287
Multiple Org Units, Configuration, 290
Multiple Org Units, Configure Actions, 290
Muster Configuration, 260
Muster Operation, 264
Muster and Evacuation, 256
N
Name Property, Alarm Map Designer, 213
Name Property, ID Card Designer, 178
O
Offline Channel Commands, 33
Offline Channel and Controller Tasks, 125
Offline Controller Commands, 34
Online Controller Commands, 33
Operator Alarm Viewer, 74
Operator Details, 71
Operator List View, 71
Operator Privileges, 72
Operator Property Page, 71
Operator, Login Options, 75
Operators, 71
Operators, Example, 21
Ordering Items / Groups on the Page, 192
Ordering Items / Groups, ID Card Designer,
187
Org Units, Alarm Viewer, 290
Org Units, Alarm Viewer, 292
Org Units, Archive, 290
Org Units, Configuring, 287
Org Units, Configuring, 291
Org Units, Customisation, 42
Org Units, Database Backup, 290
Org Units, Database Download, 290
Org Units, Event Log Viewer, 291
Org Units, Guests, 289
Org Units, Guests, 292
Org Units, Hardware, 292
Org Units, Logging in, 287
Org Units, Login, 291
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Org Units, Miscellaneous Notes, 292
Org Units, Operator Property Page, 291
Org Units, Operators, 289
Org Units, Reports, 290
Org Units, Restore, 290
Org Units, User Interface, 290
Organisation Options, 42
Organisational Unit Access Options,
Customising, 51
Organisational Unit Details, 50
Organisational Unit Details, 56
Organisational Units, 56
Organisational Units List, 56
Orientation, ID Card Designer, 179
Other Facilities, 265
Output Properties, Alarm Map Designer, 210
Output Templates, 121
Output Types, 121
Outputs Tab, Alarm Map Designer, 195
P
PAC 500 Series, 6
PAC 500 Specifications, 3
PAC 500 TCP/IP Channel, Example, 16
PAC 512 Specifications, 4
PAC 520 / PAC 530 I/O Controllers, 5
PAC SecureNet, 7
PAC SecureNet Already Running, 27
PAC SecureNet Overview, 26
PAC SecureNet Tools, 22
PAC SecureNet Window, 27
PIN Reader Duress, 121
PIN Readers, 43
PTZ, 237
Page Context Menu, Alarm Map Designer,
205
Page Tabs, Alarm Map Designer, 200
Panning, 237
Photo Item Properties, ID Card Designer, 175
Preview Window, 161
Printing Double-Sided ID Cards on a SingleSided ID Card Printer, 173
Printing and Encoding Magnetic Stripe Cards
using an Eltron P420 Card Printer, 280
Privilege Levels, 74
Privilege Templates, Assigning, 72
Privilege Templates, Editing, 275
Probe / Configure / Unconfigure a Controller,
123
Probing Controller, Example, 17
Properties Region, 169
Properties Region, Alarm Map Designer, 206
Property Page, 40
Proximity Reader, 44
PAC SecureNet
R
RFID Devices, iv
Reader Mode Profiles, 81
Release Notes, 23
Reports, 147
Reports Menu, PAC SecureNet, 35
Reports, Adding to Favourites, 155
Reports, Exporting, 154
Reports, Provided, 149
Reports, Search Parameters, 151
Reports, Using, 147
Reset Password, 274
Resolution Property, Alarm Map Designer,
214
Restore Database, 23
Ruler Context Menu, Alarm Map Designer,
205
Ruler Context Menu, ID Card Designer, 184
S
Scenario, Muster, 259
Scheduling Regular Backups, 267
Search, Advanced, 278
Search, Key Seek, 277
Search, Search Bar, 277
Select Mode, 172
Select Mode, 201
Selecting Items on the Alarm Board and the
Areas Board, 236
Service Manager, 24
Shadow Properties, Alarm Map Designer, 216
Shadow Properties, ID Card Designer, 182
Shape Item Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
207
Shape Item Properties, ID Card Designer,
175
Shape Properties, ID Card Designer, 181
Shape Property, Alarm Map Designer, 217
Signature Item Properties, ID Card Designer,
175
Silence Commands, 229
Simple Example, 15
Single Items Context Menu, Alarm Map
Designer, 204
Single Items Context Menu, ID Card
Designer, 184
Smart Card Property, ID Card Designer, 179
Snap Grid Colour Property, Alarm Map
Designer, 217
Snap Grid Property, Alarm Map Designer,
217
Snap Grid Size Property, Alarm Map
Designer, 217
Snap Properties, ID Card Designer, 178
Specifying a Keyholder as an Operator, 76
Page 301
PAC SecureNet
Specifying the Alarm Point for Muster, 257
Status Bar, 38
Status Bar, Alarm Map Designer, 217
Support, Technical, iii
System Access, 50
System Design, 11
System Plan, 13
System Settings, 42
T
TCP/IP Channel Commands, 31
Tab Area Facilities, 1
Tear Off Confirmation Window, 294
Tear Off Controls, 293
Text Data Item Properties, ID Card Designer,
176
Text Item Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
208
Text Item Properties, ID Card Designer, 176
Text Properties, ID Card Designer, 181
Text Property, Alarm Map Designer, 215
Tilting, 237
Time & Mode Profile List View, 77
Time & Mode Profile Property Page, 77
Time & Mode Profiles, 77
Time or Mode Profiles, Example, 18
Toolbar, 35
Toolbar Facilities, 1
Tools Menu, PAC SecureNet, 34
Tooltip Property, Alarm Map Designer, 213
Training, iii
Transparency Property, Alarm Map Designer,
215
Transparency Property, ID Card Designer,
181
U
Unconfigured Controller Tasks, 123
Units Property, Alarm Map Designer, 214
Units Property, ID Card Designer, 178
Updates, 9
Upgrade Database, 25
Page 302
Helpfile Ver 3.4
Upload Database from a PDA to a PC, 127
Using the Image Capture Utility, 160
V
Version, ii
Video Source, 142
Video Source List View, 142
Video Source Properties, Alarm Map
Designer, 211
Video Source Property Page, 142
Video Sources, General Options, 143
Video Sources, Presets, 144
Video Sources, Presets, Alarm Points, 146
Video Sources, Presets, General Options,
144
Video Sources, Presets, View Options, 145
View Item Properties, Alarm Map Designer,
209
View Menu, Alarm Map Designer, 192
View Menu, Alarm Viewer, 221
View Menu, ID Card Designer, 165
View Menu, PAC SecureNet, 30
Visual Notification, 221
W
Weekly Time Profile, 78
Welcome Screen / System Summary, 28
Width Property, Alarm Map Designer, 214
Width Property, ID Card Designer, 179
Wiegand (2601 format), 46
Wiring, Health and Safety, iv
X
X Property, Alarm Map Designer, 214
X Property, ID Card Designer, 179
Y
Y Property, Alarm Map Designer, 214
Y Property, ID Card Designer, 179
Z
Zoom Function, Alarm Map Designer, 192
Zoom Function, ID Card Designer, 187